JP2019150304A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To create a new entertainment property.SOLUTION: A specific performance can be executed in a specific game state advantageous to a player. Specifically, one or more predetermined imparting targets may be given, but one predetermined imparting target can be consumed each time a predetermined condition (game value imparting condition) is satisfied in the specific game state. The specific performance can be executed when a predetermined imparting target which has not yet been consumed remains among predetermined imparting targets.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 120

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a pachislot gaming machine, or the like.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to perform an effect of informing the number of gaming values that a player can acquire (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-51809 A

  The present inventor has come up with the idea that new entertainment properties can be created by elaborating on the production aspect in the process of earnestly examining various productions performed in gaming machines.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) Symbol changing means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 5C, the second special symbol display unit 5D, the liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
A specification that can be shifted to a specific gaming state (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (for example, a big hit) Game state transition means;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a special round effect) in the specific game state;
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value each time a predetermined condition is established in the specific game state;
A target granting means capable of granting one or more predetermined grant targets (for example, yellow 7);
A target consuming unit capable of consuming one of the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant unit each time the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state,
The specific effect executing means is
When the predetermined grant target that is not consumed by the target consumption means remains among the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant means, it is possible to execute the specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (1), it is possible to execute a specific effect in a specific game state advantageous to the player. Specifically, according to the invention of (1), one or a plurality of predetermined grant targets may be granted, while a predetermined condition (game value grant condition) is satisfied in a specific gaming state. In addition, it is possible to consume one predetermined grant object. And it is comprised so that a specific effect can be performed when the predetermined grant object which has not yet been consumed among the predetermined grant targets remains. Accordingly, the player is interested in the predetermined grant object that is consumed one by one each time the game value grant condition is satisfied, and the specific effect that can be executed when the predetermined grant target remains. It is possible to improve the fun of the game through this.

  According to the present invention, new entertainment properties can be created.

It is a front view of the game board concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is the schematic perspective view which looked at the gaming machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. 1 is a schematic front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which cut | disconnected the dish unit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which cut | disconnected the top decoration in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which cut | disconnected the right side decoration member and the left side decoration member in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic perspective view shown from the right diagonal direction of a plate unit. It is a schematic perspective view shown from the diagonal left direction of a plate unit. It is a schematic front view of a dish unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the right side of a plate unit. It is a schematic side view which shows the left side of a plate unit. It is a schematic perspective view shown from the lower diagonal direction of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a dish unit. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the state which removed some components of the plate unit. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which removed some components of the plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the speaker periphery in a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the ventilation mechanism around the speaker in a dish unit. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating operation | movement of a ventilation mechanism. It is an internal top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a ventilation mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating operation | movement of a ventilation mechanism. It is an internal top view for demonstrating operation | movement of a ventilation mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the various tables of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of a right decoration member. It is a schematic plan view which shows the inner side light-guide plate in a right decoration member. It is a partially notched perspective view which shows the incident rear end surface of the inner side light-guide plate in a right decoration member. It is a partially notched rear view which shows the incident rear end surface of the inner side light-guide plate in a right decoration member. It is a partially notched perspective view which shows the output front end surface of the inner side light-guide plate in a right decoration member. It is a partially notched front view which shows the emission front end surface of the inner side light-guide plate in a right decoration member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center decoration member in a top decoration. It is a disassembled perspective view of the center decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows the internal structure of the center decoration member in a top decoration. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the internal structure of the center decoration member in a top decoration. It is a decomposition | disassembly top view of the center decoration member in a top decoration. It is a disassembled perspective view of the right decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic front view which shows some components of the right decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows some components of the right decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the right side of some components of the right decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic top view which shows the left side of some components of the right decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic back view which shows some components of the right side decoration member in a top decoration. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the modification of a ventilation mechanism. It is a front view of the 1st accessory apparatus and 2nd accessory apparatus which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the 1st accessory apparatus which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view from the front of a 1st accessory apparatus. It is the perspective view from the right front which mainly showed the frame among the 1st accessory apparatuses. It is the perspective view from the front which expanded the left part of the lower accessory lifting mechanism. It is a perspective view from the left front which mainly showed the frame among the 1st accessory apparatuses. It is the perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower movable production | presentation actor. It is a perspective view from the upper right rear which showed the lower movable production | presentation actor. It is the perspective view from the lower right front which showed the lower movable production | presentation actor. It is a perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower rotation decoration body. It is a perspective view from the upper left front which showed the lower rotation decoration body. (A) It is the expansion perspective view which showed the engagement recessed part. (B) It is the side surface cross-section schematic diagram which showed the engagement recessed part. It is the perspective view from the upper right front which showed the lower rotation drive mechanism. It is the perspective view from the upper right front which showed the inside of the left case. It is the perspective view from the upper right front which showed the rotating shaft part. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper right front which showed the rotating shaft part. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper right front which showed a mode that a rotation shaft part was assembled | attached to a lower rotation decoration body. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper right front which showed a mode that a lower rotation decoration body was assembled | attached to a lower rotation drive mechanism. It is the perspective view from the upper right front which showed the upper movable production | presentation actor. It is the perspective view from the upper right back which showed the upper movable production | presentation actor. (A) It is the expansion perspective view which showed the engagement convex part. (B) It is the side surface cross-section schematic diagram which showed the engagement convex part. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper right front which showed the left part movable production | presentation actor. It is a disassembled perspective view from the lower right rear which showed the left part movable production | presentation actor. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper right front which showed the right part movable production | presentation actor. It is a disassembled perspective view from the upper left rear which showed the right part movable production | presentation actor. It is the front view of the game board which showed the 1st state. It is the front view which showed a mode that a lower rotation decoration body and an upper rotation decoration body were rotated when switched to a 2nd state. It is the front view which showed a mode that a lower rotation decoration body and an upper rotation decoration body adjoin each other when switched to a 2nd state. It is a front view of the game board which showed the 2nd state. (A) It is the side surface cross-section schematic diagram which showed the state which an engagement convex part begins to insert in an engagement recessed part. (B) It is a side cross-sectional schematic diagram which showed a mode that the relative position of an engagement convex part and an engagement recessed part was adjusted with an inclined surface. It is the front view which showed a mode that a lower rotation decoration body and an upper rotation decoration body were rotated when switched to a 3rd state. It is the front view which showed a mode that a lower rotation decoration body and an upper rotation decoration body adjoin each other when switched to a 3rd state. It is a front view of the game board which showed the 3rd state. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating message transmission of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot kind determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot kind determination table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern table used in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize detection process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern determination process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the time reduction number subtraction process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end interval process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern table setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol control process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control circuit main process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the one part process shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the button input interruption process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the operation means input process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message setting process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the directory table registration process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the message transmission process performed in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows transition transition of the production mode which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is the table | surface which put together the transition conditions of the production mode which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit medium plate acquisition process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in normal round performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the interval performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the plate acquisition round process performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the plate acquisition result display process performed in a sub control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows a navigation lottery table. (B) is a figure which shows the relationship between the color of the aura in a Hatena mark with an aura, and a probability variation reliability. It is a figure for demonstrating the display timing of a plate acquisition result. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in 1st big hit mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the big hit performed in a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device when a big hit generate | occur | produces in the 1st special mode. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device when the big hit of V alignment generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device when the big hit of G alignment generate | occur | produces. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch effect middle yellow 7 provision process performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the said change middle yellow 7 provision process performed in a subcontrol circuit. (A) is a figure which shows the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table. (B) is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of stocks of yellow 7, and the effect color of a logo cover. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a round start performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of an attacker winning a prize performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 provision effect performed when the result of a special symbol fluctuation is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 provision effect performed when the result of a special symbol fluctuation is a loss. It is a figure which shows the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device during 2nd big hit mode. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device, when a freezing effect generate | occur | produces in 2nd special mode. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of a fluctuation production pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of a prefetch effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the process in time-short mode B performed in a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device, when a freeze effect generate | occur | produces in the time reduction mode B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of an effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a Kroon prize performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a process in time-short mode B (1) performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows a process in time-short mode B (2) performed in a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process in normal mode performed in a sub control circuit. (A) is a figure which shows the probability variation suggestion sound production determination table. (B) is a figure which shows a probability variation suggestion lamp production | presentation determination table. (C) is a figure which shows the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows a series of images displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the time reduction mode A. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding change effect (1) execution process performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding change effect (2) execution process performed in a subcontrol circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of a countdown effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect of an effect pattern.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the gaming machines according to the present invention are intended for general pachinko gaming machines and pachislot gaming machines including sealed pachinko gaming machines, but in the present embodiment, pachinko gaming machines of the form shown in the drawings are assumed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1-6, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is surrounded by a guide rail (outer rail 36, inner rail 37), and a rolling area (for example, a gaming area 1p) in which a game ball can roll down. (Not shown) provided with a game board 1 having a game board 1 and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board can be visually recognized. And a light guide plate 1031 that is detachably attached to the back side of the game board 1 and displays a predetermined image, and provided on the back side of the light guide plate 1031. A back box 1055 on which various kinds of actors (movable stage actors, light emitting stage actors, etc.) are arranged is attached. In the present embodiment, an “act” means an effect device that produces an effect by moving or emitting light.

  The back box 1055 is directly attached to the back side of the game board 1 via the light guide plate 1031. The back box 1055 is provided on a rear frame (not shown) that is rotatably supported by the main body frame on the back side of the light guide plate 1031 attached to the back side of the game board 1. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of repair and inspection, it may be attached via a rear frame so that it can be easily separated from the main body frame.

  In the rear frame (not shown), a display device (not shown) for performing a predetermined effect display is detachably provided from the back. Note that the display device may be detachably provided on the back side of the back box 1055.

  The display mode of the display device (not shown) is controlled by the sub-control board based on a command from the main control board. For example, in the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is assumed as the display device. The display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display as long as it can display a predetermined image effect, and includes, for example, a cathode ray tube including a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube), a dot LED (Light Emitting Diode), a segment LED, an EL (Electro Luminescent), a plasma, and the like. It may be a thing.

  The game board 1 is provided with an opening 1h that can visually recognize a display mode displayed on the display device, and the surface (front surface) of the game board 1 includes an area including the game board opening 1h. A game area 1p in which the game ball can roll down is formed. An appropriate decorative member 1g is provided on the upper portion of the opening 1h.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame (not shown). In this state, the main body frame is attached to the outer frame via a main body frame hinge. It is rotatably supported.

  The table frame 3 includes various table frame constituent members. The table frame constituent members include a transparent plate unit 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and various decorative members for producing effects by light. (Top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. The speakers 10a and 10b are covered with a front cover 147c (more specifically, cover members 11a and 11b). In addition, a table frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the table frame 3 are contained.

  The transparent plate unit 7 is composed of one or a plurality of transparent plate members (for example, glass materials) and the like. The transparent frame unit 7 includes a front frame base plate (right base plate 3aa, left base plate 3ab, and The front frame opening 3h (window) provided in the lower base plate 3ac) is detachably attached from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate, and the front frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. In the closed state, the game board 1 is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side and cover the front surface (front surface) side.

  The tray unit 8 is provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls and the lower side of the upper tray 17. For example, the lower tray 17 can store game balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. A dish 18 is provided.

  Further, a main control board (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the back box 1055 while being accommodated in a case.

  Although not particularly limited, for example, the main control board is connected to a sub-control board and a payout / launch control board via a relay board (not shown). In this case, the sub control board responds to various commands supplied from the main control board, performs display control in the display device, control related to the sound generated from the speakers 10a to 10c, effect control of various accessories, and various functions. It controls various LEDs used for objects and decorative members. Further, a launching device 26, a payout device for paying out game balls, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control board. Further, for example, a sub-relay board that transfers signals to the sub-control board, a sub-ROM relay board that stores a program related to game effects, a power supply board that supplies power, and the like are also provided.

  In addition, in the rear frame in which the back box 1055 is disposed, for example, a ball tank (not shown) for housing game balls to be paid out as rental balls or prize balls, and a plurality of game balls from the ball tank are continuously provided. A rail unit (not shown) to be rolled down, a payout device (not shown) that can be continued to the lower end of the rail unit, and a ball that supplies game balls paid out from the payout device to the upper plate 17 A payout passage (not shown) is continuously provided.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
The game board 1 has a plurality of passage areas (general winning opening 1013, start) on which a game nail and a game ball rolling down the game area can pass on the front of a game board body (panel body) made of a transparent acrylic panel or the like. A winning opening 1009, a large winning opening 1011), a stage 1001, and the like are arranged (see FIG. 1). Various game members disposed on the front surface of the game board main body (panel main body) are not particularly limited to the present embodiment, and various game members can be appropriately changed in design.

  The stage 1001 is provided on a base plate 1000 disposed along the opening 1h, and a game ball that has been rolling down the game area 1p enters from a warp entrance 1007 disposed in the game area 1p. , A member that rolls the game ball entered from the warp entrance 1007 to the left and right in the approximate center region of the game board 1 and then returns to the game region 1p, and is not limited to the illustrated embodiment. These stages can be appropriately changed according to the embodiment.

  The general winning opening 1013, the starting winning opening 1009, and the big winning opening 1011 are arranged in a notch area having a predetermined shape provided in a predetermined area of the panel body of the game board 1. The general winning opening 1013, the start winning opening 1009, and the big winning opening 1011 are not particularly characterized in the present embodiment, and are not limited to the illustrated form, and can be changed within the scope of the present invention. .

  Also, behind the opening 1h, a first accessory device 4000 and a second accessory device 5000 that perform effects are arranged. The specific configurations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 will be described later.

<Characteristic configuration of gaming machine>
As shown in FIGS. 2 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes characteristic components in the table frame 3. The components of the front frame 3 include the right base plate 3aa, the left base plate 3ab, and the lower base plate 3ac constituting the front frame base plate, as well as the transparent plate unit 7, the dish unit 8, the top ornament 14, and the right decorative member 15. There is a left decorative member 16. The dish unit 8 is attached to the lower base plate 3ac. The top ornament 14 is attached to the upper part of the right base plate 3aa and the left base plate 3ab. The right decorative member 15 is attached to the lower portion of the right base plate 3aa, and the left decorative member 16 is attached to the lower portion of the left base plate 3ab. The main characteristic components will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<About dish unit 8>
As shown in FIGS. 7 to 15, the dish unit 8 includes an upper dish upper cover 8 a, a lower dish cover 8 b, an under cover 8 c, a support member 8 d, a first operation unit 9 A, a second operation unit 9 B, a speaker unit 10, an air blower. A mechanism 110, a light emitting unit 12, an upper plate 17, a lower plate 18, and the like are included. The upper plate 17 is provided at a position on the upper left side of the support member 8d, the first operation unit 9A is provided at the upper center position of the support member 8d on the right side of the upper plate 17, and the second operation unit 9B is The first operation unit 9A is provided at a position on the right side of the upper portion of the support member 8d adjacent to the right. The lower plate 18 is provided at the lower left position of the support member 8d below the upper plate 17, and the speaker unit 10 is provided at the lower center position of the support member 8d adjacent to the right side of the lower plate 18. The mechanism 110 is provided at a position to the lower right of the support member 8d that is adjacent to the right of the speaker unit 10, and the light emitting unit 12 is disposed to the right of the lower portion of the support member 8d that is adjacent to the right of the blower mechanism 110 and to the left of the launching device 26. It is provided in the position. The first operation unit 9A, the second operation unit 9B, the speaker unit 10, the air blowing mechanism 110, the light emitting unit 12, the upper plate 17, and the lower plate 18 are operation members to be described later of the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B. (The operation buttons) and the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18 are covered with the upper plate upper cover 8a, the lower plate cover 8b, and the under cover 8c so as to expose the upper surfaces thereof. The upper plate upper cover 8a, a part of the lower plate cover 8b, and the under cover 8c are detachable.

[Upper plate 17 and lower plate 18]
The upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls and the like, and a payout outlet 170 for paying out game balls to the upper plate main body 17p. In addition to the lower tray main body 18p and the like that can store the game balls, the lower tray 18 drops the game balls to the lower tray main body 18p and the discharge port 180 for discharging the game balls to the lower outside of the lower tray main body 18p. It has a ball removal portion 181.

[First operation unit 9A]
The first operation unit 9A is the same as the operation unit 9 described above, and in addition to an operation member (operation button) 2000 that can be operated by the player, a press detection sensor 2035 (not shown) and an electric decoration board 2183 (illustration). Abbreviation) etc. The operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A is exposed from an opening provided in the center of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the pressing operation surface of the operation member 2000 is formed in a circular shape. The operation member 2000 is provided as a button for operation effects having a relatively high frequency of use, as is apparent from an effect lottery table (see FIG. 23) described later. The press detection sensor 2035 and the electrical decoration board 2183 are connected to a sub control board 33 (see FIG. 22) to be described later via a wiring such as a dedicated harness (not shown). As a result, when the operation member 2000 is pressed, an operation signal from the press detection sensor 2035 is supplied to the sub-control board 33.

[Second operation unit 9B]
The second operation unit 9B has a common board including a ball release button 22, a ball lending button 23, and a return button 24, as well as a push button 3000 for a player to perform an operation effect and a cross button 3100 for a player to select and operate. It is configured by being mounted on 3200. The ball lending button 23, the return button 24, the push button 3000, and the cross button 3100 are detected to be displaced by a press detection sensor provided on the common substrate 3200 corresponding to each of them. The common board 3200 is connected to a sub control board 33 and a card unit unit CU (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, via wiring such as a harness (not shown). As a result, when the ball lending button 23 or the return button 24 is pressed, a ball lending operation signal or a return operation signal from the press detection sensor is supplied from the common substrate 3200 to the card unit CU, while the push button 3000 or the cross button is pressed. In the pressing operation of 3100, an effect operation signal and a selection operation signal by the pressing detection sensor are supplied from the common substrate 3200 to the sub control substrate 33. The press button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B is exposed from an opening provided on the right side of the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the press operation surface of the press button 3000 is formed in a square shape. The press button 3000 is provided as a button for operation effects that is relatively infrequently used, as is apparent from an effect lottery table (see FIG. 23) described later. Here, the cross button 3100 and the push button 3000 are both formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having straight sides, and the straight sides are arranged to face each other.

[Speaker unit 10]
The speaker unit 10 is of a bass reflex type that amplifies low-frequency sounds, and includes a speaker 10c and an enclosure 10e. The speaker 10c is provided on the front surface of the enclosure 10e, and the front portion of the speaker 10c is covered by the speaker cover 10k provided at the center of the front surface of the lower dish cover 8b. The sound generated at the front portion of the speaker 10c is directly transmitted to the player through the speaker cover 10k, while the sound generated at the rear portion of the speaker 10c once enters the interior of the enclosure 10e.

  The enclosure 10e is for confining the sound generated from the rear part of the speaker 10c so as not to interfere with the sound generated from the front part thereof, and is formed to have a relatively large volume. As shown in FIG. 15, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e is formed so as to protrude to the upper right side of the lower plate 18. Moreover, the upper left part 10ea of the enclosure 10e is arrange | positioned so that the bottom part of the top plate main body 17p may be contacted. Furthermore, the lower left portion 10eb of the enclosure 10e is disposed so as to come into contact with the right end portion of the lower plate body 18p.

  As shown in FIG. 17, an opening 10 ec leading to a conduit (not shown) provided inside is provided at the lower right end of the enclosure 10 e. Such a conduit and the opening 10ec propagate the sound emitted from the rear part of the speaker 10c to the inside of the enclosure 10e to the outside while resonating and enhancing, based on the principle of so-called Helmholtz resonance. The sound propagating from the opening 10ec to the outside is felt as a rich and powerful bass by overlapping with the sound emitted from the front part of the speaker 10c. Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air flows out from the opening 10ec to the outside in conjunction with the generation of the sound. In a state where no sound is generated from the speaker 10c, air does not flow out from the opening 10ec to the outside.

  According to such a speaker unit 10, since the left upper part 10ea of the enclosure 10e has a partially bulged shape, a sufficient volume can be secured, for example, compared to a rectangular parallelepiped enclosure, and a sufficient sound can be obtained from the speaker 10c. A powerful bass can be generated with pressure.

  Further, when sound is generated from the speaker 10c, at the same time, the wind can be sent out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e with sufficient wind pressure.

  Further, when the sound is generated by the speaker 10c, the entire enclosure 10e vibrates according to the sound pressure, but the upper left portion 10ea and the lower left portion 10eb of the enclosure 10e are connected to a part of the upper plate body 17p and the lower plate body 18p. Since they are in contact with each other, the vibration is also transmitted to the entire upper plate body 17p and the lower plate body 18p. Thereby, even when a large number of game balls are stored in the upper plate body 17p and the lower plate body 18p, the ball balls of the game balls coming out from the payout outlet 170 and the discharge port 180 are effectively prevented by vibration. Can be prevented.

[Blower mechanism 110]
The blower mechanism 110 switches the direction of the wind sent from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e, and is disposed adjacent to the right side surface of the enclosure 10e. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the air blowing mechanism 110 includes cover members 110 </ b> A and 110 </ b> B that can be divided into left and right parts, a solenoid 111, a slide member 112, a link member 113, a spring 114, an opening / closing member 115, and an opening / closing detection sensor 116. Have The solenoid 111, the slide member 112, the link member 113, the spring 114, the opening / closing member 115, and the opening / closing detection sensor 116 are accommodated inside the cover members 110A and 110B.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the cover member 110 </ b> A is provided with a space portion 110 a in which the opening / closing member 115 can be closed / opened in a direction straight from the opening 10 ec of the enclosure 10 e. The space 110a is always open below the opening / closing member 115 regardless of whether the opening / closing member 115 is closed or open, and the vent 8ca provided in the under cover 8c is located (see FIG. 17). As shown in FIGS. 18 and 20, the cover member 110 </ b> B has an opening 110 b at a position facing the space 110 a. On the right side of the opening 110b, an air outlet 80 provided in the detachable lower right side cover 8ba as a part of the lower dish cover 8b is located (see FIGS. 13, 16, and 17). As a result, when the opening / closing member 115 is in a state of closing the space 110a, the wind sent from the opening 10ec is blocked by hitting the opening / closing member 115, and is guided downward to the space 110a without passing through the opening 110b. It is burned. The wind guided downward of the space 110a is sent to the outside through the vent 8ca of the under cover 8c. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 115 opens the space 110a, the wind sent from the opening 10ec flows almost straight without being blocked by the opening / closing member 115, and then passes through the space 110a and the opening 110b. It is sent to the outside through the air outlet 80 of the lower side cover 8ba. The firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 is disposed at a position substantially directly opposite to the air blowing port 80, and the wind emitted from the air blowing port 80 hits a player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. That is, since the flow path through which the wind flows from the opening 10ec to the firing handle 26b through the space 110a, the opening 110b and the air blowing port 80 is formed substantially straight, the wind pressure can be applied to the player's hand holding the firing handle 26b. The wind can be reached without weakening as much as possible, and the player can surely feel the wind.
In addition, regardless of whether the opening / closing member 115 is in the closed or open state, the sound sent from the opening 10ec together with the wind is released to the outside through either the air blowing port 80 or the ventilation port 8ca. A deep bass can be fully experienced without reducing the acoustic effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 21, the solenoid 111 has a plunger 111 a that can project and retract in conjunction with an on / off operation. The distal end portion of the plunger 111 a is connected to the slide member 112. The slide member 112 is supported by the cover member 110A so as to be movable along the horizontal direction. A long hole 112a is formed in the slide member 112 so as to extend along the vertical direction. A connecting portion 113a of the link member 113 is movably locked in the long hole 112a. The base end portion 113 b of the link member 113 is rotatably supported by the cover member 110 </ b> A, and one end of the spring 114 is locked to a portion near the distal end portion of the link member 113. The other end of the spring 114 is locked to an appropriate part of the cover member 110A. A long hole 113 c is formed at the tip of the link member 113. A connecting pin 115a provided on the opening / closing member 115 is movably locked in the long hole 113c. The opening / closing member 115 is guided by the cover member 110A so as to be movable between a closed position where the opening / closing member 115 remains in the space 110a and an open position shifted from the space 110a. The open / close detection sensor 116 is constituted by, for example, a touch sensor or a proximity sensor. When the open / close member 115 is in the open position, a part of the link member 113 is in contact with or close to the space portion 110a. Is detected. When the opening / closing member 115 is in the closed position, the link member 113 is separated from the opening / closing detection sensor 116 to detect that the space portion 110a is in the closed state. The open / close detection sensor 116 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 33.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, when the solenoid 111 is in an off state and the plunger 111a is in the projecting position, the slide member 112 is located on the left side in the figure, and the distal end side of the link member 113 is pulled by the spring 114. The opening / closing member 115 connected to the long hole 113c of the tip portion via the connecting pin 115a remains in the closed position of the space portion 110a, and the space portion 110a is closed. At this time, since the link member 113 is at a position separated from the open / close detection sensor 116, a detection signal indicating a closed state is supplied from the open / close detection sensor 116 to the sub-control board 33.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the solenoid 111 is turned on, the plunger 111a moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. When the plunger 111a moves to the retracted position, the slide member 112 moves to the right side in the figure, and accordingly, the distal end side of the link member 113 counterclockwise around the base end portion 113b against the pulling force of the spring 114. It rotates in the direction of. As a result, the opening / closing member 115 connected to the elongated hole 113c of the link member 113 via the connecting pin 115a moves from the space portion 110a to the retracted position on the right side in the drawing, whereby the space portion 110a is opened. Become. At this time, since the link member 113 is in contact with or close to the opening / closing detection sensor 116, a detection signal indicating an open state is supplied from the opening / closing detection sensor 116 to the sub-control board 33.

  According to such a blower mechanism 110, the flow path of the wind from the opening 10ec to the firing handle 26b through the blower port 80 is substantially linear, and the space 110a located between the opening 10ec and the blower port 80. Is controlled to be in a closed / open state and the space portion 110a is in a closed state, the air flow from the opening 10ec can be guided to the vent 8ca located below the space portion 110a, while the space portion 110a is In the open state, the flow of wind from the opening 10ec can be linearly guided from the space portion 110a to the air blowing port 80 through the opening portion 110b. The wind that has left the air outlet 80 flows straight and straight toward the firing handle 26b, and hits the player's hand that holds the firing handle 26b. Thereby, the wind can be felt by the sense of skin as well as the hearing of the deep bass. When the wind from the opening 10ec is guided to the vent 8ca, the player's hand is not attached to the vicinity of the vent 8ca, so that, for example, only heavy bass can be felt by hearing without feeling the wind. .

[Light Emitting Unit 12]
The light emitting unit 12 irradiates the player's hand holding the launch handle 26b with irradiation light, and is disposed obliquely above and to the left of the launch handle 26b. Although the detailed explanation of the light emitting unit 12 is omitted, the light emitting unit 12 includes a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means, a light emitting substrate on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted, a light guide plate for guiding light from the plurality of LEDs in a predetermined direction, and the like. Configured. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, in a predetermined direction in which light from the light emitting unit 12 is guided, an irradiation window 81 provided on the detachable upper right side cover 8bb is provided as a part of the lower dish cover 8b. Yes. The light from the light emitting unit 12 is irradiated toward the launch handle 26b through the irradiation window 81, and is reflected as a spotlight on the player's hand holding the launch handle 26b. Thereby, in addition to the wind that appeals to the skin sensation and the deep bass that appeals to hearing, the visual sense can be stimulated and felt by irradiation light.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 22, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the gaming machine has a main control board 28 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control board 33 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. .

  The main control board 28 includes a main CPU 280, a main ROM 281 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 282 as a readable / writable memory, an initial reset circuit 283, an I / O port 284, a command output port 285 as command transmission means, and a reset clock pulse. A generation circuit 286 and a game information output circuit 287 are provided. The main control board 28 is connected to various devices (equipment, switches, etc.).

  The main CPU 280 is connected to the main ROM 281 and the main RAM 282, and has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 281.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a first start port switch 311 disposed behind a first start port (not shown) in the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 311, a winning lottery is performed.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a second start port switch 312 disposed behind a second start port (not shown) in the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 312, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start port switch 311 and the second start port switch 312 are used to control a predetermined detection signal as a prize when it is detected that a game ball has entered the first start port and the second start port. Supply to the substrate 28.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a pass gate switch 314 disposed behind a pass gate (not shown) in the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 314, a normal symbol lottery is performed on the assumption that the game ball has won the pass gate. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display portion 5A provided on the game board 1. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display unit 5A, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do it.

  The pass gate switch 314 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the pass gate. Thereby, the passage gate switch 314 provides an opportunity to open the second start port.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a general winning opening switch 310 disposed behind a general winning opening (not shown) provided in the game board 1. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 310, a predetermined number of prize balls are played by the payout device 35.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a first grand prize port count switch 315 disposed behind the first big prize port (not shown) in the game board 1. The first grand prize opening count switch 315 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the first big prize opening. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the first big winning port count switch 315, the payout device 35 uses a predetermined number of game balls as a winning ball through the payout port 170 or the discharge port 180 or the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. Dispensing to the plate 18.

  Connected to the main control board 28 is a second grand prize port count switch 316 disposed behind the second big prize port (not shown) in the game board 1. The second grand prize opening count switch 316 is for counting the number of winning game balls to the second big prize opening. When a winning of a game ball is detected by the second big winning port count switch 316, the payout device 35 uses the preset number of game balls as a winning ball via the payout outlet 170 or the discharge port 180 and the upper plate 17. Alternatively, payout to the lower plate 18 is performed.

  The first grand prize port count switch 315 and the second grand prize port count switch 316 are configured to send a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 when the game ball passes through the first grand prize port and the second grand prize port. To supply.

  The main control board 28 is connected with a specific area switch 317A and a non-specific area switch 317B arranged in a specific area and a non-specific area (not shown) inside the second big prize opening. The specific area switch 317A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a V prize when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 317B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control board 28 as a non-V prize when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area in the big hit gaming state.

  The main control board 28 includes a second grand prize port solenoid 315A that drives a first grand prize port shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the first grand prize port, and a second major prize port shutter that opens and closes the second grand prize port. The second grand prize winning solenoid 316A for driving (not shown) is exclusively controlled. As a result, the first grand prize opening shutter has an open state (first aspect) in which a game ball can be easily won into the first grand prize opening, and a closed state (second aspect) in which a game ball cannot be won. ) And the first big prize opening is at least closed, the second big prize opening shutter is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded to the second big prize opening. The game ball is driven so as to change into a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball. The opening of the first grand prize port and the second major prize port by the first grand prize port shutter and the second grand prize port shutter is driven by the first special symbol display section 5C provided on the game board 1 or the second This is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the special symbol display unit 5D and the game is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control board 28 controls a blade member solenoid 313 that opens and closes a blade member (not shown) provided at the second start port. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 5A in the predetermined light emission mode, the blade member is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port. Become.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit probability in a gaming state (non-probability change / non-timeless gaming state) that is not the short-time gaming state is 1/256, and the blade member is not released. . On the other hand, the normal symbol hit probability in the high probability state (time-short game state) is, for example, 255/256, and when this is won, the blade member is opened three times, for example, for 1.3 seconds. In addition, the number of normal symbols that become a winning symbol in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number that is the upper limit when the second start port is opened is 10 counts (10).

  The main control board 28 controls a displacement member solenoid 318 that is operated so as to open and close a displacement member (not shown) in a specific region in the second big prize opening. Thereby, when the round game in the big hit game state is being executed, the displacement member is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, so that the game ball easily passes through the specific area. On the other hand, if the displacement member is in the closed state even in the big hit game state, it becomes difficult or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 5E displays the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D when the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 311 when the first special symbol display unit 5C is variably displayed. First special symbol display unit 5C or second special symbol display unit 5D until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the first special based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening The number of executions (starts) of symbol change display is held, that is, the number of holds related to the first special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the first special symbol that has been reserved as the number of the reserved symbols relating to the first special symbol is started.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 5F displays the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D when the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 312 when the second special symbol display unit 5D is variably displayed. The second special based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port until the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 5C or the second special symbol display unit 5D The number of executions (starts) of symbol change display is suspended, that is, the number of suspensions related to the second special symbol is displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variability display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of the reserved symbols related to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the priority order of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning according to the winning order at the first starting port and the second starting port.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions for which the execution of the special symbol variable display is suspended. In this embodiment, the main CPU 280 wins game balls at the first start port and the second start port. When the game balls are detected by the first start port switch 311 and the second start port switch 312, the maximum number of variable display suspensions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 respectively (that is, 4 detections). Number of times), and the fifth and subsequent numbers are not stored as the number of reservations. At this time, when the number of holdings decreases due to the end of the variable symbol display, the number of holdings is again added up to four.

  When the number of first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 5C is held, for example, up to four, the information on the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 5C is stored in the main RAM 282. One special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, information on special symbol games corresponding to the number of holdings of four is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 282. Sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 5D, when the number of the second special symbol game held is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 5D. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 282. Thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the number of holdings is 4 in the main RAM 282. 2 are sequentially stored as starting memories in the special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4).

  Therefore, the total number of game balls held in the special symbol game associated with winning at the first start port and the second start port is 8 in total, and the first special symbol hold display section 5E and the second special symbol hold display The number of pending displays by the part 5F is also four.

  In the open state of the first big prize opening by the first big prize opening shutter, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the first big prize opening count switch 315 becomes a predetermined number (for example, ten winning numbers), Alternatively, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as a later-described opening time described later is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big prize opening shutter has elapsed, the first big prize opening shutter is driven to close the first big prize opening.

  Similarly, in the opened state of the second big prize opening by the second big prize opening shutter, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second big prize opening count switch 316 becomes a predetermined number (for example, ten winning numbers). Or, it is maintained until one of the conditions such as a predetermined later-described opening time elapses is satisfied. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second big prize opening shutter has elapsed, the second big prize opening shutter is driven to close the second big prize opening.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are repeated based on a preset big opening / closing pattern (hit opening / closing pattern). In the big hit game state, a game in which each of the first big prize opening and the second big prize opening is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times based on the big prize opening / closing pattern (hit opening / closing pattern) is “round game (round Play) ”. A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. About the state from when the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening is closed by one round game until the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened as the next round game Is also called “inter-round game”, “inter-round interval” or simply “interval”. In one round game, each of the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening may be in an open state and a closed state multiple times. In one round game, the opening / closing states of the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are controlled exclusively. That is, in one round game, while one big prize opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big prize opening is continuously closed.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit game state as a game state having a property different from the big hit game state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game. In the small hit gaming state of the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is prescribed to be repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times. Yes. Of course, in the small hit gaming state, an arbitrary or specific big winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened once or a plurality of times. This small hit game state is a game state that shifts when a small hit is made by special symbol lottery. The game state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the small hit win is made and the game state is shifted to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state remains the non-probability changing gaming state before the transition to the small hit gaming state. Therefore, there is no transition to the probable gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit win is made in the probability variation gaming state and a transition is made to the small hit gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state is the small hit gaming state as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability change gaming state before the transition to, and does not shift to the non-probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. In a single round game, if the maximum number of winnings per round is reached before the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened a predetermined number of times, The winning opening is closed, and the round game is ended without opening the first and second winning openings for the remaining number of times of opening.

  In a specific round game in which the second big prize opening is opened in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern). Thus, the specific area is in an open state and a closed state in a specific round game in the big hit game state. That is, in a specific round game, there is a possibility that a game ball passes through a specific area and becomes a V prize, while in a round game other than a specific round game, it is assumed that a game ball has won a second big prize opening. However, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area or is in a difficult state. That is, the types of jackpot gaming states include a jackpot gaming state that includes a specific round game and a jackpot gaming state that does not include a specific round game.

  On the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D, the symbols composed of numbers are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 except for specific cases. (Decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbols that have been variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Further, in the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D, if the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is in a specific stop display mode, the player is made aware that it is a “hit”. The effect image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol display unit 5C and the second special symbol display unit 5D in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, “big hit”, the liquid crystal The combination of the decorative symbols for effects displayed on the screen of the display device 4 becomes a specific display mode (for example, a mode in which all the same symbols are arranged in a plurality of symbol rows are stopped and displayed), and The effect image for the big hit is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 has a special game (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through predetermined areas (first start port and second start port) in the game area 1p. The lottery means capable of lottering whether or not to execute () is realized.

  The main ROM 281 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 280 to execute various processes such as jackpot lottery and symbol lottery.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, tables stored in the main ROM 281 include a big hit lottery table and a symbol lottery table. The big hit lottery table is used when the big hit lottery is performed by random number lottery. For example, out of the random number range 0 to 255, a random value of 0 to 254 is extracted, and when a random number of 255 is extracted, the big hit It is stipulated that it will be won. The symbol lottery table is used to determine the first special symbol (Special Fig. 1) and the second special symbol (Special Fig. 2) by random lottery in the case of winning the big hit. Such a symbol lottery table, for example, for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), when random values 0 to 35 are extracted from the random number range 0 to 99, the 4R normal symbol corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is displayed. When a random value of 36 to 65 is extracted, a 16R normal symbol corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot is determined, and when a random value of 66 to 85 is extracted, a 4R probability variable symbol corresponding to the 4R probability variable jackpot is determined. , 86 to 99 are extracted, the 16R probability variation symbol corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is determined. In addition, the symbol lottery table determines, for example, the 4R probability variable symbol corresponding to the 4R probability variable big hit when a random value of 0 to 33 is extracted from the random number range 0 to 99 with respect to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). In addition, it is specified that when a random value of 34 to 99 is extracted, a 16R probability variation symbol corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is determined.

  The main RAM 282 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 280. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 280, another readable / writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 282.

  The initial reset circuit 283 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 280.

  The I / O port 284 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 280 and output signals from the main CPU 280 to various devices.

  The command output port 285 transmits various commands from the main CPU 280 to the sub-control board 33.

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 286 generates a clock pulse for executing a timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  The game information output circuit 287 is for outputting various information to the externally connected hall computer HP and external information display device ED.

  Various devices connected to the main control board 28 include a second big prize opening solenoid 315A, a second big prize opening solenoid 316A, a blade member solenoid 313, a displacement member solenoid 318, and an external terminal plate 320.

  The external terminal board 320 is referred to as an outer end board for short, and is an external information display device ED having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, or a hall for managing a plurality of gaming machines installed in the hall. This is for data communication with an external device such as a computer HP.

  The various switches connected to the main control board 28 include a general winning port switch 310, a first starting port switch 311, a second starting port switch 312, a passing gate switch 314, a first large winning port count switch 315, a second A big prize opening count switch 316, a specific area switch 317A, a non-specific area switch 317B, and a backup clear switch 319 are included.

  The backup clear switch 319 clears backup data of the main control board 28 and a later-described payout / launch control board 34 in the event of a power interruption in accordance with the operation of the hall manager.

  The main control board 28 is connected to a launching device 26, a payout device 35, and a card unit device CU via a payout / launch control board 34.

  The main control board 28 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control board 34. The payout / launch control board 34 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 35, and is connected to the launch device 26, the payout device 35, and the card unit device CU.

  The card unit device CU is connected to a second operation unit 9B that outputs a signal for requesting rental of a game ball in accordance with the player's operation, and signals can be transmitted to and received from the second operation unit 9B. is there.

  The payout / launch control board 34 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control board 28 and a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit device CU, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 35. This causes the payout device 35 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 35 pays out, for example, three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning to the first starting port or the second starting port, to the general winning port, the first big winning port or the second big winning port. 10 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls per prize.

  When the launching handle 26b of the launching device 26 is gripped by the player and is turned in the clockwise direction, the payout / launch control board 34 is turned into a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation. Electric power is supplied and control is performed to launch the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The sub control board 33 is connected to the main control board 28 and is configured to receive various commands from the main control board 28.

  The sub control board 33 performs various types of control, mainly control related to the rendering operation, in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control board 28, and includes a sub CPU 330, a program ROM 331, a work RAM 332, and a command input port 333. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC: Real-Time Clock”) 334, a display control circuit 335, an acoustic control circuit 336, a light emission control circuit 337, and an effect device control circuit 338. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 335. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the acoustic control circuit 336. The light emission control circuit 337 is connected to a lamp and various LEDs (collectively referred to as a lamp / LED 260 in FIG. 22). The effect device control circuit 338 is connected to various movable effect actors and movable mechanisms of movable members (in FIG. 22, collectively referred to as a movable effect device 270).

  The sub-control board 33 is connected to the first operation unit 9A, and signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the first operation unit 9A can be input. For example, when the press detection sensor detects that the operation member (operation button) 2000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation member 2000 is input from the press detection sensor to the sub-control board 33. The sub control board 33 is also connected to the second operation unit 9B, and signals from sensors (not shown) provided in the second operation unit 9B can be input. For example, when the press detection sensor detects that the press button 3000 is pressed, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the press button 3000 is input from the press detection sensor to the sub-control board 33.

  The sub CPU 330 executes various processes, mainly processes related to the rendering operation, in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 331. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 330 controls the entire sub control board 33 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control board 28.

  The program ROM 331 stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 330 to mainly control various effects.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the table stored in the program ROM 331 includes an effect lottery table. The effect lottery table includes, for example, an effect related to air blowing using the speaker unit 10 and the air blowing mechanism 110 (air blowing effect), an effect related to light irradiation using the light emitting unit 12 (light irradiation effect), the operation member 2000, or the push button 3000. This is used when performing an effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute various effects such as operation effects (first operation effect and second operation effect) using a random number lottery. In addition, when a ventilation effect is performed, the sound effect which generates a bass using the speaker 10c simultaneously with it is also performed. The first operation effect is an effect using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A, and the second operation effect is an effect using the push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B.

  Specifically, the production lottery table includes a blower effect, a light irradiation effect, and an operation effect in the case of a loss due to a big hit lottery, a 4R normal big win, a 16R normal big win, a 4R positive variable big win, a 16R positive variable big win, etc. The lottery value for determining whether or not to execute each of these effects by random lottery (lottery with a random number range of 0 to 99) is defined.

  According to such an effect lottery table, for the fan effect, if the lottery lottery result is lost, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine “no effect”, and in the case of 4R normal jackpot, When a random value from 0 to 30 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, whereas when a random value from 31 to 99 is extracted, “effect is present” is determined. When a random value is extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when a random number value of 96 to 99 is extracted, “effect is present” is determined, and in the case of 4R probability variation big hit, a random value of 0-50 is extracted. Then, “no effect” is determined, while “random” values of 51 to 99 are extracted, and “effect” is determined. In the case of 16R probability variation big hit, a random number value of 0 to 50 is extracted “ On the other hand, a random number between 51 and 99 is determined. Once extracted, "there game effect" is determined.

  As for the light irradiation effect, when the big hit lottery result is a loss, “no effect” is determined when a random value of 0 to 90 is extracted, while “with effect” when a random value of 91 to 99 is extracted. In the case of 4R normal big hit, when “0” to 90 random numbers are extracted, “no effect” is determined, while when 91 to 99 random values are extracted, “effect” is determined, In the case of a 16R normal big hit, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine “with production”. On the other hand, when a random value of 91 to 99 is extracted, “presentation” is determined, and in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine “presentation”. .

  As for the first operation effect, when the big hit lottery result is a loss, “no effect” is determined when a random value of 0 to 95 is extracted, while “random with” is output when a random number value of 96 to 99 is extracted. In the case of 4R normal big hit, if no random number value of 0-50 is extracted, “no effect” is determined, whereas if a random number value of 51-99 is extracted, “presentation” is determined. In the case of 16R normal big hit, “no effect” is determined when a random value of 0 to 50 is extracted, while “with production” is determined when a random value of 51 to 99 is extracted, and 4R probability variable big hit In this case, “no effect” is determined when a random value of 0 to 85 is extracted, whereas “effect” is determined when a random value of 86 to 99 is extracted. When a random value of ~ 95 is extracted, “no effect” is determined , If the random number value of 96 to 99 are extracted "there demonstration" is determined.

  As for the second operation effect, when the big hit lottery result is lost, a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted to determine “no effect”, and in the case of 4R normal big win, a random value of 0 to 97 is extracted. “No effect” is determined, while “Render” is determined when a random number value of 98 to 99 is extracted, and a random value of 0 to 99 is always extracted in the case of 16R normal big hit. In the case of 4R probability variation big hit, “no effect” is determined when a random value of 0 to 90 is extracted, while “random effect” is extracted when a random value of 91 to 99 is extracted. ”Is determined, and in the case of 16R probability variation big hit,“ no effect ”is determined when a random value of 0 to 60 is extracted, while“ with effect ”is determined when a random value of 61 to 99 is extracted. The

  According to such an effect lottery table, the combination patterns in which the effects such as the air blowing effect, the light irradiation effect, the first operation effect, and the second operation effect occur at the same time stochastically differ depending on the type of loss or jackpot. That is, it is possible to make it easy to register the type of loss or jackpot according to the combination pattern of the generated effects.

  Further, as is clear from the specified contents of the operation effect, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 of the first operation unit 9A rather than the second operation effect using the push button 3000 of the second operation unit 9B. The appearance frequency is higher. That is, since the use frequency of the push button 3000 used in the second operation effect is lower than that of the operation member 2000 used in the first operation effect, the cross button not related to the operation effect arranged in the vicinity of the push button 3000 In addition to preventing erroneous operation of buttons such as 3100, it is possible to easily design the wiring and the board simply by providing the operation member 2000 that is frequently used in an independent operation unit.

  The work RAM 332 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 330.

  The command input port 333 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 280 of the main control board 28 and transmits them to the sub CPU 330.

  The RTC 334 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time to the sub CPU 330. The RTC 334 normally operates with power from the gaming machine body when power is supplied to the gaming machine body, and when the gaming machine body is powered off, the RTC 334 is a backup power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). Operates with power supplied from As a result, the RTC 334 can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine body is turned off. Note that the RTC may be operated by a battery provided on the sub-control board. As an alternative to the RTC, a counter provided in a work RAM having a function as a backup RAM may be used as a means for measuring time by counting up every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms).

  The display control circuit 335 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with the data supplied from the sub CPU 330. For example, the display control circuit 335 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 335 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 335 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in accordance with an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 330. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  Further, the display control circuit 335 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to a D / A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 336 is for controlling sound such as music and voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, a sound source IC for controlling sound output, and a sound data ROM for storing various sound data. And an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the sound signal. Note that the configuration of the acoustic control circuit 336 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and in accordance with a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 330, one sound data is stored in the sound data ROM. Sound data can be selected.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The light emission control circuit 337 is for controlling the lamp / LED 260 including a decoration lamp and the like, a drive circuit for supplying a light emission control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of Note that the configuration of the light emission control circuit 337 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

  The effect device control circuit 338 controls an effect operation such as, for example, operating a movable effect agent or the like in the big hit gaming state.

<Regarding the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16>
The right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 are formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape, and both are configured to include similar members. In the following description, the right decorative member 15 will be described for convenience.

  The right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 perform light effects when a predetermined game condition is satisfied. As shown in FIGS. 24 to 29, the right decorative member 15 includes a support member 150, a light emitting substrate (not shown), an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide member 152, and a decorative cover 153. The support member 150, the light emitting substrate, the outer light guide member 151, and the inner light guide member 152 are covered with a decorative cover 153. The main front surface portion of the decorative cover 153 is translucent or transparent and has light transmittance.

  The support member 150 and the light emitting substrate are attached to the right base plate 3aa. A light emitting substrate is disposed on the back surface side of the support member 150. The support member 150 is formed with a plurality of slits 150a, and a plurality of LEDs (not shown) provided on the light emitting substrate are positioned so as to face the plurality of slits 150a. The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are attached to the front portion of the support member 150 along the plurality of slits 150a. The LEDs are arranged at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 20 mm to 30 mm) in consideration of securing the amount of light and cost.

  The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are each formed of a plate-like member, and are formed so that the inner light guide member 152 is larger than the outer light guide member 151. The outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 are positioned so as to be spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance. Since the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 have the same configuration except for the size and arrangement, the inner light guide member 152 will be described for convenience in the following description.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 29, the inner light guide member 152 has an incident rear end surface 152a that becomes a light incident surface, and an emission front end surface 152b that becomes a light emitting surface. The incident rear end face 152 a is disposed so as to face the plurality of slits 150 a of the support member 150. Thus, the plurality of LEDs are positioned so as to be aligned along the longitudinal direction of the incident rear end face 152a. The emission front end surface 152b is disposed along the inner surface of the decorative cover 153, and is formed in a curved shape as a whole.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the incident rear end face 152a is formed with a sawtooth-shaped lens cut so as to be uneven along the longitudinal direction. Thereby, the light from the LED that has entered the rear end face 152a through the slit 150a travels while diffusing in the longitudinal direction in the inner light guide member 152. A so-called diamond-cut lens cut is formed on the emission front end face 152b. As a result, the light traveling from the rear end face 152a to the inside of the inner light guide member 152 is irradiated forward with a certain extent. Note that the front emission end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 is disposed on the near side where the player is located with respect to the front emission end surface of the outer light guide member 151.

  According to such a right decorative member 15, light traveling inside the right decorative member 15 can be efficiently diffused from the emission front end face 152 b without leaking to the side, and a light effect is produced so as to effectively stimulate vision. Can be executed. Since the left decorative member 16 is also configured in the same manner as the right decorative member 15, the visual effect is effectively achieved simultaneously with the light effect by the right decorative member 15 or at a timing different from the light effect by the right decorative member 15. Light effects can be executed to stimulate.

<About the top decoration 14>
As shown in FIG. 5, the top decoration 14 includes a central decoration unit 14a, a right decoration unit 14b, and a left decoration unit 14c. The right decoration unit 14b and the left decoration unit 14c are formed in substantially bilaterally symmetric shapes, and both are configured to include similar members. In the following description, the central decorative unit 14a and the right decorative unit 14b will be described for convenience.

[Central decoration unit 14a]
The central decoration unit 14a has, for example, an inverted triangular shape in front view that produces light by emitting light at the start of a big hit. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 34, the central decorative unit 14a includes a main body cover 140, a front cover 141, an upper cover 142, a support member 143, a light emitting substrate 144, a light shielding member 145, and a plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. The support member 143, the light emitting substrate 144, the light blocking member 145, and the plurality of light guide members 146 a to 146 c are covered with the main body cover 140, the front cover 141, and the upper cover 142. The front portion 141a of the front cover 141 is translucent or transparent and has light transmission properties. The front surface portion 141a is a surface that protrudes forward from the lower portion to the upper portion, and is disposed so as to form a light-transmitting surface that is inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  A support member 143 is attached to the inside of the main body cover 140. A light emitting substrate 144 is attached to the front portion of the support member 143 and a light shielding member 145 is attached so as to be positioned in front of the light emitting substrate 144. A plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are attached to the lower part of the light shielding member 145 at a predetermined distance from each other.

  A plurality of LEDs 144a corresponding to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are provided on the lower front surface of the light emitting substrate 144, and a plurality of LEDs 144a provided on the front surface of the light emitting substrate 144 are provided on an upper portion of a light shielding member 145 described later. A plurality of LEDs 144b corresponding to the openings 145c are provided.

  A partition wall 145a is formed on the light shielding member 145 so as to partition the upper portion and the lower portion thereof. A plurality of slits 145ba, 145bb, 145bc are formed below the light shielding member 145 so as to correspond to the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c. A plurality of openings 145c are formed in the upper part of the light shielding member 145 so that LEDs 144b of the light emitting substrate 144 described later are exposed. The upper surface of the partition wall 145a of the light shielding member 145 is subjected to surface processing that easily reflects the light from the LED 144b forward, and the peripheral portion of the opening 145c is also concave so as to easily reflect the light from the LED 144b forward. It is formed in a shape.

  The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are each formed of a plate-like member, and are formed in a substantially U shape or a substantially V shape in a front view. The plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c are formed so as to be smaller as they are positioned upward from below, and the light guide member 146b is smaller than the light guide member 146a and light guides than the light guide member 146b. The member 146c is smaller. The light guide members 146a to 146c are positioned so as to be separated from each other by a predetermined distance.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the plurality of light guide members 146a to 146c have incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca serving as light incident surfaces, and emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb serving as light emitting surfaces. The rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca are arranged so as to face the slits 145ba, 145bb, 145bc of the light shielding member 145. The emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb are arranged along the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141 inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  The incident rear end surfaces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca are formed in a sawtooth shape so as to be uneven along the longitudinal direction, like the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. Thereby, the light from the LED 144a that has entered the rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, and 146ca travels while diffusing in the longitudinal direction in the light guide members 146a to 146c. The emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb are formed in a so-called diamond-cut shape like the emission front end surface 152b of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15 described above. As a result, the light traveling from the rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca to the inside of the light guide members 146a-146c is irradiated forward with some spread.

  According to such a central decoration unit 14a, light emitted from the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb of the light guide members 146a-146c is guided outward through the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141. However, since the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb are located relatively close to the front surface portion 141a, an elongated region having a relatively high light intensity is formed along the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb. In the area below the front cover 141, light from the emission front end faces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb appears in a plurality of lines. On the other hand, in the upper region of the front cover 141, the light from the plurality of LEDs 144b is radiated outwardly through the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141 while being irregularly reflected by the periphery of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145 and the like. In addition, the light guide members 146a to 146c are guided to the front surface portion 141a as reflected light from the depth farther from the front surface portion 141a than the front emission end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, and 146cb. It looks like a wide light distribution with diffused light. That is, from the diagonally lower side of the front cover 141 that becomes the player's eyes, the line-shaped light appears to appear three-dimensionally in the lower part of the light from the upper side.

[Right decoration unit 14b]
The right decoration unit 14b performs an effect by generating sound or emitting light at the start of a big hit, for example. As shown in FIGS. 35 to 40, the right decoration unit 14b includes a speaker unit 10A, a main body support member 147A, a main body cover 147B, a front cover 147C, a light emitting substrate 148, and a light guide member 149. The speaker unit 10A and the light emitting substrate 148 are attached to the rear portion of the main body support member 147A, and the light emitting substrate 148 is attached to the front portion of the speaker unit 10A. The light guide member 149 is attached to the inside of the front side of the main body support member 147A and is covered with the front cover 147C. The front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, and the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the light guide member 149 can be visually recognized from the gap.

  The speaker unit 10 </ b> A has an opening (not shown) that exposes the vibration surface (sound output part) of the speaker 10 b forward, and a light emitting substrate 148 is attached along the periphery of the opening. The light emitting substrate 148 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 148a arranged in a ring shape along the periphery of the speaker 10b.

  The main body support member 147A is formed with an opening 147Aa in which the vibration surface of the speaker 10b and the plurality of LEDs 148a of the light emitting substrate 148 are exposed and the light guide member 149 can be attached to the periphery.

  The light guide member 149 includes a cylindrical portion 149a for guiding sound generated on the vibration surface of the speaker 10b to the front, an incident rear end surface 149b serving as a light incident surface on the rear periphery of the cylindrical portion 149a, and a peripheral edge of the cylindrical portion 149a. It has an emission front end surface 149c that is a light emission surface on the front side, and a protrusion 149d that extends forward from the periphery of the emission front end surface 149c.

  The vibration surface of the speaker 10b is disposed at the rear of the tube portion 149a, and the sound generated on the vibration surface is guided forward through the tube portion 149a. The incident rear end surface 1449b is arranged to face the LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148. Similarly to the incident rear end surface 152a of the inner light guide member 152 of the right decorative member 15, the incident rear end surface 149b is formed in a sawtooth shape so as to be uneven along the circumferential direction. Thereby, the light from the LED 148a that has entered the rear end face 149b travels while diffusing the cylindrical portion 149a substantially in the circumferential direction.

  The emission front end face 149c is located a predetermined distance behind the front face 147Ca of the front cover 147C. Similarly to the rear end face 149b, the front exit face 149c is also formed in a sawtooth shape so as to be uneven along the circumferential direction. As a result, the light traveling from the incident rear end face 149b to the cylindrical portion 149a is irradiated forward so that it looks like a ring while spreading mainly in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front.

  The protruding portion 149d is formed so that a part of the left and right sides partially extends forward, and the tip thereof is disposed so as to contact the back side of the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C. In addition, you may arrange | position the protrusion part 149d so that it may adjoin without contacting the back side of front surface 147Ca. Further, instead of the projecting portion 149d, the emission front end face 149c may be disposed so as to be in contact with the back side of the front face 147Ca, or may be disposed so as to be close thereto.

According to such a right decoration unit 14b, it is possible to produce an effect in which the periphery of the speaker 10b appears to shine in a ring shape in accordance with the sound generated from the speaker 10b. Further, since the front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C is formed in a mesh shape, the front cover 147C is easily damaged by an external impact or pressure, but is reinforced and supported by the projection 149d of the light guide member 149 coming into contact therewith. Since it is in a state, it is possible to effectively prevent damage due to external impact or pressing. That is, the mesh-like (lattice) front cover 147C guides the sound from the speaker 10b along the light guide member 149 to the back surface of the front cover 147C. Can communicate outside.
Moreover, since the light guide member 149 functions as a support member for the front cover 147C, the rigidity of the front cover 147C can be increased.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment described above, the following operational effects can be obtained.

  According to the configuration of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings, an air flow flows out from the opening 10ec of the enclosure 10e as sound is output from the speaker 10c. At this time, if the opening / closing member 115 of the air blowing mechanism 110 is in a state of opening the space 110a, the air flow from the opening 10ec is guided in a straight direction toward the air blowing port 80, and from the air blowing port 80 toward the launching handle 26b. Wind flows with sufficient wind pressure. As a result, the player can feel the wind in the hand holding the launch handle 26b, and the sound from the speaker 10c can also feel a heavy bass due to the Helmholtz resonance with the sound output from the air outlet 80 together with the wind.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 115 of the blower mechanism 110 is in a state in which the space portion 110a is closed, and the air flow from the opening 10ec is led in a direction that bends at a substantially right angle and flows downward to the space portion 110a, The wind is discharged from the vent 8ca of the cover 8c, and the wind is not guided to the firing handle 26b. Thus, the player can feel only the sound from the speaker 10c as a heavy bass by Helmholtz resonance with the sound output together with the wind from the vent 8ca without feeling the wind in the hand holding the launch handle 26b. .

  That is, since the sound and the wind can be felt only by switching the direction of the wind flowing out from the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 by the air blowing mechanism 110, the speaker unit 10 can be reduced in size and simplified. This makes it possible to produce a sound and wind effect flexibly.

  Further, by simply switching the direction of the wind coming out of the opening 10ec of the speaker unit 10 by the air blowing mechanism 110, it is possible to feel the sound and the wind, or just the sound, and the detachable lower right side cover 8ba or the under cover. Since the air outlet 80 and the air vent 8ca are formed in 8c, and the air blowing mechanism 110 may be individually designed between them and the speaker unit 10, the manufacturing cost of the speaker unit 10 and its surroundings may be reduced. In addition, the design freedom and maintenance can be improved.

  Further, even the speaker unit 10 which is a bass reflex type and has a relatively large volume of the enclosure 10e can be arranged in a space that does not hinder the hand of the player who handles the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18. In addition, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space for the speaker unit 10.

  Further, since the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e contacts the bottom portion of the upper plate body 17p and also contacts the lower plate body 18p of the lower left portion 10eb, the upper plate 17p is supported and from the enclosure 10e according to the operation of the speaker 10c. The vibration is transmitted to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18, and the clogging of game balls in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18 can be effectively eliminated by this vibration.

  Further, the first operation effect using the operation member 2000 is set to have a higher occurrence frequency than the second operation effect using the push button 3000, that is, the operation member 2000 having a higher use frequency is operated. Since the push button 3000 having a low use frequency is provided on the common board 3200 that is also used as the ball lending button 23 and the return button 24 while being provided alone in the unit 9A, the operation member 2000 and the press are provided at positions that are easy to use according to the use frequency. It is possible to simplify the wiring to each substrate by arranging the buttons 3000, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost and the arrangement space.

  In addition, while the operation member 2000 having a high use frequency is remembered as a circular shape, the press button 3000 having a low use frequency is easily memorized as a quadrilateral shape different from the circular shape, and therefore, the operation member 2000 and the press button 3000 are used according to the use frequency. Can be provided as an outer shape that can be easily distinguished, and as a result, a plurality of operation means can be easily used. Further, the quadrangular push button 3000 and the cross-shaped cross button 3100 are arranged adjacent to each other such that some end portions that are linear portions face each other. Buttons can be arranged.

  In addition, when a condition for shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player, such as a 16R normal big hit or a 16R probability variable big hit, is satisfied, a light irradiation effect is always executed, and at the same time, a fan effect may be executed. Can sense that the light irradiation effect or the air blowing effect is being executed by either visual or tactile sensation on the hand holding the launch handle 26b, and transition to an advantageous gaming state without missing such an effect. You can sense what to do. Further, when the air blowing effect is executed, the sound effect due to the heavy bass from the speaker 10c is also executed at the same time, and the vibration due to the heavy bass can be felt.

  Further, for example, in the right decorative member 15, at the incident rear end surface 152a of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152, by entering light while diffusing light in the longitudinal direction in which LEDs are arranged by sawtooth lens cuts, While the light efficiently travels in the light guide, the front light exit surface 152b of the outer light guide member 151 and the inner light guide member 152 emits light guided from the rear end surface 152a into the light guide into a diamond-cut lens. Since it can be efficiently scattered outward by cutting, color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

  Further, for example, in the right decoration unit 14b, the protruding portion 149d of the light guide member 149 is disposed so as to contact the back surface of the mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C, and the emission front end surface 149c is separated from the front surface 147Ca by a predetermined distance, Since it is annularly arranged along the periphery so as not to obstruct the vibration surface of the speaker 10b, the LED 148a located on the rear end face 149b side can be made invisible from the front of the front cover 147C, and the appearance is not impaired. Sound from the speaker 10b can be emitted to the outside without hindrance.

  Further, for example, in the central decoration unit 14a, the emission front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb of the light guide members 146a to 146c are farther from the light emitting substrate 144 than the peripheral edge portion of the opening 145c of the light shielding member 145 where the LED 144b is exposed. Yes, because it is disposed near the front surface portion 141a of the front cover 141, the light of the LED 144b that is diffusely reflected at the peripheral edge of the opening 145c and guided forward, and the front end surface 146ab of the light exiting through the inside of the light guide members 146a to 146c , 146bb, and 146cb, the light of the LED 144a irradiated on average becomes a linear light and a line-shaped light, which can cause a clear difference in the visibility of these lights, and thus a novel light. Can be realized.

  In addition, as a modification of the air blowing mechanism 110, the one shown in FIG. 41 may be applied. In the air blowing mechanism 110 shown in FIG. 41, a rotatable shutter member 117 that can open and close exclusively the lower portion of the space portion 110a and the opening portion 110b is provided. As shown in FIG. 41A, the shutter member 117 is positioned so as to be in a horizontal posture when the wind flow from the opening 10ec (not shown) is guided to the opening 110b. At this time, the wind is not completely guided downward of the space 110a. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the shutter member 117 rotates from the horizontal position shown in FIG. 41 (a) when the wind flow from the opening 10ec (not shown) is guided downward to the space 110a. It is positioned so as to move and stand upright. At this time, the flow of the wind that tries to go straight to the side of the space 110a is obstructed, and the wind is guided so as to bend at a substantially right angle below the space 110a. According to such a blower mechanism 110, when the wind is guided to the blower outlet 80 (not shown), the wind is guided to the blower outlet 80 with sufficient wind pressure without leaking the wind downward to the space 110a. Can do.

  The present invention can also be used in gaming machines such as general pachinko gaming machines, including pachislot machines of enclosed type, general pachislot gaming machines, slot machines, and roulette machines.

  Based on this embodiment described above, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, so that the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker However, there was a problem that it was large and complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making sound and wind feel.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has an opening (for example, an opening 10ec) in an enclosure (for example, an enclosure 10e) of an operating means (for example, the launching device 26) that can be operated by the player and a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c). Etc.) and the direction of the air flow flowing out of the opening in accordance with the operation of the speaker in the first direction (for example, the direction going straight from the opening 10ec) and the like. Air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110) that can be switched in two directions (for example, a direction that leaves the opening 10ec and goes downward), and the direction of the air flow by the air flow direction switching means. Is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided toward the operation means, while the air flow direction switching means When the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the game machine, characterized in that said air flow towards said operating means is not guided.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the airflow is switched to the first direction, the airflow is guided toward the operation means, thereby causing the player's hand operating the operation means to feel the wind and the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the air flow is not guided toward the operation means, so the player feels the wind in operating the operation means. Only the sound from the speaker can be felt without making it. In other words, sound and wind can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, or only sound can be felt, so that sound and wind can be reduced while miniaturizing and simplifying the speaker unit. The production by can be performed on a case-by-case basis.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, size reduction and simplification of the speaker unit for making sound and a wind feel can be achieved.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, so that the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker However, there was a problem that it was large and complicated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making sound and wind feel.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air blowing port 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the air vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside in accordance with the operation of the speaker. The cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the under cover 8c, etc.) and the main state of the airflow are guided to the first discharge portion (for example, the opening / closing member 115 has opened the space portion 110a) Etc.) and a second state (for example, a state in which the opening and closing member 115 closes the space 110a, etc.) leading to the second discharge portion. Switching means (for example, the air blowing mechanism 110), and when the air flow state switching means switches to the first state, the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the first discharge unit. On the other hand, when the air flow state switching means is switched to the second state, the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if it is switched to the first state by the air flow state switching means, the main flow of the air flow is guided toward the first discharge portion, and the player feels the wind discharged from the first discharge portion. At the same time, the sound from the speaker can also be felt, but when the second state is switched, the main flow of the airflow is guided toward the second discharge part so that it is not guided to the first discharge part. Thus, only the sound from the speaker can be felt without causing the player to feel the wind through the first discharge unit. That is, sound and wind can be felt only by switching the main flow state of the airflow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, or only the sound can be felt, so that the sound and sound of the speaker unit can be reduced and simplified. And wind can be performed on an as-needed basis.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, size reduction and simplification of the speaker unit for making sound and a wind feel can be achieved.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. As a result, there has been proposed an apparatus configured to produce an effect that makes the wind feel with sound (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, so that the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker However, there was a problem that it was large and complicated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making sound and wind feel.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air outlet 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside as the speaker is operated. A cover member (for example, a lower right side cover 8ba, an under cover 8c, etc.), a first direction (for example, a direction heading straight from the opening 10ec, etc.) leading to the first discharge portion with respect to the main flow of the air flow, and the Air flow direction switching means (for example, a direction that can be switched to a second direction (for example, a direction from the opening 10 ec and going downward) leading to the second discharge portion) The air flow mechanism 110 and the like, and the main flow of the air flow is linearly guided toward the first discharge portion when the air flow direction switching means is switched to the first direction. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the air flow state switching means is switched in the second direction, the main flow of the air flow is guided by turning substantially at a right angle toward the second discharge portion.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the main flow of the air flow is linearly guided straight toward the first discharge portion, and the player discharges the wind discharged from the first discharge portion. And the sound from the speaker can also be felt. On the other hand, when the direction is switched to the second direction, the main flow of the air flow is bent and guided at a substantially right angle toward the second discharge portion. Only the sound from the speaker can be felt without causing the player to feel the wind through the first discharge portion without being guided to the discharge portion. In other words, sound and wind can be felt only by switching the direction of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, or only sound can be felt, so that sound and wind can be reduced while miniaturizing and simplifying the speaker unit. The production by can be performed on a case-by-case basis.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, size reduction and simplification of the speaker unit for making sound and a wind feel can be achieved.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. As a result of the wind flowing, a configuration is proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is performed (see, for example, 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to rotate the entire speaker in order to change the posture of the speaker itself, so that the entire speaker unit tends to be large by providing a rotatable space, and the drive mechanism for the speaker However, there was a problem that it was large and complicated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the size and simplification of a speaker unit for making sound and wind feel.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air outlet 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside as the speaker is operated. Cover member (for example, lower right side cover 8ba, under cover 8c, etc.) and a first state for guiding the air flow to the first discharge unit (for example, the shutter member 117 is in a horizontal position below the space 110a) And the second state leading to the second discharge portion (for example, the side of the space 110a is closed with the shutter member 117 standing upright). Air flow state switching means (for example, the air blowing mechanism 110) that can be switched to the first state when the air flow state switching means is switched to the first state. When the air flow is guided to the first discharge part without being guided to the second discharge state, the air flow is guided to the first discharge part. A gaming machine that is guided to the second discharge section without being left.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the air flow state switching means is switched to the first state, the air flow is guided to the first discharge portion without being guided to the second discharge portion, and the air discharged from the first discharge portion. While the player can feel the sound and the sound from the speaker, the air flow is guided to the second discharge part without being guided to the first discharge part when switched to the second state. Thus, only the sound from the speaker can be felt without causing the player to feel the wind through the first discharge unit. In other words, sound and wind can be felt only by switching the state of the air flow flowing out from the opening of the speaker unit, or only the sound can be felt, so that the speaker unit can be reduced in size and simplified. It is possible to produce sound and wind effects on an as-needed basis.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, size reduction and simplification of the speaker unit for making sound and a wind feel can be achieved.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the low frequency range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability There were disadvantages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of a speaker device.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air outlet 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside as the speaker is operated. Cover member (for example, lower right side cover 8ba, under cover 8c, etc.), and the direction of the air flow flowing out of the opening with the operation of the speaker in the first direction (for example, the direction going straight from the opening 10ec) and the like Air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism) that can be switched to a second direction (for example, a direction that exits the opening 10ec and goes downward). 10), and the air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means switches the direction of the air flow to the first direction. When the air flow is guided toward the first discharge portion, and the air flow direction is switched to the second direction by the air flow direction switching means, the second discharge portion A gaming machine characterized in that the air flow is guided toward the side.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge unit, so that the player can feel the wind and also the sound from the speaker. On the other hand, when the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge unit, so that the player can feel the wind through the first discharge unit. Only sound can be felt. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually designed appropriately so that sound and wind can be felt only by switching the air flow direction, or only sound can be felt. Therefore, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the low frequency range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability There were disadvantages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of a speaker device.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air outlet 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside as the speaker is operated. Cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the under cover 8c, etc.) and the direction of the air flow flowing out of the opening in accordance with the operation of the speaker in the first direction (for example, the first discharge part) Cut in a direction that goes straight from the opening 10 ec) and a second direction (for example, a direction that goes out of the opening 10 ec and goes downward) that is the second discharge portion. Switchable air flow direction switching means (for example, the air blowing mechanism 110), and the air flow direction switching means is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, and the opening and the first discharge The parts are arranged so as to face each other, and the air flow is guided linearly along the first direction.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is linearly guided toward the first discharge unit, thereby causing the player to feel a relatively strong wind and the speaker. While the direction of the airflow is switched to the second direction, the airflow is directed toward the second discharger, so that the player can play the wind through the first discharger. Only the sound from the speaker can be made to feel. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually designed appropriately so that sound and wind can be felt only by switching the air flow direction, or only sound can be felt. Therefore, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the low frequency range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability There were disadvantages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of a speaker device.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has an opening (for example, an opening 10ec) in an enclosure (for example, an enclosure 10e) of an operating means (for example, the launching device 26) that can be operated by the player and a speaker (for example, the speaker 10c). Etc.) and a first discharge part (for example, the air outlet 80) for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening with the operation of the speaker to the outside. Etc.) and a cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the under cover 8c, etc.) provided with a second discharge part (for example, the vent 8ca), and an air flow that flows out from the opening as the speaker operates. In the first direction (for example, the direction going straight from the opening 10ec) and the second direction becoming the second discharge portion. Air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110) that can be switched in a direction (for example, a direction that exits the opening 10ec and goes downward), and the air flow direction switching means includes the speaker unit and the A gaming machine provided between a cover member and the opening and the first discharge part, wherein the operating means is positioned on an extension of a straight line connecting them.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the direction of the air flow is switched to the first direction, the air flow is guided linearly toward the first discharge portion, and further, the air flow is directed from the first discharge portion toward the operation means. By being guided linearly, the player's hand operating the operating means can feel a relatively strong wind and can also feel the sound from the speaker, while the direction of the air flow is switched to the second direction. In this case, since the air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion, only the sound from the speaker can be felt without the wind being sent to the operation means through the first discharge portion. That is, if the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually arranged appropriately so that the sound and wind can be felt only by switching the air flow direction, or only the sound can be felt. Therefore, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, for example, when changing to a speaker or speaker unit that emphasizes the low frequency range, the entire speaker device must be redesigned and replaced, and in terms of manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability There were disadvantages.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design flexibility, and maintainability of a speaker device.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker unit (e.g., speaker unit 10) having an opening (e.g., opening 10ec) provided in an enclosure (e.g., enclosure 10e) of a speaker (e.g., speaker 10c); A first exhaust part (for example, the air outlet 80) and a second exhaust part (for example, the vent 8ca) are provided for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the opening to the outside as the speaker is operated. Cover member (for example, the lower right side cover 8ba, the under cover 8c, etc.) and a first flow path (to the first discharge part) that is a flow path of the air flow that flows out from the opening with the operation of the speaker. For example, a flow path that flows straight out from the opening 10 ec) and a second flow path (for example, a flow path that flows out downward from the opening 10 ec) toward the second discharge portion. Switchable air flow channel switching means (for example, the air blowing mechanism 110), and the air flow channel switching unit is provided between the speaker unit and the cover member, A gaming machine, wherein a path and the second flow path are exclusively switched.

  According to such a configuration, an air flow flows out from the opening of the enclosure as sound is output from the speaker. At this time, if the flow path of the air flow is switched to the first flow path, the air flow is guided toward the first discharge part, so that the player feels the wind and the sound from the speaker is also heard. On the other hand, when the flow path of the air flow is switched to the second flow path, the air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion without being guided toward the first discharge portion. Only the sound from the speaker can be felt without causing the player to feel the wind through the first discharge unit. That is, the speaker unit, the cover member, and the air flow direction switching means are individually set so that sound and wind can be felt only by switching the air flow path exclusively or only sound can be felt. Since the speaker device may be appropriately designed and arranged, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, the speaker device can be excellent in manufacturing cost, design freedom, and maintainability.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the conventional gaming machine is a bass-reflex type speaker unit having a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large arrangement space for the speaker unit, and there is a difficulty in efficiently laying out the speaker device. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame), a front door (for example, a front frame 3) that can rotate with respect to the main body frame, and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, the speaker unit 10) provided, and the front door is provided with a dish portion (for example, a lower plate 18) capable of storing game media. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is arranged on a side of the dish part and is arranged so that a part thereof protrudes above the dish part.

  According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume can be arranged so as not to hinder the player's access to the dish part. Layout can be done efficiently.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, a speaker apparatus can be laid out efficiently, ensuring the arrangement space of a speaker unit.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the conventional gaming machine is a bass-reflex type speaker unit having a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large arrangement space for the speaker unit, and there is a difficulty in efficiently laying out the speaker device. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame), a front door (for example, a front frame 3) that can rotate with respect to the main body frame, and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, the speaker unit 10) provided, and the front door includes an upper plate portion (for example, the upper plate 17) and a lower plate portion (for example, the upper plate 17) that can store game media. A gaming machine, wherein a lower pan 18 or the like is provided, and the speaker unit is disposed on a side of the lower pan portion and a part thereof is in contact with the upper pan portion.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to arrange a speaker unit having a relatively large volume so that the player's access to the upper plate part and the lower plate part does not become an obstacle. In addition, the speaker device can be laid out efficiently. Further, a part of the speaker unit abuts on the upper plate portion to support the upper plate portion, and vibration from the speaker unit is transmitted to the upper plate portion according to the operation of the speaker. The clogging of game media can be effectively eliminated.

  As a preferred embodiment of the present invention, at least a part of the bottom portion of the upper plate portion (for example, the bottom portion of the upper plate main body 17p) is located on the upper portion of the speaker unit (for example, the upper left portion 10ea of the enclosure 10e). It is characterized by abutting.

  According to such a configuration, the vibration of the speaker unit is efficiently transmitted from the upper part to the bottom part of the upper dish part, so that it is possible to effectively eliminate clogging of game media accumulated while contacting the bottom part of the upper dish part. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, a speaker apparatus can be laid out efficiently, ensuring the arrangement space of a speaker unit.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has a bass-reflex type speaker unit, and the posture of the speaker can be variably controlled. When the speaker assumes a predetermined posture, the speaker device is directed from the through hole provided in the speaker unit to the handle device. A configuration has been proposed in which an effect that makes the wind feel with sound is produced by the wind flowing (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-171610).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, since the conventional gaming machine is a bass-reflex type speaker unit having a relatively large volume, it is necessary to secure a large arrangement space for the speaker unit, and there is a difficulty in efficiently laying out the speaker device. .

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently laying out the speaker device while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a main body frame (for example, a main body frame), a front door (for example, a front frame 3) that can rotate with respect to the main body frame, and a speaker (for example, a speaker 10c). A box-shaped speaker unit (for example, the speaker unit 10) provided, and the front door is provided with a dish portion (for example, a lower plate 18) capable of storing game media. , Arranged on one side of the dish part, and arranged so that a part (for example, the upper left 10ea) protrudes above the dish part, and is opened on the other side of the dish part. A gaming machine characterized in that a space is formed.

  According to such a configuration, even a speaker unit having a relatively large volume does not hinder the player's access to the dish part, and the dish part can be accessed through the open space formed on the other side of the dish part. Since the speaker unit can be arranged as possible, the speaker device can be efficiently laid out while securing the arrangement space of the speaker unit.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, a speaker apparatus can be laid out efficiently, ensuring the arrangement space of a speaker unit.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that includes a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can be involved in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a disadvantage that the wiring for a plurality of effect buttons is complicated compared to the case where there is only one effect button, which is disadvantageous from the viewpoint of manufacturing cost and arrangement space.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can simplify wiring for a plurality of operation means, and thus can reduce manufacturing cost and arrangement space. To do.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the operation member 2000, the push button 3000, etc.), and an effect means that can execute an effect (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4). An operation effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 330) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute an operation effect using any of the plurality of operation means, and the plurality of operation means include: A first operating means (for example, an operation member 2000) provided at a first position (for example, the center position of the upper plate upper cover 8a) and a second position (for example, different from the first position, for example) A second operating means (for example, a push button 3000) provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a and a third position (for example, an upper position) different from the first position and the second position. Of the dish top cover 8a 3rd operation means (for example, ball lending button 23, return button 24, etc.) provided in an end position etc., and the 1st operation means and the 2nd operation means are determined by the operation effect determination means The first operation means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057), and the second operation means and the third operation means are the second operation means. Provided on a board (for example, a common board 3200), the operation effect determining means is more effective than the operation effect (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23) using the second operation means. A gaming machine, characterized in that the operation effect using the means (for example, the first operation effect shown in FIG. 23, etc.) is determined to be executed with a relatively high probability.

  According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect using the first operation means is higher than that of the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high use frequency. Is provided on the first substrate alone, while the second operation means that is relatively infrequently used is provided on the second substrate that also serves as the third operation means, so that wiring to the first substrate and the second substrate is simplified. As a result, manufacturing cost and arrangement space can be reduced.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, wiring for a plurality of operation means can be simplified, and consequently, manufacturing cost and arrangement space can be reduced.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that includes a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can be involved in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the conventional gaming machine, the arrangement according to the usage frequency of the plurality of effect buttons is not particularly taken into consideration, and this makes it difficult to use the plurality of effect buttons.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a plurality of operation means can be easily arranged.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operating means (for example, the operation member 2000, the push button 3000, etc.) that can be operated by the player, and an effecting means (for example, that can execute an effect). Liquid crystal display device 4 etc.) and operation effect determining means (for example, sub CPU 330 etc.) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute the operation effect using any of the plurality of operation means. The plurality of operation means includes a first operation means (for example, an operation member 2000) provided at a central portion of the gaming machine and a second operation means provided at a predetermined position biased to one side from the central portion of the gaming machine. (E.g., a push button 3000) and third operating means (e.g., a cross button 3100) provided at a position adjacent to the predetermined position, and the first operating means and the second operating means include: Said operation The first operation means is provided on a first substrate (for example, a support member (unit base) 2057), and the second operation means and the third operation are operable. The means is provided on a second substrate (for example, a common substrate 3200), and the operation effect determining means is based on the operation effect (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23) using the second operation means. The game machine is characterized in that the operation effect using the first operation means (for example, the first operation effect shown in FIG. 23, etc.) is determined to be executed with a relatively high probability.

  According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect using the first operation means is higher than that of the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high use frequency. Is provided at the center of the gaming machine, while the second operating means with relatively low use frequency is provided at a predetermined position biased to one side from the center of the gaming machine. The first operating means and the second operating means can be arranged, and erroneous operation of the third operating means can be prevented.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to arrange a plurality of operation means in an easy-to-use manner.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that includes a plurality of effect buttons so that a player can be involved in the effect (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33503).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the plurality of effect buttons are all formed in the same outer shape, it is difficult to distinguish according to the frequency of use, which makes it difficult to use the plurality of effect buttons. there were.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can easily distinguish between a plurality of operation means, and thus can easily use the plurality of operation means.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the operation member 2000, the push button 3000, etc.), and an effect means that can execute an effect (for example, the liquid crystal display device 4). An operation effect determining means (for example, a sub CPU 330) capable of determining whether or not to cause the effect means to execute an operation effect using any of the plurality of operation means, and the plurality of operation means include: A first operation means (for example, an operation member 2000) provided at a first position, and a second operation means (for example, a push button 3000) provided at a second position different from the first position; Third operating means (for example, a cross button 3100) provided at a third position different from the first position and the second position, the first operating means and the second operating means , The operation effect The first operating means is formed in a first outer shape (for example, a circular shape, etc.), and the second operating means is connected to the first outer shape. Is formed in a second outer shape (for example, a quadrangular shape or the like) including a straight portion, and the third operating means has an outer shape different from the first outer shape, It is formed in a third outer shape (for example, a cross shape) including a straight portion, and the second operating means and the third operating means are adjacent to each other so that the straight portions in the respective outer shapes face each other. The operation effect determining means is arranged such that the operation effect using the first operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23, etc.) using the second operation means (for example, the second operation effect shown in FIG. 23, for example). Relative to the first operation effect shown in FIG. Gaming machine and determines to be executed at a high probability.

  According to such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect using the first operation means is higher than that of the operation effect using the second operation means, that is, the first operation means having a relatively high use frequency. Is remembered as the first outer shape, while the second operating means with relatively low use frequency is remembered as the second outer shape, and therefore, a plurality of operating means are provided as outer shapes that are easily distinguishable according to the use frequency. As a result, a plurality of operation means can be easily used. In addition, since the second operating means and the third operating means are arranged adjacent to each other so that the linear portions face each other, the plurality of operating means can be arranged even in a narrow space.

  As a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the first operating means is provided closer to the center of the gaming machine than the second operating means.

  According to such a configuration, the first operating means that is relatively frequently used can easily enter the player's line of sight, so that the outer shape of the first operating means can be more easily remembered than the second operating means. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to make the plurality of operation means easy to distinguish, and as a result, the plurality of operation means can be easily used.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that has a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a launch handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a drawback in that it is not interesting just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be easily viewed by a player and can execute a novel effect.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operation means (for example, the launching device 26) that can be operated by the player and a first effect (for example, shown in FIG. 23) by light irradiation that can be visually detected toward the operation means. First effect executing means (for example, the light emitting unit 12) for executing a light irradiation effect, etc., and a second effect (for example, a fan effect shown in FIG. 23) by air blowing that can be sensed by touching the operation means. Second effect executing means (for example, the speaker unit 10, the air blowing mechanism 110, etc.) for executing the effect and the effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 330, etc.) that can be controlled to execute the first effect and the second effect at the same time. ), And a gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, the second effect by the air blow is executed at the same time as the first effect by the light irradiation is executed, and the player makes the effect by either the light irradiation or the air blow in the hand operating the operation means. Can be sensed without being overlooked by the player, and a novel effect can be executed.

  As a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the operation means is a launching handle (for example, launching handle 26b or the like) capable of launching a game ball on a game board (for example, the game board 1 or the like) provided in the gaming machine. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, since the launch handle is gripped during the game, the player's hand holding the launch handle can easily recognize the tactile effect, and the executed effect is not swung. Can be surely recognized.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is easy for a player to watch and a novel effect can be executed.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that has a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a launch handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a drawback in that it is not interesting just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be easily viewed by a player and can execute a novel effect.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operation means (for example, the launching device 26) that can be operated by the player and a first effect (for example, shown in FIG. 23) by light irradiation that can be visually detected toward the operation means. First effect executing means (for example, the light emitting unit 12) for executing a light irradiation effect, etc., and a second effect (for example, a fan effect shown in FIG. 23) by air blowing that can be sensed by touching the operation means. And a second effect executing means (for example, the speaker unit 10, the air blowing mechanism 110, etc.), wherein the second effect executing means is an enclosure (for example, a speaker 10c). For example, an enclosure 10e etc.) and a speaker unit (e.g. speaker unit 10 etc.) provided with a port (for example, opening 10ec etc.) and the operation of the speaker A cover member (e.g., right side) provided with a first exhaust part (e.g., air blowing port 80) and a second exhaust part (e.g., vent 8ca) for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the mouth to the outside. Lower surface cover 8ba, under cover 8c, etc.) and the direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening in accordance with the operation of the speaker in the first direction (for example, the direction going straight from the opening 10ec) and the second direction (for example, opening) An air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110) that can be switched to a direction that exits 10ec and downward), and the direction of the air flow is changed to the first direction by the air flow direction switching means. When the airflow is switched, the airflow is guided toward the first discharge portion, while the airflow direction is switched to the second direction by the airflow direction switching means. The air flow is guided toward the second discharge portion, and the air flow discharged from the first discharge portion can reach the operation means, and the air flow discharged from the second discharge portion. Is a game machine characterized in that the operation means cannot be reached.

  According to such a configuration, the first effect by light irradiation is executed at the same time as the second effect by blowing air, or the first effect is executed while the air flow does not reach the operating means. 2 It is possible not to execute the effect, and the player can sense that the effect is being executed by either light irradiation or air blowing at the part where the operation means is operated. It is possible to recognize without missing, and to execute a novel production.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is easy for a player to watch and a novel effect can be executed.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that has a configuration in which red light is projected onto a player's hand holding a launch handle (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-229297).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a drawback in that it is not interesting just by projecting light, and the player may not notice the projection of light itself.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be easily viewed by a player and can execute a novel effect.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has an operation means (for example, the launching device 26) that can be operated by the player and a first effect (for example, shown in FIG. 23) by light irradiation that can be visually detected toward the operation means. First effect executing means (for example, the light emitting unit 12) for executing a light irradiation effect, etc., and a second effect (for example, a fan effect shown in FIG. 23) by air blowing that can be sensed by touching the operation means. And a second effect executing means (for example, the speaker unit 10, the air blowing mechanism 110, etc.), wherein the second effect executing means is an enclosure (for example, a speaker 10c). For example, an enclosure 10e etc.) and a speaker unit (e.g. speaker unit 10 etc.) provided with a port (for example, opening 10ec etc.) and the operation of the speaker A cover member (e.g., right side) provided with a first exhaust part (e.g., air blowing port 80) and a second exhaust part (e.g., vent 8ca) for further discharging the air flow flowing out from the mouth to the outside. Lower surface cover 8ba, under cover 8c, etc.) and the direction of the airflow flowing out of the opening in accordance with the operation of the speaker in the first direction (for example, the direction going straight from the opening 10ec) and the second direction (for example, opening) Air flow direction switching means (for example, a blower mechanism 110) that can be switched to a direction that exits 10ec and downward), and the air flow directed in the first direction is from the first discharge unit. The air flow guided so as to be discharged and discharged from the first discharge portion can reach the operation means, and the air flow direction switching means is connected to the speaker unit and the cover member. Provided, wherein the opening and the first discharge portion is arranged so as to face each other, a game machine, characterized in that linearly the air flow is directed along the first direction.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect by the air blowing at the same time as the first effect by the light irradiation, and the player can perform either the light irradiation or the air blowing at the site where the operation means is operated. Since it is possible to sense that the effect is being executed, the player can recognize the effect without missing the effect, and can execute a novel effect. In addition, when the direction of the airflow flowing out from the opening is the first direction, the airflow can be guided linearly from the entrance of the enclosure to the first discharge portion, so the airflow discharged from the first discharge portion Can be made to reach the operating means efficiently, and the player can be sure to feel the wind by operating the operating means.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is easy for a player to watch and a novel effect can be executed.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that produces an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of the light guide plate by irregularly reflecting light from the LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, JP, 2005-228979, A).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur because the directivity of the LED as the light emitting element is strong.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate color unevenness and efficiently emit light.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs) and a light guide plate (for example, an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide) that emits light emitted from the light emitting means. And the light guide plate is positioned on the opposite side of the incident end face (for example, the incident rear end face 152a) and the incident end face for receiving light from the plurality of light emitting means. The plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the incident end face, and the incident end face is lined with the plurality of light emitting means. A first lens cut (for example, a sawtooth lens cut) that diffuses light in the direction is formed, and the exit end face scatters the light that is guided by being incident on the entrance end face. Second lens cut (eg, diamond) Gaming machine wherein the bets shaped lens cut etc.) are formed.

  According to such a configuration, at the incident end face of the light guide plate, light is efficiently diffused in the light guide plate by being diffused and incident in the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged, while the light guide plate emits light. At the end face, the light guided from the incident end face into the light guide plate can be efficiently scattered outward, so that color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently emitted.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that produces an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of the light guide plate by irregularly reflecting light from the LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, JP, 2005-228979, A).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur because the directivity of the LED as the light emitting element is strong.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate color unevenness and efficiently emit light.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs) and a light guide plate (for example, an outer light guide member 151, an inner light guide) that emits light emitted from the light emitting means. And the light guide plate is positioned on the opposite side of the incident end face (for example, the incident rear end face 152a) and the incident end face for receiving light from the plurality of light emitting means. The plurality of light emitting means are arranged along the incident end face, and the incident end face is lined with the plurality of light emitting means. A gaming machine, wherein a sawtooth-shaped lens cut is formed so as to diffuse light in a direction.

  According to such a configuration, the light efficiently travels in the light guide plate by diffusing the light in the direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged by the sawtooth lens cut at the incident end surface of the light guide plate. Unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed that produces an effect such that information is emitted and displayed on the front surface of the light guide plate by irregularly reflecting light from the LED introduced from the end of the light guide plate (for example, JP, 2005-228979, A).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that color unevenness is likely to occur because the directivity of the LED as the light emitting element is strong.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can eliminate color unevenness and efficiently emit light.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs) and a plurality of light guide plates (for example, an outer light guide member 151, an inner side) that emits light emitted from the light emitting means. The plurality of light guide plates are disposed adjacent to each other in the left-right direction, and each of the plurality of light guide plates receives an incident end surface (incident light) from the plurality of light emitting means. For example, an incident rear end face 152a and the like, and an outgoing end face (for example, an outgoing front end face 152b) that is positioned opposite to the incident end face and emits light, and the outgoing end faces of the plurality of light guide plates are The plurality of light emitting means are arranged so as to be aligned along the incident end face, and the incident end face diffuses light in a direction in which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged. 1 lens cut (for example, serrated) The second end lens has a shape different from that of the first lens cut, and scatters the light incident on the incident end surface to the outside. A gaming machine in which a cut (for example, a diamond-cut lens cut or the like) is formed.

  According to such a configuration, since the distance from the emission end face of the plurality of light guide plates to the player is different, the light scattering state is different for each light guide plate, and various decorative effects can be exhibited. . In addition, light emitted from the incident end surface to the inside of the light guide plate by the second lens cut can be efficiently scattered outward at the output end surfaces of the plurality of light guide plates. Can be efficiently irradiated.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, color unevenness can be eliminated and light can be efficiently irradiated.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone, and light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem of blocking the sound generated from the speaker cone, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly visible to the player. Since it was visible, there was a problem of detracting from aesthetics.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can transmit sound from a speaker to the outside without hindering aesthetic appearance.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is arranged in front of the sound output unit and a speaker (for example, the speaker 10b) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (for example, a vibration surface of the speaker 10b). A speaker cover (for example, the front cover 147C) in which a plurality of openings (for example, a mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C) capable of transmitting sound from the sound portion to the outside is formed, and a light emission effect is executed. A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.), and the light emitting unit receives light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148, etc.) A light guide member (for example, a light guide member) having an incident portion (for example, a rear end surface 149b) and a light emitting portion (for example, a front end surface 149c) that emits light from the incident portion outward. 49, etc.), wherein the light guide member is partially (e.g., a game machine, characterized in that such protrusion 149d) is arranged to abut with or close to the rear surface of the speaker cover.

  According to such a configuration, a part of the light guide member is disposed so as to be in contact with or close to the back surface of the speaker cover, and sound is guided to the speaker cover along the light guide member, thereby deteriorating the aesthetic appearance. The sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without any problem. Further, since the light guide member functions as a support member for the speaker cover, the rigidity of the speaker cover can be increased.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be tell | transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone, and light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem of blocking the sound generated from the speaker cone, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly visible to the player. Since it was visible, there was a problem of detracting from aesthetics.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can transmit sound from a speaker to the outside without hindering aesthetic appearance.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a speaker (for example, the speaker 10b) having a sound output unit (for example, a vibration surface of the speaker 10b) capable of generating sound, and a light emitting unit (for example, light emitting) capable of performing a light emission effect. A light-emitting unit (for example, LED 148a of the light-emitting substrate 148) and an incident part (for example, an incident rear end surface) on which light emitted from the light-emitting unit is incident. 149b), and a light guide member (eg, light guide member 149) having an emission part (eg, emission front end face 149c) that emits light from the incident part outward, the light guide The member is arranged in a ring shape so that the emitting part is along the periphery of the sound generating part.

  According to such a configuration, since the emission part of the light guide member is annularly arranged along the periphery so as not to block the sound output part of the speaker, the sound from the speaker can be removed without hindering the aesthetic appearance. I can tell you.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be tell | transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, a conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which a concave chamber is provided on the front side of a speaker cone, and light emitting means such as an LED is provided in the concave chamber (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-239851). ).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the light emitting means and the substrate are provided on the front side of the speaker cone, there is a problem of blocking the sound generated from the speaker cone, and the light emitting element and the substrate are clearly visible to the player. Since it was visible, there was a problem of detracting from aesthetics.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can transmit sound from a speaker to the outside without hindering aesthetic appearance.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is arranged in front of the sound output unit and a speaker (for example, the speaker 10b) having a sound output unit capable of generating sound (for example, a vibration surface of the speaker 10b). A speaker cover (for example, the front cover 147C) on which a lattice surface (for example, a mesh-like front surface 147Ca of the front cover 147C) is formed so as to be able to transmit sound from the sound portion to the outside, and a light emission effect can be performed A light emitting unit (for example, a light emitting substrate 148, a light guide member 149, etc.), and the light emitting unit includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 148a of the light emitting substrate 148) and an incident portion for receiving light emitted from the light emitting means. A light guide member (for example, a light guide member 149) having an exit portion (for example, an exit front end surface 149c) that emits light from the incident portion outward (for example, a rear end surface 149b). ), And the light guide member is arranged such that the emission part is spaced from the lattice plane by a predetermined distance along the periphery of the sound output part (for example, a cylindrical part 149a). And a second light guide part (for example, a projecting part 149d) disposed at a position closer to the lattice plane than the output part of the first light guide part. To play.

  According to such a configuration, the emission part of the first light guide part is arranged so as to be along the peripheral edge of the sound output part of the speaker while being spaced apart from the lattice plane of the speaker cover by a predetermined distance. Since the part is arranged at a position close to the lattice plane of the speaker cover, light from the same light source is emitted from a plurality of emission surfaces that are different in the depth direction. It can be realized, and the sound from the speaker can be transmitted to the outside without hindering the aesthetic appearance.

[Effect of the invention]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the sound from a speaker can be tell | transmitted outside without impairing aesthetics.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided so as to be adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright depending on the transmittance of the two lenses. There has been proposed one that looks dark on the other adjacent side (see, for example, JP-A-2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the exit surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the effect that the emitted light is mixed and the visibility is moderately effective is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and thus realizing a novel light effect. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a and 144b), a substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 144) on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided, and a front of the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light guide members (for example, a light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.), wherein the plurality of light emitting means are a first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b etc.) and the first light emitting means. 2nd light emission means (for example, LED144a etc.) arrange | positioned in a different position, and the said several light guide member reflects the light from the said 1st light emission means, and reflects the front part ( For example, a first light guide member (e.g., a light shielding member 145) having an opening 145c) and an emission unit (e.g., an emission front end) that emits light forward from the second light emitting unit while diffusing the light. Surface 14 ab, 146bb, 146cb) having a second light guide member (for example, light guide members 146a to 146c), and the reflective portion of the first light guide member has a first distance from the substrate. The light emitting member of the second light guide member is disposed at a position where the distance from the substrate is a second distance farther than the reflecting portion.

  According to such a configuration, the emission part of the second light guide member is disposed at a distance farther from the substrate on which the light emitting means is provided than the reflection part of the first light guide member. A clear difference can be produced in the visibility of the light guided forward, thereby realizing a novel light effect.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to cause a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided so as to be adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright depending on the transmittance of the two lenses. There has been proposed one that looks dark on the other adjacent side (see, for example, JP-A-2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the exit surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the effect that the emitted light is mixed and the visibility is moderately effective is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and thus realizing a novel light effect. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a and 144b), a substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 144) on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided, and a front of the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light guide members (for example, a light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.), a translucent front cover (for example, a front cover 141, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members, A decoration device (for example, a central decoration unit 14a) including the decoration device, the decoration device is attached to an upper portion of the game machine, and the plurality of light emitting means are first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b). Etc.) and second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a etc.) disposed at a position different from the first light emitting means, and the plurality of light guide members are light from the first light emitting means. A first light guide member (for example, a light shielding member 145) having a reflection portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the opening 145c) that scatters and guides forward, and the light from the second light emitting means is diffused forward. And a plurality of second light guide members (for example, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.) having exit portions (for example, exit front end surfaces 146ab, 146bb, 146cb), and the front cover extends in the vertical direction. On the other hand, it has an inclined translucent surface (for example, the front surface portion 141a) that protrudes forward from the lower portion of the front cover to the upper portion thereof, and the plurality of second light guide members are formed in a plate shape. The gaming machine is arranged so as to be adjacent to each other at a predetermined interval in the thickness direction, and the emitting portion is arranged along the back surface of the light transmitting surface.

  According to such a configuration, since the emission parts of the plurality of second light guide members are arranged along the inclined light-transmitting surface of the front cover, the light from the reflection part of the first light guide member and the plurality of light emission parts are arranged. A clear difference in visibility from the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the second light guide member can be produced, thereby realizing a novel light effect. In addition, when the player looks up, the emission portions of the plurality of second light guide members do not overlap each other, and each emission portion can be surely seen through the translucent surface, thereby enhancing the light effect. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to cause a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is as follows.

[Background technology]
The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  This type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, is configured to perform various effects as the game progresses. The effect is based on video using a liquid crystal display device, the effect based on light using an LED, etc. Various effects such as effects by sound using a sound or effects by physical behavior using a movable device are performed.

  For example, as a conventional gaming machine, two lenses having different light transmittances are provided so as to be adjacent to each other, and even if the amount of light from the light source is the same, one of them looks bright depending on the transmittance of the two lenses. There has been proposed one that looks dark on the other adjacent side (see, for example, JP-A-2011-87778).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the above conventional gaming machine, since the exit surfaces of the two lenses that emit light are aligned at the same height position, the effect that the emitted light is mixed and the visibility is moderately effective is effective. There was a difficulty that it could not be demonstrated.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing a clear difference in the visibility of light and thus realizing a novel light effect. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs 144a and 144b), a substrate (for example, the light emitting substrate 144) on which the plurality of light emitting means are provided, and a front of the plurality of light emitting means. A plurality of light guide members (for example, a light shielding member 145, light guide members 146a to 146c, etc.), a translucent front cover (for example, a front cover 141, etc.) provided in front of the plurality of light guide members, The plurality of light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, LED 144b) and second light emitting means (for example, LED 144a) disposed at a position different from the first light emitting means, The plurality of light guide members include a first light guide member (for example, a light shielding member 145) having a reflection portion (for example, a peripheral portion of the opening 145c) that scatters light from the first light emitting unit and guides the light forward. And an incident end face (for example, incident rear end faces 146aa, 146ba, 146ca) on which light from the second light emitting means is incident, and an outgoing end face (for example, outgoing front end face 146ab) that emits light while diffusing the light from the incident end face. , 146bb, 146cb), a second light guide member (e.g., light guide members 146a to 146c), and the front cover has a light-transmitting surface (e.g., front portion 141a), and The second light guide member is formed of a flat light guide member disposed so that the emission end surface is along the rear surface of the light transmitting surface, and the incident end surface transmits light into the second light guide member. A first lens cut for diffusing in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate is formed, and the exit end face has a shape different from that of the first lens cut, and the light incident upon and introduced to the entrance end face is outward. Spread to Gaming machine, wherein the second lens cut is formed.

  According to such a configuration, the emission end surface serving as one end surface of the flat plate-like second light guide member is disposed along the inclined light-transmitting surface of the front cover, and the incident end surface of the second light guide member is A first lens cut that diffuses light in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate is formed, while a second lens cut that diffuses light outward in a shape different from the first lens cut is formed on the exit end face Therefore, the second light guide member efficiently guides the light from the light emitting means to the light transmitting surface through the incident end surface to the light emitting end surface, while the first light guide member reflects the reflected light. Since the light can be guided to a light-transmitting surface, a clear difference can be caused in the visibility of these lights, and a novel light effect can be realized. Further, in the second light guide member, the first lens cut on the incident end face makes incident while diffusing the light in the longitudinal direction of the flat plate, and efficiently advances the light into the flat second light guide member. On the other hand, on the exit end face of the second light guide member, the light guided from the entrance end face to the inside can be efficiently diffused outward, so color unevenness is eliminated and light is efficiently emitted. Can do.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to cause a clear difference in the visibility of light and to realize a novel light effect.

<About others>
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine as disclosed in JP-A-2006-152832 is also known. However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have a configuration or function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can aim at the improvement of interest.

  Below, the 1st accessory apparatus 4000 and the 2nd accessory apparatus 5000 which concern on this embodiment are demonstrated.

[First actor device 4000]
First, the first accessory device 4000 will be described with reference to FIGS. The first accessory device 4000 performs an effect by moving an effect member (such as a lower turning decorative body 4210 described later). The first accessory device 4000 mainly includes a frame body 4100, a lower movable effect agent 4200, a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300, an upper movable effect agent 4400, and an upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500.

[Frame 4100]
A frame 4100 shown in FIGS. 42 to 47 is a structure for supporting a lower movable effect accessory 4200, a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300, etc., which will be described later. The frame body 4100 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view with a center opened by combining plate-like members and the like.

[Lower Moveable Director 4200]
42 to 44 and FIGS. 48 to 50, the lower movable effect accessory 4200 performs an effect using a lower rotating decorative body 4210 described later in the lower portion of the first accessory device 4000. The lower movable effect accessory 4200 mainly includes a lower rotation decorative body 4210 and a lower rotation drive mechanism 4220.

[Lower rotating decorative body 4210]
The lower rotating decorative body 4210 shown in FIGS. 48 to 52 is appropriately decorated and produces an effect by being moved. The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Specifically, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 mainly includes a first surface 4211, a second surface 4212, a third surface 4213, a fourth surface 4214, a left side surface 4215, and a right side surface 4216.

  The first surface 4211 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In an initial state to be described later (see FIG. 1), the first surface 4211 is directed forward. The first surface 4211 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The first surface 4211 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The first surface 4211 is appropriately decorated (characters, figures, characters, etc.).

  The second surface 4212 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed on (opposed to) the opposite side of the first surface 4211. In the initial state to be described later, the second surface 4212 is directed rearward. The second surface 4212 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The second surface 4212 is formed to have substantially the same area as the first surface 4211. The second surface 4212 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. Appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4211 are applied to the second surface 4212. Specifically, the second surface 4212 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 described later (for example, the second surface of the upper rotating decorative body 4410). English words that have one meaning in combination with the decoration on 4412 (for example, “BIG” is applied to the second surface 4412, “BONUS” is applied to the second surface 4212, and “BIG BONUS” is combined. Etc.) are given. On the second surface 4212, a protrusion 4212a is formed.

  The protruding portion 4212 a is a portion formed so as to protrude from the surface of the second surface 4212. The protrusions 4212a are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212, respectively. Strictly speaking, the projecting portion 4212a is formed by projecting the upper and lower end portions of the rear side portion of the left side surface 4215 and the right side surface 4216 described later rearward. The projecting portion 4212a is formed so that the rear end portion is in a planar shape substantially parallel to the second surface 4212. The protruding portion 4212a protrudes rearward from the second surface 4212 to such an extent that the planar rear end portion is positioned rearward of the decoration formed on the second surface 4212.

  The third surface 4213 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface adjacent to the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. In an initial state to be described later, the third surface 4213 is directed upward. The third surface 4213 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The third surface 4213 is formed to have a smaller area than the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. Specifically, the front-rear width of the third surface 4213 is formed to be smaller than the vertical width of the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. The third surface 4213 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The third surface 4213 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. Specifically, the third surface 4213 includes a decoration related to the decoration applied to the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 described later (for example, the third surface of the upper rotating decorative body 4410). A pattern that forms an integral shape with the decoration applied to 4413 is applied. On the third surface 4213, a decorative through hole 4213a is formed.

  The decorative through hole 4213a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the third surface 4213. The decorative through hole 4213a is formed to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the third surface 4213. Thus, the decorative through hole 4213a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the third surface 4213. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 communicate with each other through the decorative through hole 4213a. Through the decorative through hole 4213a, the heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released to the outside (dissipated).

  The fourth surface 4214 is one of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed on (opposed to) the side opposite to the third surface 4213. In an initial state to be described later, the fourth surface 4214 is directed downward. The fourth surface 4214 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The fourth surface 4214 is formed to have substantially the same area as the third surface 4213 (an area smaller than the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212). The fourth surface 4214 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The fourth surface 4214 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212. The fourth surface 4214 is formed with a decorative through hole 4214a and an engaging recess 4214b.

  The decorative through hole 4214a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the fourth surface 4214. The decoration through-hole 4214a is formed to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the fourth surface 4214. Thus, the decorative through hole 4214a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the fourth surface 4214. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 communicate with each other through the decorative through hole 4214a. Through the decorative through hole 4214a, the heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released to the outside (dissipated).

  The engagement recess 4214b (see FIGS. 50 and 53) is a recess formed so as to recess the surface of the fourth surface 4214. The engaging recesses 4214b are formed at the front and rear center portions of the left and right ends of the fourth surface 4214, respectively. The engaging recess 4214b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the bottom. The engaging recess 4214b mainly includes a bottom surface 4214c, an inclined surface 4214d, and a through hole 4214e.

  The bottom surface 4214c is a planar portion formed at the bottom of the engagement recess 4214b. The bottom surface 4214c is formed substantially parallel to the surface of the fourth surface 4214.

  The inclined surface 4214d is a side surface of the engaging recess 4214b (a surface connecting the surface of the fourth surface 4214 and the bottom surface 4214c of the engaging recess 4214b). More specifically, the inclined surface 4214d is a pair of front and rear sides among the side surfaces of the engaging recess 4214b. The pair of inclined surfaces 4214d are inclined so as to be separated from each other toward the surface side of the fourth surface 4214 (opening side of the engaging recess 4214b) from the bottom surface 4214c side of the engaging recess 4214b (the front-rear width gradually increases). is doing.

  The through hole 4214e is a hole formed so as to penetrate the bottom surface 4214c. The through hole 4214e is formed so as to penetrate substantially half of the bottom surface 4214c. The internal space and the external space of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are communicated with each other through the through hole 4214e. Through the through hole 4214e, the heat of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be released to the outside (dissipated).

  The left side surface 4215 is one surface (left side surface) of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left side surface 4215 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The rear end portion of the left side surface 4215 forms the protruding portion 4212a of the second surface 4212 described above. Further, a cylindrical protrusion 4215a, a central through hole 4215b, and an engagement hole 4215c are formed on the left side surface 4215.

  The cylindrical protrusion 4215a is a part formed so as to protrude from the center of the left side surface 4215 toward the left. The cylindrical protruding portion 4215a is formed in a hollow columnar shape (bottomed cylindrical shape) whose longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right.

  The central through hole 4215b is a hole formed so as to penetrate the center of the left side surface of the cylindrical protrusion 4215a. The central through hole 4215b is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side.

  The engagement hole 4215c is a hole formed so as to penetrate the left side surface of the cylindrical protrusion 4215a. Three engagement holes 4215c are formed at equal intervals around the central through hole 4215b.

  The right side surface 4216 is one surface (right side surface) of the six surfaces of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The right side surface 4216 is mainly formed of a single plate-like member. The rear end portion of the right side surface 4216 forms the protruding portion 4212a of the second surface 4212 described above. Further, a through hole 4216a is formed in the right side surface 4216.

  The through hole 4216 a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the center of the right side surface 4216. The through hole 4216a is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side.

[Lower Rotation Drive Mechanism 4220]
The lower rotation driving mechanism 4220 shown in FIGS. 48 to 57 drives the lower rotation decorative body 4210 to rotate. The lower rotation drive mechanism 4220 mainly includes a left case 4221, a motor 4222, an output gear 4223, a driven gear 4224, a right case 4225, and a rotation shaft portion 4226.

  The left case 4221 supports the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and accommodates various components. The left case 4221 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The left case 4221 is formed of a plurality of members. In FIG. 55, a part of the left case 4221 is omitted, and the inside of the left case 4221 is shown. The left case 4221 mainly includes a through hole 4221a, a sliding portion 4221b, and a sandwiching portion 4221c.

  The through hole 4221 a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the right side surface of the left case 4221. The through hole 4221a is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side.

  The sliding portion 4221b is a portion that slidably contacts a left rail member 4310 described later. The sliding portion 4221b is formed in a groove shape in which the left portion of the rear surface of the left case 4221 is recessed vertically.

  The clamping part 4221c is a part for connecting the left case 4221 to a belt 4333 described later. The sandwiching portion 4221c is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The sandwiching portion 4221c is fixed to the left end portion of the left case 4221 from the front. The sandwiching portion 4221 c can connect the left case 4221 to the belt 4333 by sandwiching a belt 4333, which will be described later, with the left case 4221.

  The motor 4222 is a drive source for rotating the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The motor 4222 is disposed inside the left case 4221. An output shaft (not shown) of the motor 4222 is provided so as to protrude toward the left.

  The output gear 4223 is a spur gear that is rotated by the driving force from the motor 4222. The output gear 4223 is disposed inside the left case 4221. The output gear 4223 is disposed on the left side of the motor 4222 with the rotation axis direction facing the left-right direction. The output gear 4223 is connected to the output shaft of the motor 4222.

  The driven gear 4224 is a spur gear that rotates by the driving force from the output gear 4223. The driven gear 4224 is disposed inside the left case 4221. Specifically, the driven gear 4224 is formed with a main body portion 4224a, a through hole 4224b, and a protruding portion 4224c.

  The main body 4224a is a portion formed in a spur gear shape. The main body portion 4224a is disposed above the output gear 4223 with the rotation axis direction directed in the left-right direction. The main body 4224a is arranged to mesh with the output gear 4223.

  The through hole 4224b is a hole formed so as to penetrate the main body portion 4224a to the left and right. The through hole 4224b is formed at the center of the main body portion 4224a.

  The protrusion 4224c is a part formed so as to protrude rightward from the right side surface of the main body 4224a. Three protrusions 4224c are formed at equal intervals around the through hole 4224b. The protrusion 4224c is formed at a position corresponding to the engagement hole 4215c of the lower rotating decorative body 4210.

  The right case 4225 supports the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The right case 4225 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The left case 4221 is formed of a plurality of members. The right case 4225 mainly includes a sliding portion 4225a and a clamping portion 4225b.

  The sliding portion 4225a is a portion that is slidably connected to a right rail member 4320 described later. The sliding portion 4225a is formed on the rear surface of the right case 4225. The sliding portion 4225a is formed in a substantially rectangular tube shape that extends vertically.

  The clamping part 4225b is a part for connecting the right case 4225 to a belt 4343 described later. The sandwiching portion 4225b is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The clamping portion 4225b is fixed to the right end portion of the right case 4225 from the front. The sandwiching portion 4225b can connect the right case 4225 to the belt 4343 by sandwiching a belt 4343, which will be described later, with the right case 4225.

  The rotation shaft portion 4226 shown in FIGS. 54, 56 and 57 is for supporting the lower rotating decorative body 4210 so as to be rotatable and causing the lower rotating decorative body 4210 to emit light. The rotation shaft portion 4226 mainly includes a fixed shaft 4226a, a connecting portion 4226b, a front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c, a rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d, and a light emitting substrate 4226e.

  The fixed shaft 4226a is a substantially columnar member. The fixed shaft 4226a is arranged with the axial direction facing left and right.

  The connecting portion 4226b is for connecting the fixed shaft 4226a to a front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and a rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d described later. The connecting portion 4226b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The connecting part 4226b is arranged with the axial direction facing left and right. The left end portion of the connecting portion 4226b is fixed to the right end portion of the fixed shaft 4226a.

  The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c forms a rotation shaft for rotatably supporting the lower rotation decorative body 4210. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape in which the cylinder is halved along the axis). The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c includes a curved surface (a surface formed in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side), a rib formed for reinforcement, and the like. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is disposed with the curved surface facing forward. The front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c is formed of a light-transmitting material, and can diffuse light emitted from a light emitting substrate 4226e (LED 4226i) described later.

  The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d forms a rotating shaft for rotatably supporting the lower rotating decorative body 4210. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is formed in a substantially semi-cylindrical shape (a shape in which the cylinder is halved along the axis). The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is arranged with the longitudinal direction facing left and right. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d includes a curved surface (a surface formed in a semicircular shape in a side view), a plurality of openings 4226h formed on the curved surface, a rib formed for reinforcement, and the like. The rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d is disposed with the curved surface facing rearward.

  The light emitting substrate 4226e is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. The light emitting substrate 4226e is disposed with its plate surface facing forward and backward and with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. A plurality of LEDs 4226i are provided on the front surface of the light emitting substrate 4226e over substantially the entire left and right sides of the light emitting substrate 4226e. By causing the LED 4226i to emit light, light can be irradiated forward of the light emitting substrate 4226e.

  The light emitting substrate 4226e is fixed to the connecting portion 4226b via the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d. Specifically, the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d are fixed to each other so as to sandwich the light emitting substrate 4226e from the front and rear. At this time, the connecting portion 4226b is also sandwiched between the left end portions of the front semi-cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical portion 4226d. In this way, the light emitting substrate 4226e is fixed to the connecting portion 4226b by the connecting portion 4226b and the light emitting substrate 4226e being sandwiched between the front half cylindrical portion 4226c and the rear half cylindrical portion 4226d.

  By combining the front semi-cylindrical part 4226c and the rear semi-cylindrical part 4226d in this manner, a substantially columnar member (rotating shaft part 4226) is formed. A substantially cylindrical left collar 4226f and right collar 4226g are fitted in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the pivot shaft 4226, respectively.

<Regarding Lower Rotating Decoration Body 4210 and Lower Rotating Driving Mechanism 4220>
As shown in FIG. 58, the rotation shaft portion 4226 configured as described above is inserted into the lower rotation decoration body 4210 from the through hole 4216a of the lower rotation decoration body 4210. At this time, since the rotation shaft portion 4226 is formed so as to have a circular cross section (substantially cylindrical), it is easy to align with the through hole 4216a (and thus the lower rotation decorative body 4210) having a circular shape when viewed from the side. Can be done.

  The fixed shaft 4226a provided at the left end portion of the rotation shaft portion 4226 is inserted into the central through hole 4215b of the lower rotation decorative body 4210 and is disposed so as to protrude leftward from the central through hole 4215b.

  In such a state, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical protruding portion 4215a of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion 4226 via the left collar 4226f, and the lower portion The inner peripheral surface of the through hole 4216a of the rotating decorative body 4210 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion 4226 via the right collar 4226g.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the left end portion of the fixed shaft 4226a of the rotating shaft portion 4226 is inserted into the through hole 4224b of the driven gear 4224 and is fixed to the left case 4221. At this time, the driven gear 4224 can rotate relative to the fixed shaft 4226a. Further, the right end portion of the rotation shaft portion 4226 is fixed to the right case 4225.

  Further, the protrusion 4224c of the driven gear 4224 is fitted (engaged) with the engagement hole 4215c formed in the cylindrical protrusion 4215a of the lower rotating decorative body 4210. Accordingly, when the driven gear 4224 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4222, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 rotates about the rotating shaft portion 4226 as the driven gear 4224 rotates. At this time, since the rotation shaft portion 4226 is fixed to the left case 4221 and the right case 4225, it does not rotate.

  In this way, by appropriately driving the motor 4222, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be rotated and the desired surface can be directed forward. Inside the lower rotating decorative body 4210, light can always be emitted forward from the light emitting substrate 4226e, so that the front surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can emit light brightly. Note that the rotation position of the lower rotation decoration body 4210 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the lower rotation decoration body 4210 is rotated to an arbitrary rotation position based on the detection value of the sensor. Can do. Each LED 4226i can be controlled separately, and light emission control according to the surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 facing the front can be performed. With such a configuration, the light emitting substrate 4226e also rotates according to the lower rotating decorative body 4210, and a plurality of light emitting substrates 4226e are provided as compared with the case where the same number of light emitting substrates 4226e as the number of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are provided. There is no need to arrange them, and the cost can be reduced.

[Lower character lifting mechanism 4300]
The lower accessory lifting / lowering mechanism 4300 shown in FIGS. 43 to 47 is configured to drive the lower movable rendering accessory 4200 up and down. The lower accessory lifting / lowering mechanism 4300 mainly includes a left rail member 4310, a right rail member 4320, a left drive mechanism 4330, and a right drive mechanism 4340.

[Left rail member 4310]
The left rail member 4310 guides the lower movable effect combination 4200 up and down. The left rail member 4310 is formed in a rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down. On the front surface of the left rail member 4310, a rail 4311 extending in the vertical direction from the lower end portion to the vertical center is formed. The left rail member 4310 is fixed to the left part of the frame 4100 so as to extend vertically.

[Right rail member 4320]
The right rail member 4320 guides the lower movable effect combination 4200 up and down. The right rail member 4320 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down. The right rail member 4320 is fixed to the right part of the frame 4100 so as to extend vertically.

[Left side drive mechanism 4330]
The left drive mechanism 4330 is configured to drive the lower movable effect actor 4200 up and down. The left drive mechanism 4330 mainly includes an upper pulley 4331, a lower pulley 4332, a belt 4333, a transmission gear 4334, and a motor 4335.

  The upper pulley 4331 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. The upper pulley 4331 is provided in the middle of the upper and lower sides of the left side surface of the frame body 4100. More specifically, the upper pulley 4331 is disposed inside the left side surface of the frame 4100. The upper pulley 4331 is provided on the outer side of the left side surface of the frame body 4100 and is rotatably supported by a movable support body 4331a that can slide up and down. The movable support 4331a is always urged upward by a spring 4331b.

  The lower pulley 4332 is a member formed in a substantially circular plate shape. Lower pulley 4332 is provided at the lower part of the left side surface of frame 4100 (below upper pulley 4331). More specifically, the lower pulley 4332 is rotatably supported inside the left side surface of the frame body 4100.

  The belt 4333 supports the lower movable effect combination 4200. The belt 4333 is wound around the upper pulley 4331 and the lower pulley 4332.

  The transmission gear 4334 transmits a driving force to the lower pulley 4332. Transmission gear 4334 is arranged to mesh with a gear formed on lower pulley 4332.

  The motor 4335 is a drive source for raising and lowering the lower movable effect actor 4200 up and down. The motor 4335 is provided in the lower left part of the frame 4100. Driving force from an output shaft (not shown) of motor 4335 is transmitted to transmission gear 4334. When the transmission gear 4334 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4335, the lower pulley 4332 is rotated with the rotation of the transmission gear 4334. As a result, the belt 4333 rotates between the upper pulley 4331 and the lower pulley 4332.

[Right-side drive mechanism 4340]
The right drive mechanism 4340 drives the lower movable effect combination 4200 up and down. The right drive mechanism 4340 mainly includes an upper pulley 4341, a lower pulley (not shown), a belt 4343, a transmission gear (not shown), and a motor 4345. Since the right drive mechanism 4340 is configured in substantially the same manner (substantially left-right symmetry) as the left drive mechanism 4330, the configuration will be briefly described below.

  The upper pulley 4341 and the lower pulley (not shown) are provided on the right side surface of the frame 4100. A belt 4343 is wound around an upper pulley 4341 and a lower pulley (not shown). The driving force of the motor 4345 is transmitted to the lower pulley via a transmission gear (not shown). The belt 4343 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 4345.

<Regarding the lower movable effect accessory 4200 and the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300>
The lower movable effect combination 4200 is supported so as to be movable up and down by the lower combination lifting mechanism 4300 configured as described above. Specifically, the sliding portion 4221b of the left case 4221 and the rail 4311 of the left rail member 4310 are slidably in contact with each other. The right rail member 4320 is slidably inserted into the sliding portion 4225a of the right case 4225.

  Further, the belt 4333 is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion 4221c of the lower movable effect accessory 4200 and the left case 4221, whereby the left case 4221 is coupled to the belt 4333. Further, the belt 4343 is sandwiched between the sandwiching portion 4225b of the lower movable effect combination 4200 and the right case 4225, whereby the right case 4225 is coupled to the belt 4343 (see FIG. 44). In this way, the lower movable effect combination 4200 is supported by the left and right belts 4333 and 4343. By rotating the left and right belts 4333 and 4343 in an arbitrary direction, the lower movable effect accessory 4200 can be moved up and down. In addition, the vertical position of the lower movable effect actor 4200 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the lower movable effect actor 4200 can be rotated to an arbitrary vertical position based on the detection value of the sensor. .

[Upper movable production character 4400]
42-44 and the upper movable production | presentation accessory 4400 shown to FIGS. 60-62 perform an effect | action using the upper rotation decoration body 4410 mentioned later in the upper part of the 1st accessory apparatus 4000. FIG. The upper movable effect combination 4400 mainly includes an upper rotation decorative body 4410 and an upper rotation drive mechanism 4420. In addition, since the structure of the upper movable production | presentation actor 4400 is substantially the same as the structure of the above-mentioned lower movable production | presentation actor 4200, a different point from the lower movable production | presentation actor 4200 is demonstrated in detail below.

[Upper rotating decorative body 4410]
The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is appropriately decorated and produces an effect by being moved. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a hollow shape (box shape). The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is arranged with its longitudinal direction facing left and right. Specifically, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 mainly includes a first surface 4411, a second surface 4412, a third surface 4413, a fourth surface 4414, a left side surface 4415, and a right side surface 4416.

  The first surface 4411 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. In the initial state to be described later, the first surface 4411 is directed forward. The first surface 4411 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The first surface 4411 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The first surface 4411 is appropriately decorated (characters, figures, characters, etc.).

  The second surface 4412 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed on (opposed to) the side opposite to the first surface 4411. In an initial state to be described later, the second surface 4412 is directed rearward. The second surface 4412 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The second surface 4412 is formed to have substantially the same area as the first surface 4411. The second surface 4412 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. Appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decoration formed on the first surface 4411 are applied to the second surface 4412. Specifically, the second surface 4412 has a decoration related to the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 (for example, on the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210). English words that make one sense in combination with the decorations (for example, “BIG” is applied to the second surface 4412, “BONUS” is applied to the second surface 4212, and both are combined with “BIG BONUS”. Meaning English words)). A protrusion 4412 a is formed on the second surface 4412.

  The protruding portion 4412 a is a portion formed so as to protrude from the surface of the second surface 4412. The protrusions 4412a are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412, respectively. Strictly speaking, the projecting portion 4412a is formed by projecting the upper and lower end portions of the rear side portion of the left side surface 4415 and the right side surface 4416 described later rearward. The projecting portion 4412 a is formed so that the rear end portion is in a planar shape substantially parallel to the second surface 4412. The protruding portion 4412a protrudes rearward from the second surface 4412 to such an extent that the planar rear end portion is positioned rearward of the decoration formed on the second surface 4412.

  The third surface 4413 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface adjacent to the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. In the initial state to be described later, the third surface 4413 is directed downward. The third surface 4413 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The third surface 4413 is formed to have a smaller area than the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. Specifically, the front-rear width of the third surface 4413 is formed to be smaller than the vertical width of the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. The third surface 4413 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The third surface 4413 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. Specifically, on the third surface 4413, a decoration related to the decoration applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 (for example, on the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210). A pattern that forms an integral shape with the decorated decoration is applied.

  The fourth surface 4414 is one of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is a surface formed on (opposed to) the side opposite to the third surface 4413. In an initial state to be described later, the fourth surface 4414 is directed upward. The fourth surface 4414 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The fourth surface 4414 is formed to have substantially the same area as the third surface 4413 (an area smaller than the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412). The fourth surface 4414 is formed of a material having at least part of light transmittance. The fourth surface 4414 is provided with appropriate decorations (characters, figures, characters, etc.) different from the decorations formed on the first surface 4411 and the second surface 4412. On the fourth surface 4414, a decorative through hole 4414a and an engaging convex portion 4414b are formed.

  The decorative through hole 4414 a is a hole formed so as to penetrate the fourth surface 4414. The decoration through-hole 4414a is formed to have a shape corresponding to the decoration applied to the fourth surface 4414. Accordingly, the decorative through hole 4414a is formed so as not to be noticeable when the player visually recognizes the fourth surface 4414. The internal space and the external space of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 communicate with each other through the decorative through hole 4414a. Through the decorative through hole 4414a, the heat of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be released to the outside (dissipated).

  The engaging convex portion 4414b is a convex portion formed so as to project the surface of the fourth surface 4414. Engaging convex portions 4414b are formed at the front and rear center portions of the left and right ends of the fourth surface 4414, respectively. The engaging convex portion 4414b is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the side. The engaging convex portion 4414b mainly includes an inclined surface 4414d.

  The inclined surfaces 4414d are a pair of front and rear surfaces of the engaging convex portion 4414b. The pair of inclined surfaces 4414d are inclined so as to be close to each other from the bottom side of the engaging convex portion 4414b toward the tip side (the width in the front-rear direction gradually decreases).

  The left side surface 4415 is one surface (left side surface) among the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The left side surface 4415 is mainly formed by a single plate-like member. The rear end portion of the left side surface 4415 forms the protruding portion 4412a of the second surface 4412 described above.

  The right side surface 4416 is one surface (right side surface) of the six surfaces of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The right side surface 4416 is mainly formed of a single plate-like member. The rear end portion of the right side surface 4416 forms the protruding portion 4412a of the second surface 4412 described above.

[Upper rotation drive mechanism 4420]
The upper turning drive mechanism 4420 drives the upper turning decorative body 4410 to turn. The upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 mainly includes a left case 4421, a right case 4425, and the like.

  The configuration of the upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 is substantially the same as the configuration of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220 (which rotates the lower rotation decorative body 4210). That is, the upper rotation drive mechanism 4420 is provided with a substantially cylindrical rotation shaft portion (not shown) (corresponding to the rotation shaft portion 4226 of the lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) between the left case 4421 and the right case 4425. . Further, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotatably supported by the rotating shaft portion. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated by a driving force of a motor (not shown) provided in the left case 4421 (corresponding to the motor 4222 of the lower rotating driving mechanism 4220).

  Thus, by appropriately driving a motor (not shown), the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be rotated and the desired surface can be directed forward. Inside the upper rotating decorative body 4410, light is emitted forward from a light emitting substrate (not shown), so that the front surface of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can emit light brightly. The rotation position of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be detected by an appropriate sensor, and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated to an arbitrary rotating position based on the detection value of the sensor. Can do.

[Upper character lifting mechanism 4500]
43 to 45 and the upper accessory lifting / lowering mechanism 4500 shown in FIG. 47 are configured to drive the upper movable rendering accessory 4400 up and down. The upper accessory lifting / lowering mechanism 4500 mainly includes a left rail member 4310, a right rail member 4320, a left drive mechanism 4530, and a right drive mechanism 4540.

  The configuration of the upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500 is substantially the same (substantially vertically symmetrical) as the configuration of the lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300 described above (which drives the lower movable effect accessory 4200 up and down). In other words, the left case 4421 and the right case 4425 of the upper movable effect accessory 4400 are slidably provided above the left rail member 4310 and the right rail member 4320, respectively. Further, the left case 4421 and the right case 4425 of the upper movable effect accessory 4400 are connected to the belt 4533 of the left drive mechanism 4530 and the belt 4543 of the right drive mechanism 4540, respectively. By driving the motor 4535 and the motor 4545 to rotate the left and right belts 4533 and 4543 in an arbitrary direction, the upper movable effect accessory 4400 can be moved up and down. In addition, the up-and-down position of the said upper movable production | presentation actor 4400 can be detected with a suitable sensor, and based on the detected value of the said sensor, the upper movable production | presentation actor 4400 can be rotated to arbitrary vertical positions. .

[Second accessory device 5000]
Next, the second accessory device 5000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 42, and 63 to 66. The second accessory device 5000 performs an effect by moving an effect member (such as a left movable ornament 5120 described later). The second accessory device 5000 mainly includes a left movable effect actor 5100 and a right movable effect agent 5200.

[Left part movable production character 5100]
1, 42, 63 and 64, the left movable effect combination 5100 performs an effect using a left movable decorative body 5120 described later. The left movable effect accessory 5100 is disposed in front of the left portion of the first accessory device 4000 (the left side surface of the frame 4100). The left movable effect accessory 5100 mainly includes a left decorative frame 5110, a left movable decorative body 5120, and a left accessory sliding mechanism 5130.

[Left decorative frame 5110]
The left decorative frame 5110 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down. Appropriate decoration is applied to the front of the left decorative frame 5110.

[Left movable ornament 5120]
The left movable decorative body 5120 is appropriately decorated and produces an effect by being moved. The left movable decorative body 5120 mainly includes a base member 5121 and a decorative member 5122.

  The base member 5121 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down.

  The decorative member 5122 is a member provided with an appropriate decoration. The decorative member 5122 is formed in a substantially plate shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down. An appropriate decoration is formed on the front surface of the decorative member 5122. The decorative member 5122 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 5121.

[Left part sliding mechanism 5130]
The left part sliding mechanism 5130 slides the left movable decorative body 5120 left and right relative to the left decorative frame 5110. The left part sliding mechanism 5130 mainly includes a motor 5131, an output gear 5132, a pinion gear 5133, a rack gear 5134, a guide shaft portion 5135, and a guide member 5136.

  The motor 5131 is a drive source for sliding the left movable decorative body 5120. The motor 5131 is provided on the upper portion of the rear surface of the left decorative frame body 5110.

  The output gear 5132 is for outputting the driving force of the motor 5131. The output gear 5132 is connected to an output shaft (not shown) of the motor 5131 with the rotation axis direction directed in the front-rear direction.

  The pinion gear 5133 transmits the driving force from the output gear 5132. The pinion gear 5133 is disposed below the output gear 5132 with the rotation axis direction facing the front-rear direction. The pinion gear 5133 is rotatably supported by the left decorative frame body 5110. Pinion gear 5133 is arranged to mesh with output gear 5132.

  The rack gear 5134 converts the driving force transmitted from the pinion gear 5133 into a linear motion. The rack gear 5134 is formed integrally with the base member 5121 at the upper end of the base member 5121 of the left movable decorative body 5120. Rack gear 5134 is formed to extend to the left and right.

  The guide shaft part 5135 is a part for connecting the left movable decorative body 5120 to the left decorative frame body 5110 so as to be movable (slidable). The guide shaft portion 5135 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape whose longitudinal direction is front and rear. The guide shaft portion 5135 is formed so as to extend forward from the upper portion of the front surface of the base member 5121 of the left movable decorative body 5120. Two guide shaft portions 5135 are provided on the front surface of the base member 5121 side by side.

  The guide member 5136 is a part for connecting the left movable decorative body 5120 to the left decorative frame body 5110 so as to be movable (slidable). The guide member 5136 is a substantially plate-like member whose longitudinal direction is directed to the left and right. The guide member 5136 is fixed to the left decorative frame 5110 below the pinion gear 5133. The guide member 5136 is formed with a long hole 5136a extending left and right.

  The guide shaft portion 5135 configured as described above is inserted into the elongated hole 5136a of the guide member 5136 through the collar 5135a. Accordingly, the left movable decorative body 5120 can slide relative to the left decorative frame body 5110 along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 5136a (that is, in the left-right direction). At this time, the rack gear 5134 is arranged to mesh with the pinion gear 5133.

  The left movable ornament 5120 is slid left and right by the left part sliding mechanism 5130 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 5131 is driven, the driving force of the motor 5131 is transmitted to the rack gear 5134 via the output gear 5132 and the like, and the rack gear 5134 slides left and right. By controlling the operation of the motor 5131 and rotating the output gear 5132 in an arbitrary direction, the rack gear 5134 can be slid in an arbitrary direction (left or right), and the left movable decorative body 5120 is moved left and right. Can be slid.

[Right part movable director 5200]
1, 42, 65, and 66, the right movable effect actor 5200 performs an effect using a right movable ornament 5220 described later. The right movable effect accessory 5200 is disposed in front of the right portion of the first accessory device 4000 (the right side surface of the frame body 4100). The right part movable effect accessory 5200 mainly includes a right part decorative frame body 5210, a right part movable decorative body 5220, and a right part accessory sliding mechanism 5230. In addition, since the right part movable production | presentation actor 5200 is comprised substantially the same as the left part movable production | presentation actor 5100 (substantially left-right symmetric), the structure is demonstrated easily below.

[Right decorative frame 5210]
The right decorative frame body 5210 is a member formed in a substantially plate shape whose longitudinal direction is directed up and down. Appropriate decoration is applied to the front of the right decorative frame 5210.

[Right movable ornament 5220]
The right movable ornament 5220 is appropriately decorated and produces an effect by being moved. The right movable decorative body 5220 mainly includes a base member 5221 and a decorative member 5222. The decorative member 5222 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 5221.

[Right part sliding mechanism 5230]
The right part sliding mechanism 5230 slides the right movable decorative body 5220 left and right with respect to the right decorative frame body 5210. The right part sliding mechanism 5230 mainly includes a motor 5231, an output gear (not shown), a pinion gear 5233, a rack gear 5234, a guide shaft 5235, and a guide member 5236.

  A motor 5231, an output gear (not shown), a pinion gear 5233, and a guide member 5236 are provided on the upper portion of the rear surface of the right decorative frame body 5210. The base member 5221 is provided with a rack gear 5234 and a guide shaft portion 5235.

  The guide shaft portion 5235 is inserted into the elongated hole 5236a of the guide member 5236 through the collar 5235a. Thus, the right movable decorative body 5220 can slide with respect to the right decorative frame body 5210 along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 5236a (that is, in the left-right direction). At this time, the rack gear 5234 is arranged so as to mesh with the pinion gear 5233.

  The right movable ornament 5220 is slid left and right by the right part sliding mechanism 5230 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 5231 is driven, the driving force of the motor 5231 is transmitted to the rack gear 5234 via an output gear or the like, and the rack gear 5234 slides left and right. By controlling the operation of the motor 5231 and rotating the output gear in an arbitrary direction, the rack gear 5234 can be slid in an arbitrary direction (left or right), and the right movable decorative body 5220 is moved left and right. Can be slid.

<Operations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000>
Below, an example of the production | presentation aspect (operation | movement aspect) by the 1st accessory apparatus 4000 and the 2nd accessory apparatus 5000 is demonstrated using FIG. 1 and FIGS. In FIG. 1 and FIGS. 67 to 74, members necessary for explaining the operations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are appropriately simplified. Further, in order to easily distinguish each surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 of the first accessory device 4000, different alphabets are described on each surface. Specifically, “A”, “B”, and “C” are shown on the first surface 4211, the second surface 4212, and the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210, respectively. In addition, “a”, “b”, and “c” are shown on the first surface 4411, the second surface 4412, and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410, respectively.

  The first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 configured as described above are included in the above-described movable effect device 270 (see FIG. 22), and are included in the effect device control circuit 338 of the sub control board 33. It is connected. The operations of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 as described below are controlled by the sub control board 33 (the effect device control circuit 338).

  The first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly switched to the initial state, the first state, the second state, or the third state by the sub-control board 33. The order of switching the states is not limited, and switching from any one state to any other state is possible. Hereinafter, each state will be described.

  First, the initial state will be described. FIG. 1 shows an initial state of the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000. In the initial state, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid to the lowest position (the lowest position in the range in which the lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300 can be moved up and down by the first surface 4211 facing forward). ing. In this state, almost the entire lower rotating decorative body 4210 is positioned below the lower end of the opening 1h (behind the stage 1001). The player can visually recognize the decoration applied to the first surface 4211 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 through the transparent game board main body (panel main body) in which the opening 1h is formed.

  Further, in the initial state, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 slides to the uppermost position (uppermost in the range in which the upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500 can be moved up and down) with the first surface 4411 facing forward. Has been. In this state, almost the entire upper rotating decorative body 4410 is located at the upper end of the opening 1h (behind the decorative member 1g), and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is difficult to see from the front. .

  In the initial state, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are each slid to the outermost (left and right outer sides). In this state, the outer portions of the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are located outside the opening 1h, and the inner portions of the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 are The state is visible from the front.

  Next, the first state (see FIG. 67) will be described. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is slid and stopped from the initial state downward to a position that is lowered by a predetermined distance (the extent that substantially the entire upper rotating decorative body 4410 is located inside the opening 1h). Thus, the first state is switched.

  In the first state, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is located immediately below the decorative member 1g with the first surface 4411 facing forward. In this state, the player can visually recognize the decoration applied to the first surface 4411 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 through the opening 1h.

  In the first state, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid downward most with the first surface 4211 facing forward, as in the initial state.

  In such a first state, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 and the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are separated from each other. In the first state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 can draw the player's attention mainly on the decoration applied to the first surface 4411 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410.

  Next, the second state (see FIG. 70) will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is slid and stopped in the upper and lower middle part (the upper and lower middle part in the range in which the upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500 can be moved up and down). The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated in a state where sliding up and down is stopped, and the second surface 4412 is directed forward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is further slid downward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid and stopped at the middle part in the vertical direction (the middle part in the vertical direction within the range in which the lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300 can be lifted up and down). The lower turning decorative body 4210 is turned in a state where sliding up and down is stopped, and the second surface 4212 is directed forward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is further slid upward.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 69, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are slid until they are close to each other in the vicinity of the approximate center of the opening 1h. At this time, the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 face each other vertically.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 70, after the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 ). As a result, members provided on the left and right of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 (members for driving the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like, for example, the left case 4221 and the right case 4225). The left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 can be hidden.

  In such a second state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410. The player's attention can be drawn to the decorated decoration. As described above, the decorations applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are related (for example, the second surface 4212 and the second surface). The English words given to 4412 are combined to make one meaning).

  Note that when the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other when switching to the second state, the engagement formed on the fourth surface 4414 is performed. The convex portion 4414b is fitted into the engaging concave portion 4214b formed on the fourth surface 4214 (see FIG. 71). When the engaging convex portion 4414b is fitted into the engaging concave portion 4214b, the relative position (particularly, the relative position in the front-rear direction) of the engaging convex portion 4414b and the engaging concave portion 4214b is adjusted by the inclined surface 4414d and the inclined surface 4214d. Is done. Accordingly, the front end of the engaging convex portion 4414b is fitted so as to be positioned at the substantially front and rear center of the engaging concave portion 4214b. In this way, by engaging the engaging convex portion 4414b with the engaging concave portion 4214b, the relative positions of the engaging convex portion 4414b and the engaging concave portion 4214b, and thus the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be adjusted. The relative position can be adjusted. In the present embodiment, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper part are arranged so that the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are flush (parallel). The relative position of the rotating decorative body 4410 is adjusted. The width direction dimension of the base end portion of the engaging convex portion 4414b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the opening portion of the engaging concave portion 4214b. Even if it exists in a position, it is the magnitude | size inserted in the engagement recessed part 4214b.

  In this way, by adjusting the relative positions of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410, the beauty of the decoration formed on the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is improved. Can do. For example, as described above, the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is related (for example, the second surface 4212 and the first When the English words given to the two surfaces 4412 are combined to make one meaning), the relevance of both decorations can be further enhanced.

  Next, the third state (see FIG. 74) will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, the upper turning decorative body 4410 is slid and stopped in the middle of the upper and lower sides. The upper rotating decorative body 4410 is rotated in a state where sliding up and down is stopped, and the third surface 4413 is directed forward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73, the upper rotating decorative body 4410 is further slid downward (lowermost).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 72, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid and stopped in the middle part of the upper and lower sides. The lower rotating decorative body 4210 is rotated in a state where sliding up and down is stopped, and the third surface 4213 is directed forward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is slid further upward (uppermost).

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 73, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are brought close to each other in the vicinity of the approximate center of the opening 1h. At this time, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 face each other vertically.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 74, after the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other, the left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 ). As a result, members provided on the left and right of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 (members for driving the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like, for example, the left case 4221 and the right case 4225). The left movable decorative body 5120 and the right movable decorative body 5220 can be hidden.

  In such a third state, the first accessory device 4000 and the second accessory device 5000 are mainly applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating ornament 4210 and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating ornament 4410. The player's attention can be drawn to the decorated decoration. As described above, the decorations applied to the third surface 4213 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the third surface 4413 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are related (for example, the third surface 4213 and the third surface). The decorations applied to 4413 are combined to form an integral shape). Moreover, the area of the surface (the third surface 4213 and the third surface 4413) directed forward in the third state is the area of the surface (the second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412) directed forward in the second state. Smaller than.

  When the second state 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other when switching to the third state, they are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212. The protruding portion 4212a and the protruding portions 4412a formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412 are in contact with each other. Thus, since the protrusion part 4212a and the protrusion part 4412a contact | abut, the 2nd surface 4212 (more specifically, the decoration etc. which were given to the said 2nd surface 4212) and the 2nd surface 4412 (more specifically,) , Decorations applied to the second surface 4412, etc.) do not come into contact. As described above, the protrusions 4212a and 4412a can prevent the decorations from contacting each other and can prevent the decorations from being damaged.

  Note that the switching between the initial state, the first state, the second state, and the third state described above is controlled by the sub control board 33 (the rendering device control circuit 338) as described above, and is in any one state. To any other state. The effect pattern by switching the state in this way is determined based on the result of the big hit lottery and a predetermined effect lottery table.

  Further, when switching between the states as described above, the vertical positions of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are detected by appropriate sensors as described above, and based on the detection values of the sensors. The vertical position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like is adjusted. For example, the vertical position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like in each state is detected by a sensor, or the vertical position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like in at least one of the states is detected by a sensor, and the position Can be switched to another state (adjustment of the vertical movement amount) with reference to.

  In the above description, the effects of movement of the lower rotating decorative body 4210, the upper rotating decorative body 4410, the left movable decorative body 5120, and the right movable decorative body 5220 have been described. In addition to the movement of the body 4210 and the like (switching between the above states), the display of the display device (liquid crystal display device 4) provided behind the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like is appropriately controlled, and the display device It is also possible to produce a combination of images. In particular, in the embodiment (third state) shown in FIG. 74, the protruding portion 4212a formed on the second surface 4212 and the protruding portion 4412a formed on the second surface 4412 abut each other. Compared to the (second state), between the upper and lower decorative bodies (the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410) (particularly, at locations other than the contact portion between the protruding portion 4212a and the protruding portion 4412a). A gap (gap) is generated. For this reason, it is desirable to perform an effect (video effect) of displaying an image that complements the gap on the display device (liquid crystal display device 4) behind the gap. As the image, it is desirable to use an image having relevance and a sense of unity with the decoration applied to the front surface (player side surface) of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410. Also, as shown in FIG. 70 (second state) and FIG. 74 (third state), the upper and lower decorative bodies (lower rotating decorative body 4210 and upper rotating decorative body 4410) are close to each other to complete one decoration. In this state, it is desirable to execute a video effect corresponding to the completed decoration on the display device (liquid crystal display device 4) that is visible from above and below the decoration.

  As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said structure, A various change is possible within the range of the invention described in the claim.

  For example, a pachinko gaming machine is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot gaming machine, for example.

  In the present embodiment, a mechanism for rotating the lower rotating decorative body 4210 (lower rotating drive mechanism 4220) and a mechanism for moving up and down (lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300) are provided independently. Thus, the rotation and elevation of the lower rotation decorative body 4210 can be controlled independently. Accordingly, for example, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be rotated while being raised or lowered, or can be rotated while the raising and lowering is stopped, thereby enabling fine control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to control by using one mechanism that interlocks the rotation and elevation of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 with each other. For example, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be rotated and moved up and down using power from one drive source (motor or the like). The same applies to the upper rotating decorative body 4410 as well as the lower rotating decorative body 4210.

  In the present embodiment, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is moved up and down by the lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300. However, the present invention does not limit the moving direction of the lower rotating decorative body 4210. Absent. For example, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 can be moved left and right. In this case, the upper turning decorative body 4410 can also be moved to the left and right in the same manner, and the lower turning decorative body 4210 and the upper turning decorative body 4410 can be configured to be close to or away from the left and right. . Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the like are moved in a plurality of directions in stages (two or more stages), such as moving the lower rotating decorative body 4210 up and down or left and right and then moving left and right or up and down. You may make it. Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 or the like may be moved in an oblique direction by combining the vertical movement and the horizontal movement.

  In the present embodiment, the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 are configured to have a larger area than the third surface 4213 and the fourth surface 4214. Thereby, it is possible to change the effect of rotating the lower rotating decorative body 4210. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the size relationship of each surface of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is not limited. For example, the magnitude relationship between the first surface 4211 and the second surface 4212 and the third surface 4213 and the fourth surface 4214 may be reversed, or all the surfaces may have the same area. is there. Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 may be formed in a cube shape in which all surfaces including the left side surface 4215 and the right side surface 4216 have the same size (same shape). Further, the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is not a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but may be various polyhedrons such as a triangular prism shape and a pentagonal prism shape, and may be a more complicated shape.

  In the present embodiment, when the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other in the third state, they are formed at the four corners of the second surface 4212. The protruding portion 4212a formed and the protruding portions 4412a formed at the four corners of the second surface 4412 are in contact with each other. Thereby, the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412 can be protected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to form a similar protrusion on the other surface to protect the decoration. For example, since the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are close to each other even in the second state, a protrusion is formed on the fourth surface 4214 and the fourth surface 4414 facing each other in the second state, You may comprise so that a decoration may be made to contact | abut mutually.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second state, when the fourth surface 4214 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the fourth surface 4414 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 come close to each other, the fourth surface 4414 is formed. The engaging convex portion 4414b is inserted into the engaging concave portion 4214b formed on the fourth surface 4214. Thereby, the relative position of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 can be adjusted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar engaging convex portions and engaging concave portions are formed on the other surfaces, and the relative positions of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are adjusted. It is also possible to configure as described above. For example, since the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are close to each other even in the third state, the engaging convex portion is formed on the second surface 4212 and the second surface 4412 facing each other in the third state. An engaging recess may be formed.

  In the present embodiment, in the third state, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an image that complements the gap formed between the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device 4 is used between the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 in other states (for example, the second state). It is good also as a structure which displays the image | video which complements the gap | interval made.

  Further, in this embodiment, the engaging concave portion 4214b is formed in the lower rotating decorative body 4210, and the engaging convex portion 4414b is formed in the upper rotating decorative body 4410. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the engaging convex portion 4414b can be formed on the lower rotating decorative body 4210, and the engaging concave portion 4214b can be formed on the upper rotating decorative body 4410.

  In the present embodiment, the relative positions of the inclined surface 4214d of the engaging concave portion 4214b and the inclined surface 4414d of the engaging convex portion 4414b are adjusted, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, even if an inclined surface is formed only in one of the engagement recess 4214b and the engagement protrusion 4414b, the relative position between the engagement recess 4214b and the engagement protrusion 4414b can be adjusted.

  Based on the above embodiment, the outline | summary of this invention is enumerated below.

<Appendix 1>
The gaming machine of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is also possible to perform a performance by moving a plurality of performance members.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the case of performing an effect by moving a plurality of effect members as described above, it has been difficult to devise a motion of the effect member that improves the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A cuboid-shaped first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first effect member that can rotate the first effect member so that one of the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A first movable accessory device (a lower movable effect accessory 4200 and a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300);
A second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that one of the faces of the second effect member (upper rotation decorative body 4410) having the rectangular parallelepiped shape and the second effect member faces forward. A two-rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420), and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A second movable accessory device (upper movable production accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500);
By controlling operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device are at least a first state and a second state. Or a control unit (sub-control board 33) that can be switched to the third state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first state is:
The first largest surface (first surface 4211) having the largest area among the surfaces of the first rendering member is directed forward, and the second largest surface (first surface) having the largest area among the surfaces of the second rendering member. The surface 4411) is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in a separated state,
The second state is:
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first maximum surface among the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second maximum surface of the surfaces of the second effect member is The second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other,
The third state is:
The first small surface (third surface 4213) having an area smaller than the first maximum surface among the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and the second maximum surface among the surfaces of the second effect member. Further, the second facet (third face 4413) having a small area is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Appendix 1-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 1-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is also possible to perform a performance by moving a plurality of performance members.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the case of performing an effect by moving a plurality of effect members as described above, it has been difficult to devise a motion of the effect member that improves the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that one of the faces of the first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and the first effect member is directed forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A first movable accessory device (a lower movable effect accessory 4200 and a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300);
A second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that one of the faces of the second effect member (upper rotation decorative body 4410) and the second effect member is directed forward. A two-rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420), and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A second movable accessory device (upper movable production accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500);
By controlling operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device are at least a first state and a second state. Or a control unit capable of switching to the third state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first state is:
A first reference surface (first surface 4211) that is one of the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and a second reference surface (first surface) that is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. The surface 4411) is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in a separated state,
The second state is:
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second reference surface of the second effect member faces. The second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other,
The third state is:
The first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first reference surface and the first facing surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second of the surfaces of the second effect member. The second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the reference surface and the second facing surface is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other. Is.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Appendix 1-3>
The gaming machines of appendix 1-3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is also possible to perform a performance by moving a plurality of performance members.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the case of performing an effect by moving a plurality of effect members as described above, it has been difficult to devise a motion of the effect member that improves the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that one of the faces of the first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and the first effect member is directed forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and the first effect member can be moved up and down and / or left and right, and can be controlled independently of the first rotation drive unit. A first movable accessory device (a lower movable effect accessory 4200 and a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) including a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300);
A second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that one of the faces of the second effect member (upper rotation decorative body 4410) and the second effect member is directed forward. The two-rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) and the second effect member can be moved in the vertical and / or left-right direction and can be controlled independently of the second rotation drive unit. A second movable accessory device (upper movable effect accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) including a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500);
By controlling operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device are at least a first state and a second state. Or a control unit (sub-control board 33) that can be switched to the third state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first state is:
A first reference surface (first surface 4211) that is one of the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and a second reference surface (first surface) that is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. The surface 4411) is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in a separated state,
The second state is:
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second reference surface of the second effect member faces. The second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other,
The third state is:
The first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first reference surface and the first facing surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second of the surfaces of the second effect member. The second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the reference surface and the second facing surface is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other. Is.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the rotation of the first effect member and the second effect member and the movement in the vertical and / or left-right direction can be performed independently, and fine control of the first effect member and the second effect member is possible. Is possible.

<Appendix 1-4>
The gaming machines of appendix 1-4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In some such gaming machines, there is generally a light emitting unit (for example, LED) provided in the production member in order to cause the production member to emit light. However, for example, in the case where the effect member can be rotated, if an attempt is made to make both the mechanism for rotating and the mechanism for light emission (installation of the light emitting unit) compatible, a large space is required to arrange the mechanism. There was room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a mechanism for rotation and light emission of the effect member can be configured in a compact manner.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A polyhedral-shaped effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that emits light to the inner surface of the effect member, and a support that supports the effect member (Left case 4221 and right case 4225) and a rotation drive unit capable of rotating the effect member relative to the support so that one of the surfaces of the effect member faces forward. A movable accessory device (lower movable effect accessory 4200) having (a motor 4222, an output gear 4223, a driven gear 4224, etc.);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory device;
A gaming machine comprising:
The rotation drive unit is
A rotating body (driven gear 4224) that is rotatably supported by the support body, can be rotated by power from a drive source, and can rotate integrally with the effect member by engaging with the effect member. Comprising
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) that is disposed so as to penetrate the rotation center of the rotation body and is fixed to the support body and extends to the inside of the effect member;
A light emitting part (light emitting substrate 4226e) supported by the support part and capable of emitting light inside the effect member;
It comprises.

The rotating body is
A body portion (body portion 4224a) formed in a spur gear shape;
A protrusion (protrusion 4224c) that is formed so as to protrude from one side surface of the main body and engageable with the effect member;
It comprises.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, the mechanism for turning and emitting the effect member can be configured in a compact manner.

<Appendix 1-5>
The gaming machines of appendix 1-5 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. .

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when one decoration is formed by a plurality of effect members, there is room for improvement in that the appearance of the decoration may be impaired if the relative positions of the effect members are shifted.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of effect members.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that one of the faces of the first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and the first effect member is directed forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A first movable accessory device (a lower movable effect accessory 4200 and a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300);
A second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that one of the faces of the second effect member (upper rotation decorative body 4410) and the second effect member is directed forward. A two-rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420), and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A second movable accessory device (upper movable production accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500);
By controlling the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device are changed to the first state, the second state, or A control unit (sub control board 33) for switching to the third state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first state is:
A first reference surface (first surface 4211) that is one of the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and a second reference surface (first surface) that is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. The surface 4411) is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in a separated state,
The second state is:
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second reference surface of the second effect member faces. The second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other,
The third state is:
The first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first reference surface and the first facing surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second of the surfaces of the second effect member. The second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the reference surface and the second facing surface is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other. ,
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
A concave portion (engaging concave portion 4214b) having a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) extending toward the opening side;
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
It has a second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) corresponding to the first inclined surface of the concave portion and narrowing toward the tip side, and is fitted into the concave portion in the second state and / or the third state. Convex portions (engagement convex portions 4414b).

Also, in the recess,
A through hole (through hole 4214e) that communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the concave portion is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first effect member and the second effect member from being displaced and to improve the beauty of the decoration formed by the plurality of effect members (the first effect member and the second effect member).

  Moreover, the heat | fever inside the 1st effect member or the 2nd effect member in which the recessed part was formed can be thermally radiated from a through-hole. Furthermore, by forming the through hole in the concave portion, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the first effect member or the second effect member can be prevented from being impaired.

<Appendix 1-6>
The gaming machines of appendix 1-6 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to make a plurality of effect members close to each other so as to contact each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. is there.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when a plurality of effect members are brought into contact with each other, there is room for improvement in that the decoration formed on the surfaces facing each other may be damaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the decorations formed on the opposing surfaces from being damaged when a plurality of effect members are brought close to each other. And

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member capable of rotating the first effect member so that one of the faces of the first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and the first effect member is directed forward. One rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A first movable accessory device (a lower movable effect accessory 4200 and a lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300);
A second effect member capable of rotating the second effect member so that one of the faces of the second effect member (upper rotation decorative body 4410) and the second effect member is directed forward. A two-rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420), and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second effect member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. A second movable accessory device (upper movable production accessory 4400 and upper accessory elevating mechanism 4500);
By controlling the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, the states of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device are changed to the first state, the second state, or A control unit (sub control board 33) for switching to the third state;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first state is:
A first reference surface (first surface 4211) that is one of the surfaces of the first effect member is directed forward, and a second reference surface (first surface) that is one of the surfaces of the second effect member. The surface 4411) is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned in a separated state,
The second state is:
The first facing surface (second surface 4212) located on the opposite side of the first reference surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second reference surface of the second effect member faces. The second facing surface (second surface 4412) located on the opposite side is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other,
The third state is:
The first adjacent surface (third surface 4213) adjacent to the first reference surface and the first facing surface among the surfaces of the first effect member faces forward, and the second of the surfaces of the second effect member. The second adjacent surface (third surface 4413) adjacent to the reference surface and the second facing surface is directed forward, and the first effect member and the second effect member are positioned close to each other. ,
The first effect member and the second effect member are
A decoration formed on opposing surfaces facing each other in the second state and / or the third state;
Projections (projections 4212a and 4412a) formed so as to project from the decoration formed on the facing surface;
Comprising
In the second state and / or the third state,
The protrusions formed on the first effect member and the second effect member are in contact with each other.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A display device (liquid crystal display device 4) disposed behind the first effect member and the second effect member;
The display device
In the second state and / or the third state, the display device has a gap formed between the first effect member and the second effect member at a location other than the contact location between the protrusions. This is to display a complementary video.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the decoration formed on the facing surface from being damaged when the plurality of effect members are brought close to each other.

  Further, by complementing the gap formed between the first effect member and the second effect member, it is possible to improve the beauty of the decoration and improve the interest of the game.

<Appendix 1-7>
The gaming machines of appendix 1-7 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In some such gaming machines, there is generally a light emitting unit (for example, LED) provided in the production member in order to cause the production member to emit light. However, for example, in the case where the effect member can be rotated, if an attempt is made to make both the mechanism for rotating and the mechanism for light emission (installation of the light emitting unit) compatible, a large space is required to arrange the mechanism. There was room for improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a mechanism for rotation and light emission of the effect member can be configured in a compact manner.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A polyhedral-shaped effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210), a light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that emits light to the inner surface of the effect member, and a support that supports the effect member (Left case 4221 and right case 4225) and a rotation drive unit capable of rotating the effect member relative to the support so that one of the surfaces of the effect member faces forward. A movable accessory device (lower movable effect accessory 4200) having (a motor 4222, an output gear 4223, a driven gear 4224, etc.);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) for controlling the operation of the movable accessory device;
A gaming machine comprising:
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) fixed to the support body and extending to the inside of the effect member;
A light emitting part (light emitting substrate 4226e) disposed inside the effect member and capable of emitting light;
A fixing part (a front semi-cylindrical part 4226c and a rear semi-cylindrical part 4226d) for fixing the light emitting part to the support part;
Comprising
The fixing part is
While having the curved surface which forms the rotating shaft which supports the said production | presentation member so that rotation is possible, the said light emission part is hold | maintained by clamping the said light emission part from front and back.

In addition, the rotation drive unit is
A rotating body (driven gear 4224) that is rotatably supported by the support body, can be rotated by power from a drive source, and can rotate integrally with the effect member by engaging with the effect member. Comprising
The support part is
It arrange | positions so that the rotation center of the said rotation body may be penetrated.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, the mechanism for turning and emitting the effect member can be configured in a compact manner.

<Appendix 2>
The gaming machines of Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. .

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when one decoration is formed by a plurality of effect members, there is room for improvement in that the appearance of the decoration may be impaired if the relative positions of the effect members are shifted.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of effect members.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. One movable accessory device (lower movable directing actor 4200 and lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300);
A second stage member (upper turning decorative body 4410) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second stage member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. Two movable accessory devices (upper movable production role 4400 and upper role lifting mechanism 4500);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that controls the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device to bring the first effect member and the second effect member closer to or away from each other;
A gaming machine comprising:
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
A concave portion (engaging concave portion 4214b) having a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) extending toward the opening side;
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
A second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) that corresponds to the first inclined surface of the concave portion and narrows toward the distal end side, and the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other. A convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) fitted into the concave portion is provided.

Also, in the recess,
A through hole that communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the concave portion is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first effect member and the second effect member from being displaced and to improve the beauty of the decoration formed by the plurality of effect members (the first effect member and the second effect member).

  Moreover, the heat | fever inside the 1st effect member or the 2nd effect member in which the recessed part was formed can be thermally radiated from a through-hole. Furthermore, by forming the through hole in the concave portion, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the first effect member or the second effect member can be prevented from being impaired.

<Appendix 2-2>
The gaming machine of appendix 2-2 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to control a plurality of effect members so as to be close to each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. .

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when one decoration is formed by a plurality of effect members, there is room for improvement in that the appearance of the decoration may be impaired if the relative positions of the effect members are shifted.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the appearance of a decoration formed by a plurality of effect members.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. One movable accessory device (lower movable directing actor 4200 and lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300);
A second stage member (upper turning decorative body 4410) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second stage member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. Two movable accessory devices (upper movable production role 4400 and upper role lifting mechanism 4500);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that controls the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device to bring the first effect member and the second effect member closer to or away from each other;
A gaming machine comprising:
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
A recess (engagement recess 4214b);
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
When the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other, a convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion is provided.
Either one of the concave portion and the convex portion is
An inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d or inclined surface 4414d) for guiding the convex portion and the concave portion to a predetermined relative position when the convex portion is fitted into the concave portion is provided.

Also, in the recess,
A through hole (through hole 4214e) that communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the concave portion is formed is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the first effect member and the second effect member from being displaced and to improve the beauty of the decoration formed by the plurality of effect members (the first effect member and the second effect member).

  Moreover, the heat | fever inside the 1st effect member or the 2nd effect member in which the recessed part was formed can be thermally radiated from a through-hole. Furthermore, by forming the through hole in the concave portion, the through hole can be made inconspicuous, and the appearance of the first effect member or the second effect member can be prevented from being impaired.

<Appendix 2-3>
The gaming machines of appendix 2-3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
In some such gaming machines, there is generally a light emitting unit (for example, LED) provided in the production member in order to cause the production member to emit light. When such a light emitting unit is provided, heat is generated by the light emitting unit, and thus it is necessary to release (heat radiate) the heat to the outside of the effect member. However, when a through hole for heat dissipation is formed in the effect member, there is room for improvement in that the appearance of the effect member may be impaired.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said problem, and it aims at providing the gaming machine which can ensure the heat dissipation of the said production member, without impairing the beauty | look of a production member.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. One movable accessory device (lower movable directing actor 4200 and lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300);
A second stage member (upper turning decorative body 4410) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second stage member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. Two movable accessory devices (upper movable production role 4400 and upper role lifting mechanism 4500);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that controls the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device to bring the first effect member and the second effect member closer to or away from each other;
A gaming machine comprising:
Either the first effect member or the second effect member is
A concave portion (engagement concave portion 4214b) formed on a surface facing when the first performance member and the second performance member are close to each other;
A through hole (through hole 4214e) that is formed in the recess and communicates the inside and the outside of the first effect member or the second effect member in which the recess is formed;
It comprises.

Moreover, either one of said 1st production member or said 2nd production member is
When the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other, a convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion is provided.
At least one of the concave portion and the convex portion is
An inclined surface (an inclined surface 4214d and an inclined surface 4414d) for guiding the convex portion and the concave portion to have a predetermined relative position when the convex portion is fitted into the concave portion;
At least one effect member of the first effect member or the second effect member is formed in a polyhedral shape,
A light emitting mechanism (rotating shaft portion 4226) that causes the at least one effect member to emit light by irradiating light on the inner surface of the at least one effect member;
A support body (the left case 4221 and the right case 4225) that supports the at least one effect member;
A rotation drive unit (motor 4222, output) capable of rotating at least one effect member relative to the support so that any one surface of the at least one effect member faces forward. Gear 4223, driven gear 4224, etc.)
Further comprising
The light emitting mechanism is
A support portion (fixed shaft 4226a) fixed to the support body and extending to the inside of the effect member;
A light emitting part (light emitting substrate 4226e) disposed inside the effect member and capable of emitting light;
A fixing part (a front semi-cylindrical part 4226c and a rear semi-cylindrical part 4226d) for fixing the light emitting part to the support part;
Comprising
The fixing part is
While having the curved surface which forms the rotating shaft which supports the said production | presentation member so that rotation is possible, the said light emission part is hold | maintained by clamping the said light emission part from front and back.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, the heat dissipation of the effect member can be ensured without impairing the beauty of the effect member (first effect member or second effect member). That is, by forming a through hole in the recess, the through hole can be made inconspicuous. In addition, when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other (for example, close enough to contact each other), the heat in the first effect member or the second effect member Since heat can be released into the space in the recess, heat dissipation can be ensured.

  Moreover, the position shift of a 1st effect member and a 2nd effect member can be prevented, and the beauty | look of the decoration formed by several effect members (a 1st effect member and a 2nd effect member) can be improved. Furthermore, the mechanism for turning and emitting the effect member can be configured in a compact manner.

<Appendix 2-4>
The gaming machines of appendix 2-4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  Some gaming machines of this type include a movable accessory device that produces an effect by moving an effect member. For example, a patent document (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-92885) discloses a gaming machine including a movable accessory device that moves an effect member according to a lottery result of a jackpot lottery means.

  Furthermore, by combining a plurality of such movable accessory devices, it is possible to make a plurality of effect members close to each other so as to contact each other, and to form one decoration (characters, characters, etc.) with the plurality of effect members. is there.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, when a plurality of effect members are brought into contact with each other, there is room for improvement in that the decoration formed on the surfaces facing each other may be damaged.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the decorations formed on the opposing surfaces from being damaged when a plurality of effect members are brought close to each other. And

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is
A first effect member (lower rotating decorative body 4210) and a first movement drive unit (lower accessory elevating mechanism 4300) capable of moving the first effect member up and down and / or left and right are provided. One movable accessory device (lower movable directing actor 4200 and lower accessory lifting mechanism 4300);
A second stage member (upper turning decorative body 4410) and a second movement drive unit (upper accessory lifting mechanism 4500) capable of moving the second stage member in the vertical and / or horizontal direction are provided. Two movable accessory devices (upper movable production role 4400 and upper role lifting mechanism 4500);
A control unit (sub-control board 33) that controls the operations of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device to bring the first effect member and the second effect member closer to or away from each other;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first effect member and the second effect member are
Decorations formed on opposing surfaces facing each other when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other;
Projections (projections 4212a and 4412a) formed so as to project from the decoration formed on the facing surface;
Comprising
When the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other,
The protrusions formed on the first effect member and the second effect member are in contact with each other.

In addition, the first effect member and the second effect member are
Formed in a polyhedral shape,
The first movable accessory device is:
A first rotation drive unit (lower rotation drive mechanism 4220) capable of rotating the first effect member;
The second movable accessory device is:
A second rotation drive unit (upper rotation drive mechanism 4420) capable of rotating the second effect member;
The controller is
By controlling the operation of the first movable accessory device and the second movable accessory device, either one of the surfaces of the first effect member and one of the surfaces of the second effect member One surface can be placed close to each other,
The decoration and the protrusion are
Formed on the first facing surface (second surface 4212 and second surface 4412) of the first effect member and the second effect member,
On the second facing surface (fourth surface 4214 and fourth surface 4414) different from the first facing surface among the surfaces of the first rendering member and the second rendering member,
A recess (engagement recess 4214b) that is provided on either the first effect member or the second effect member and has a first inclined surface (inclined surface 4214d) that extends toward the opening side;
A second inclined surface (inclined surface 4414d) that is provided on either the first effect member or the second effect member and corresponds to the first inclined surface of the recess and narrows toward the tip side. And a convex portion (engagement convex portion 4414b) that fits into the concave portion when the first effect member and the second effect member are close to each other,
Is formed.

[Effect of the invention]
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the decoration formed on the facing surface from being damaged when the plurality of effect members are brought close to each other.

  Moreover, the position shift of a 1st effect member and a 2nd effect member can be prevented, and the beauty | look of the decoration formed by several effect members (a 1st effect member and a 2nd effect member) can be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions where the description in the first embodiment applies also in the second embodiment will be omitted.

[Function flow]
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, the pachinko game is a game in which game ball payout control processing is performed when a game ball is fired by a user's operation and the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

  When it is a “hit” in a special symbol game or a “hit” in a normal symbol game, the probability that a game ball will win is relatively increased, and the game ball payout control process is more likely to be performed. Become.

  In addition, for various winnings, there is a special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable symbol display in the special symbol game, and a single condition for the variable symbol normal symbol display in the normal symbol game. Some regular symbol starting prizes are also included.

  In this specification, “variable display” is a concept that can be displayed in a variable manner. For example, “variable display” that is actually changed and “stop display” that is actually stopped and displayed. Is possible.

  Further, in the “variable display”, for example, “derivation display” in which a special symbol (identification information) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game can be performed. In other words, in this specification, the operation from the start of “variable display” to “derivative display” is referred to as one “variable display”.

  Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described.

  (1) When there is a special symbol start winning in the special symbol game, random numbers (a jackpot determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 75).

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by a special symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is established with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when the variable symbol special display is started, the jackpot determination random number extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot determination is made. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by referring to the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the counter for symbol determination and the result of the jackpot determination described above.

  Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determining counter, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol for the stop display described above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. An effect pattern to be executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

  Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special display to be stopped, the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect pattern associated with the special symbol variable display are referred to, and the variable display control processing for controlling the special symbol variable display And the effect control process which performs a predetermined effect is performed.

  Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is reached. In this determination process, if it is determined that a “hit” is reached, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the jackpot game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “big hit” has not been reached, the big hit game control process is not executed.

  When it is determined that the game is not “big hit”, or when the big hit game control process is completed, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state in a normal time different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As a normal gaming state, for example, in the jackpot determination described above, a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as a “big hit” (hereinafter referred to as “probability changing gaming state”) or a special symbol start winning is likely to be obtained. A gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a “short-time gaming state”). Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start variable symbol special display is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of special symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a game ball wins a start during a special symbol change display, various data acquired at the time of the start win (a jackpot determination random value, a symbol determination random number, etc. ) Is put on hold.

  In other words, if a game ball wins a start during a special symbol variation display, the special symbol variable display (variation display) corresponding to the start winning is suspended, and after the currently executed special symbol variation display ends. The variable display of the special symbol that is put on hold is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol that is on hold is also referred to as “holding ball”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol start prize. You can get a hold ball. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, although not shown in FIG. 75, determines whether or not the holding ball is won (whether or not “big hit” is won) based on the above-described information on the holding ball, and further, A function for performing a predetermined effect based on that, that is, a pre-reading effect function is provided.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random number value is stored (the normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 75) (See processing flow).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 75, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable symbol variable display is satisfied, with one condition that the random number value is stored. judge.

  Next, when starting normal symbol variable display, the random number value extracted from the counter for hit determination is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not “win” is set. Thereafter, variation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, referring to the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of the normal symbol and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not “winning” is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that “winning” is achieved, a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

  In the winning game control process, the possibility of various winnings as described above, in particular, the possibility of special symbol start winning of a game ball in a special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be “winning”, the winning game control process is not executed. Thereafter, the process for determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

  As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball depends on the conditions such as whether or not the game is a “hit” in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the game is “hit” in the normal symbol game The ease of processing changes.

  In this embodiment, as a random number extraction method, a soft random number method for generating random values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number value is determined from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the random number may be adopted as the above-described method for extracting various random values.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in a predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Send messages to various control circuits]
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a procedure for transmitting effect designation information (message) from the sub CPU 330 serving as the host control circuit to the various control circuits 335 to 338.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information for designating the effect operation to the control circuits 335 to 338 in accordance with a communication format called a message. The message is also called a command, and is composed of, for example, 8 bytes. In the message, “device” (1 byte), “system” (1 byte), “reserved area” (2 bytes), “category” (2 bytes), “event” (2 bytes) An area for storing such control information is provided.

  The “device” stores control information for designating a device (control circuit) as a message transmission destination. The “system” stores control information for executing special operations such as system operation and debug processing of the entire sub control circuit 33 (sub control board 33 shown in FIG. 22). The “reserve area” is reserved for reserve. “Category” stores control information for separating the production units. Control information for setting an operation pattern of a notice effect is mainly stored in the “event”. The spare area can be set to store various information according to the design of the gaming machine.

  The message is transmitted from the sub CPU 330 to a specified device (control circuit) via the directory buffer at a predetermined timing in accordance with the contents of the directory table described below. The control circuits 335 to 338 that have received the message control operations related to the presentation based on the message. In the present embodiment, the display operation by the liquid crystal display device 4 and the other operations by the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, the lamp / LED 260, and the movable effect device 270 are synchronized. Each of the control circuits 336 to 338 receives the message and temporarily stores it, so that the control circuit 336 to 338 is executed after a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, for example, one cycle corresponding to 1 frame (1/30 s)) from the display operation. . The direct buffer is an area for temporarily storing a message until it is transmitted. For example, the direct buffer is secured in a predetermined area of the work RAM 332. In the present embodiment, the acoustic control circuit 336 and the light emission control circuit 337 are separately provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the acoustic control circuit 336 and the light emission control circuit 337 may be configured as a single control circuit. Other operations are executed with a delay of one cycle corresponding to one frame. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is several frames or several cycles according to the messages stacked in the control circuits 336 to 338. It may be delayed. Alternatively, the sub CPU 330 serving as a host control circuit may control the transmission timing to each of the control circuits 336 to 338 and each control circuit 336 to 338 may execute each control immediately after reception. In any case, the execution cycle may be delayed or may not be delayed.

  The direct table is a table that defines information for generating an action related to the production at a predetermined timing. Here, “generating an action related to the effect” is synonymous with transmitting a message. There are three types of direct tables: a master table, a slave table, and a single table.

  A master table is a table in which a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, and is mainly used when a decorative design changes. The slave table is a table that can be registered only when the master table is registered, that is, a table subordinate to the master table, and is mainly used for a notice effect or the like. Multiple slave tables can be registered simultaneously. Further, the same kind of slave table can be registered even in different master tables. When registering the slave table, an ID number is required, and an ID number that becomes a free number may be automatically assigned. When the master table is discarded, all the slave tables registered at that time are discarded. A single table is a table that does not depend on (subordinate to) the master table or slave table, and can be registered or discarded separately from the master table, and is used for effects that occur arbitrarily in various states, such as effects related to holding. The Multiple single tables can be registered simultaneously. An ID number is also required when registering a single table, but the ID number is registered without being automatically assigned to the specified ID number. In this embodiment, when the master table is discarded, all the registered slave tables are discarded at this time, but the slave table is not limited to this. Only the slave table corresponding to the master table may be discarded. In addition, although a plurality of master tables are not registered at the same time, there may be a situation where a plurality of master tables coexist as a result of registering the master tables in order corresponding to the effect to be executed. In such a situation, for example, even if the first master table is discarded, the second master table is not discarded. At this time, if there is a specific slave table that is identical between the slave table subordinate to the first master table and the slave table subordinate to the second master table, the first master table can also be discarded. The specific slave table may not be discarded. Such a specific slave table can be destroyed in response to the destruction of the second master table.

For example, the directory table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of deviation of 13 seconds defines the following contents.
(1) A table (master table) corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of deviation from 13 seconds
1. 1. Call a table group for sending information at the start of fluctuation. 2. If a symbol variation start message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (variation start information transmission table) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted. 4. Set table for notice effect as slave table in specified ID 4.270 frame (9s) weight If a symbol variation stop message is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (variation stop information transmission table) is set as a slave table, and the message is transmitted. 6.90 frame (3 s) weight 7. End of table (destroy the master table)
(2) Fluctuation start information transmission / variation stop information transmission table (slave table)
-If a message for background information is set in the directory buffer, the message is sent.-If a message for numeric symbol information is set in the directory buffer, the message is sent. (3) Notice effect table (slave table) )
1. If a message for mini character notice is set in the direct buffer, the corresponding table (table for mini character notice) is set as a slave table and the message is transmitted 2. Wait for 30 frames (1 s). If the SU notice message is set in the directory buffer, the corresponding table (SU notice table) is set as the slave table and the message is transmitted. 4. Wait for 100 frames (about 3.3 s) 5. If a message for line warning is set in the directory buffer, the corresponding table (table for line warning) is set as a slave table, and a message for line warning is transmitted.

  According to the master table and the slave table of (1) to (3) above, as the fluctuation pattern deviated from 13 seconds is determined, the message for starting symbol fluctuation and the symbol for stopping symbol fluctuation, background information corresponding thereto are determined. Messages for numbers and symbol information, messages for mini character notification, SU notification, and serif notification are stored in the direct buffer, the symbol change start message at the 0th frame, and background information and numbers A message for symbol information and a message for notice of mini characters are sent, a message for notice of SU is sent after 30 frames, a message for notice of dialogue is sent after 100 frames, a message for stopping fluctuation of symbols after 270 frames, and A message for background information and numeric symbol information is transmitted. Thereby, a series of presentation operations are executed according to the transmission (reception) timing of each message. The directory table may directly specify the type and content of the message to be transmitted.

  Next, the data structure and the like of the main control circuit 28 (main control board 28 shown in FIG. 22) will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. The winning random number determination table determines either “big hit” or “losing” by lottery based on the random number value for determining the big hit when the game ball wins at the first starting port or the second starting port. Referenced for.

  The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining a lottery result performed in response to the start opening prize. More specifically, the jackpot determination random number is a value indicating a lottery result of a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first starting port or the second starting port, either “big hit” or “losing” is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the jackpot random number determination table, for each value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), each jackpot in which the winning of “big hit” and “losing” is determined. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for determination and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data" and "losing determination value data") is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the game state is “probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when it is “non-probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “0”.

  In the present embodiment, when winning to the first starting port or the second starting port, the probability variation flag is “0”, and the jackpot determination random number value is any one of “0” to “204”, “Big hit” is won, and “Big hit judgment value data” is determined. In other words, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 205/65536 (≈ 1/319).

  In addition, when winning at the first starting port or the second starting port, if the probability variation flag is “0” and the random number for jackpot determination is not any of “0” to “204”, “lost” Winning is determined, and “losing judgment value data” is determined.

  On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is “1” and the jackpot determination random number is any one of “0” to “818” at the time of winning the first start port or the second start port, Is won, and “big hit judgment value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability (hit probability) of “big hit” in this case is 819/65536 (≈ 1/80), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is “0”.

  In addition, when winning at the first start port or the second start port, if the probability variation flag is “1” and the random number for jackpot determination is not any of “0” to “818”, “lost” Winning is determined, and “losing judgment value data” is determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins at the first start port or the second start port, the big hit probability is determined depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “probability game state”. fluctuate. Specifically, when the gaming state is the “probability changing gaming state”, the big hit probability when the game ball wins the first starting port or the second starting port is about 4 when the gaming state is not the “probability changing gaming state”. About twice as high.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, two start winning ports (first start port and second start port) are provided, and any of the first start ports and the second start port is selected. Even when a game ball is won in the mouth, the winning random number determination table shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 22, it is detected by the first start port switch 311 that the game ball has won the first start port, and the second start port switch 312 that the game ball has won the second start port. Detected by.

  Although not shown, both the first start port and the second start port are disposed below the liquid crystal display device 4 (near the position where the start winning port 1009 shown in FIG. 1 is disposed). The second start port is disposed below the first start port, and a normal electric accessory (blade member) is provided at the second start port. The wing member is a wing-shaped member that opens and closes so as to be tilted forward and backward in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second start port, 2 It is configured to be switchable between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball at the start opening. The blade member is driven to open and close by a blade member solenoid 313 (see FIG. 22).

  In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory is in a closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. Good. Further, the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to operating the blade-shaped member so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip that widens the start port by rotating in the left-right direction of the game board 1. A tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the start port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the area on the right side of the game area 1p (see FIG. 1) by the player (when a so-called right hit is made), the game ball is It is guided to the starting port. In this case, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win the first start opening. As will be described later, when winning at the second starting port, it is easier to receive a “hit” lottery that is advantageous to the player than when winning at the first starting port. Accordingly, in the so-called “short-time gaming state” in which winning at the second starting port is relatively easy, the player can advantageously advance the game by making a right turn.

[Design determination table]
FIG. 78A is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port) stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (second starting port) stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. The symbol determination table (first start port) includes a “symbol command” for determining a stop symbol based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port and the above-described determination value data. Referenced to select. The symbol determination table (second start port) includes a “symbol command” that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random number value acquired when a game ball wins the second start port and the determination value data described above. Referenced to select. The “symbol command” is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. The design random number value is extracted from 0 to 99 (100 types), for example.

  According to the symbol determination table (first start port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “29”, “Z0” is selected. Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “30” to “35”, “z1” is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “36” to “38”, “z2” is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is “39”, “z3” is selected as the symbol command.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “40” to “69”, “z4” is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “70” to “73”, “z5” is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is “74”, “z6” is selected as the symbol command.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “75” to “99”, “z7” is selected as the symbol command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “0” to “99”, “z8” is selected as the symbol command.

  Further, according to the symbol determination table (second start port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “0” to “34”, the symbol “Z9” is selected as the command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “35” to “64”, “z10” is selected as the symbol command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of “65” to “99”, “z11” is selected as the symbol command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any one of “0” to “99”, “z12” is selected as the symbol command.

[Big hit type determination table]
79A and 79B are diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. FIG. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type such as the number of rounds, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned on, and whether or not the hourly flag is turned on according to the symbol command related to the jackpot. The jackpot type determination table includes a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79A) that is referred to when a big win is won in the non-probability variable gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and a big hit type in the non-probable variable gaming state and the short-time gaming state. The jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79A (b)) that is referred to when winning a win, and the jackpot type determination table that is referenced when winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (FIG. 79B (a)) And a jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 79B (b)) that is referred to when the jackpot is won in the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, if the big hit is won regardless of the type of the big hit, the time reduction flag is set to “1”. The short time flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “short time gaming state”. When the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “1”, and when it is “non-time saving gaming state”, the time saving flag is “0”. The number of times reduced is the number of changes in the special symbol game in which the time-saving gaming state can be continued. In other words, if the special symbol change for the number of times is made without winning a big hit in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the timeless gaming state is entered. Specifically, any one of “5 times”, “35 times”, “50 times”, “95 times”, and “next time” is determined as the number of time reductions. “Next time” indicates that the short-time gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

  The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “probability change game state”. When the game state is “probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “1”, and when it is “non-probability change game state”, the probability change flag is “0”. In this embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. However, when a special symbol variation (special symbol lottery) is performed a predetermined number of times without winning a big win, the probability variation gaming state may be terminated and a transition to the non-probability variation gaming state may be made.

  According to the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when the symbol command is “z0”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the jackpot of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z1”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of the probability variation flag ON and the short time flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z2”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of the probability variation flag ON and the short-time flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z3”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of probability variation flag ON and hourly flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z4”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of probability variation flag off and short time flag on is determined. When the symbol command is “z5”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of probability variation flag off and short-time flag on is determined. When the symbol command is “z6”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of probability variation flag off and short time flag on is determined. When the symbol command is “z7”, the number of rounds is “16”, and the big hit of the probability variation flag ON and the hourly flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z9”, the number of rounds is “16”, and the big hit of the probability variation flag ON and the hourly flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z10”, the number of rounds is “4”, and the big hit of the probability variation flag ON and the hourly flag ON is determined. When the symbol command is “z11”, the number of rounds is “16”, and the big hit of probability variation flag off and hourly flag on is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the short hit flag-on big hit is determined regardless of the symbol command (that is, the big hit judgment value data). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the big hit judgment value data. You may make it determine the big hit of time-short flag off.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of time reductions to any one of “5 times”, “35 times”, “50 times”, “95 times”, and “next time”. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it may be controlled so that the short-time gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, or it may be controlled so that the short-time gaming state continues as long as the probability variation gaming state continues. . In addition, the number of time reductions is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B. For example, when winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state (see FIG. 79B (b)), the symbol command is “z4”. ”,“ Z5 ”, and“ z6 ”,“ 50 times ”may be determined as the number of time reductions.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330 is controlled so that the probability variation gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the probability variation is varied up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the gaming state continues (afterwards, it shifts to the non-probability changing gaming state), or until the next big hit is won (for example, up to 10,000 times) in relation to the big win winning probability ) Control may be performed so that the probability variation gaming state continues, or control may be performed so that the high probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Variation pattern table]
FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a first half variation pattern, a second half variation pattern, and a variation pattern table obtained by combining these, stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. These tables are referred to in order to determine the change pattern type and the first half and second half change patterns based on the winning type at the time of winning a prize, the symbol command, and the like. The main CPU 280 transmits a combination of commands corresponding to the first half and second half fluctuation patterns to the sub-control circuit 33 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. In the following description, a combination of the first and second half variation patterns is simply referred to as a “variation pattern”.

  First, the main CPU 280 determines the type of variation pattern (for example, one of nine types of deviation variation patterns and nine types of winning variation patterns) based on the winning classification at the time of winning, a symbol command, and the like, and further responds. A first half variation pattern and a second half variation pattern are determined. For example, when the “normal fluctuation” of the deviation fluctuation pattern is determined as the fluctuation pattern, “None” of the command “00H” is determined as the first half fluctuation pattern, and “low accuracy” of the command “00H” is determined as the second half fluctuation pattern. Either "Fluctuation 1 (4.0 seconds)" or "Low-accuracy fluctuation 2 (8.0 seconds)" of the command "01H" is determined. The variation pattern designation command corresponding to such “normal variation” is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 as “0000H” or “0001H” combining the commands of the first and second half variation patterns. The variation pattern designation command may be written as “00H00H” or “00H01H”, for example.

  The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern is a time obtained by combining the fluctuation times of the first half and the second half fluctuation pattern. For example, in the fluctuation pattern designation command “0000H”, the first half fluctuation pattern fluctuation time (0 ms) and the latter half fluctuation pattern fluctuation time (4000 ms) are combined (4000 ms). In the fluctuation pattern designation command “0102H”, the first half The time (21000 ms) is the sum of the variation time (11000 ms) of the variation pattern and the variation time (10000 ms) of the second-half variation pattern. As described above, since the first half and the latter half of the fluctuation pattern are determined in stages after the rough type is determined, diversification is achieved as a combination of the fluctuation patterns. It can be increased easily.

  In FIG. 80, for convenience, only 18 types of fluctuation patterns including the deviation and the hit are shown, but it is needless to say that more than the one shown in FIG. “Pseudo 1-4” is a variation pattern corresponding to a so-called pseudo-ream. “Pseudo 1-4” is provided as a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-series such as a normal pseudo-series and a high-speed pseudo-series. For example, “pseudo 1 to 4 per pseudo” is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit via, for example, normal reach or SP reach after execution of pseudo continuous. “Freeze 1 to 3” is a variation pattern corresponding to a so-called freeze effect (for example, an effect of stopping a decorative symbol in a changing manner or an effect of turning off the screen to make the decorative symbol invisible or difficult). It is. For example, “per freeze 1 to 3” is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit via a variation related to “premier” after execution of the freeze effect, for example. `` Low probability '', `` Low accuracy time '', `` High accuracy time '', `` latency '' are `` non-probability variable gaming state '', `` non-probability and short time gaming state '', `` probability and short time gaming state '' It means “probable and non-short game state”. Note that the “latency probability” is a state in which the game state between the probability change game state and the non-probability change game state is not determined regardless of whether the game is in the short-time game state or the non-time-short game state ( It may mean mode A, short-time mode B, and normal mode (2)) (see FIGS. 103 and 133).

  Various processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 6001 are shown in FIGS.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 81 shows a power-on process performed by the main CPU 280. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 6001 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power interruption detection signal is turned ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, for example. When the power interruption detection signal is ON, the main CPU 280 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and repeats the process of step S12 until the power interruption detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 280 determines that the power interruption is detected, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 280 permits access to the RWM (main RAM).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process that waits until the sub control circuit 33 can accept a signal (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is sent from the main RAM 282 provided in the main CPU 280 constituting the main control circuit 28 or the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / launch control circuit 34 (payout / launch control board 34 shown in FIG. 22). This is a signal for commanding clearing of backup contents. When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set on. The power interruption detection flag is a flag indicating that power interruption processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of power interruption. If the power interruption detection flag is set on, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set off, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S23.

  In step S18, the main CPU 280 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 282 using, for example, a checksum.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S23.

  In step S20, the main CPU 280 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs notification setting for the high-probability gaming state (probability gaming state) at the time of restoration of power interruption (step S21).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs processing for transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S22). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the power-on process.

  In step S23, the main CPU 280 performs processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 282.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM) (step S24).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S25).

  Next, the main CPU 280 executes variation pattern table setting processing (step S26). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the power-on process.

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 82 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 280. The system timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, for example. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 282 (step S31).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (step S32).

  Next, the main CPU 280 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a timer update process for updating various timer values (step S34).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S35).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 33 (step S36). The game information is information relating to a game processed in the main control circuit 28, the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, and the like, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, and the hall computer. .

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs processing for restoring the saved register values (step S37). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 83 shows a switch input detection process performed by the main CPU 280. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described system timer interrupt process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a general winning opening detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 1013 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special winning opening passing detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning a special winning opening 1011 (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) is set.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is acquired in accordance with the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector (pass gate). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Start-up winning detection processing]
FIG. 84 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 280. The start opening prize detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first start-port winning ball sensor 311 (first start-port switch 311 shown in FIG. 22) (step S51). When the first start opening winning ball sensor 311 detects a game ball, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the first start opening winning ball sensor 311 does not detect a game ball, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S59.

  In step S52, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the first start opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the number of reserved first winning prizes (the number of retained first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved items is 4, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S59.

  In step S <b> 54, the main CPU 280 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 280 obtains a jackpot determination random number value and a design random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 282 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol random number value, the hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table (first start port), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to and stopped. A symbol command or the like related to the first special symbol is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 280 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined based on the symbol command, the determination value data, the gaming state, and the table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a reserve number increase command for the first start opening winning (step S58). The retained number-of-holds command for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of retained symbols of the first special symbol is incremented by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 33 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 312 (second start opening switch 312 shown in FIG. 22) (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start opening winning ball sensor 312, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S60. When the second starting port winning ball sensor 312 has not detected a game ball, the main CPU 280 ends the starting port winning detection process.

  In step S60, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting payout information corresponding to the second start opening prize.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the number of retained second start opening prizes (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reservations is less than 4, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S62. If the number of reserved items is four, the main CPU 280 ends the start slot winning detection process.

  In step S62, the main CPU 280 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved second start opening prizes.

  Next, the main CPU 280 obtains a jackpot determination random number value and a design random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 282 (step S63).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is also based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol random number value, the hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table (second start port), the jackpot type With reference to the determination table, a symbol command or the like related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed is determined.

  Next, the main CPU 280 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol based on the symbol command, determination value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a second start opening prize holding number increase command (step S66). The second start opening prize hold number increase command is a command to increase the hold number of the second special symbol by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 33 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the start opening prize detection process.

[Variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 85 shows the variation pattern determination process performed by the main CPU 280. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above.
As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 refers to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the table pattern, the jackpot determination random number value, and the symbol random number value, and performs a process of selecting the variation pattern type. (Step S71). The gaming state transition table is a table that is referred to for transitioning the gaming state based on the symbol command, the table pattern, and the number of fluctuations after the big hit gaming state, and is stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. ing. The variation pattern selection table is divided into an off time and a hit time, and is a table that is referred to in order to select a variation pattern according to various gaming states, and is stored in the main ROM 281 of the main control circuit 28. .

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of selecting the first half and the second half fluctuation pattern from the selected fluctuation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern determination process.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 86 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 280. When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 6001, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 performs an initial setting process (step S81). In this processing, the main CPU 280 performs processing such as the power-on processing described above.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs initial value random number update processing (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 280 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a symbol display device control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 280 displays the special symbol display devices 5C and 5D (the first symbol shown in FIG. 22) according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 282 in steps S83 and S84. 1 special symbol display unit 5C or second special symbol display unit 5D) and normal symbol display device 5A (normal symbol display unit 5A shown in FIG. 22) is stored in the main RAM 282. As a result, the main CPU 280 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display devices 5C and 5D and the normal symbol display device 5A, and the special symbol display devices 5C and 5D and the normal symbol display device 5A are based on the received control signal. The symbols and normal symbols are displayed in a variable and stopped manner.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 280 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 33, the payout / launch control circuit 34, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 282.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs storage / game state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 280 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 based on the value of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 282. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 87 shows special symbol control processing by the main CPU 280. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical value ("00" to "08") described in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicates the value of the control state flag. The control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 282. The main CPU 280 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the main CPU 280 performs processing for loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 280 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 282. Based on the value of the read control state flag, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100 described later. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S92 to S100. The main CPU 280 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S92 to S100. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 82) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S92). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 280 checks the number of reserved special symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved is not “0”. In the case where there is a holding ball, the jackpot determination result, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. obtained by the start opening winning detection process are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S93) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern acquired in the current process. Set the special symbol fluctuation time to the waiting time timer. That is, the special symbol fluctuation time management process described later is executed after the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the reserved number is “0” (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 280 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs special symbol variation time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 280 has a value ("01") indicating that the control state flag indicates the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol display described later is displayed on the control state flag. A value ("02") indicating the time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that a special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is executed after the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S93 has elapsed.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 280 determines that the big hit is determined when the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result is a “big hit”. When the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“03”) indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval as the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the latency timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 280 determines that the control status flag is a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed. Based on the data read from the main ROM 281, the variables positioned in the main RAM 282 are updated in order to open the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating a large winning opening opening process (step S96), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and also sets an upper opening limit time (for example, 30) for the large winning opening. Seconds) is set in the grand prize opening time timer. That is, this process is set so that a process for opening a special prize opening, which will be described later, is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 280, when the control status flag is a value ("04") indicating a process for opening a big prize opening, a condition that the big prize opening prize counter is a predetermined number or more, and the release. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has passed (the big winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 280 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 282 in order to close the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening. Then, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“05”) indicating a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and sets the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening set in step S97 has elapsed, it is set to execute the monitoring process for residual balls in the special winning opening described later. Note that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 immediately before the end of the special winning opening opening process.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 280 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 280 sets a time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, a waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 280 sets a value indicating the jackpot end interval process ("07") in the control state flag, and a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (the jackpot end interval) Time) in the wait timer. That is, after a time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 280 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the main CPU 280 performs waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 280 indicates that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the main winning opening is released. The number of times counter is updated so as to increase it by “1”. In addition, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating the process for opening the special winning opening to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 280 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, the process is set so that the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96) is executed again in this process. It should be noted that a display command indicating that the special winning opening is being opened is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33 immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the special winning opening.

  Further, when the main CPU 280 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening number, the big hit end interval process is performed (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 280 has a value ("07") indicating that the control state flag indicates the jackpot end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process ("" when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed). 08 ") is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S99.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a special symbol game ending process when the big hit gaming state is ended or when “losing” is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“08”), the main CPU 280 stores and updates the data indicating the number of holdings (starting storage information) to be decreased by “1”. To do. In addition, the main CPU 280 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next special symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 6001 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “lost”, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, “08”. Set in order. Thereby, the main CPU 280 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol change time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

  Further, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, “03” when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”. To do. Thereby, the main CPU 280 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variation time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed.

  Further, when the transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. As a result, the main CPU 280 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S57), and the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management process (step S98) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing and a big hit game is executed.

  When the end condition for the big hit gaming state is satisfied during the big hit gaming state, the main CPU 280 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 280 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S96), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97), the big hit end interval process (step S99), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). Are executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the big hit gaming state is terminated.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 93 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 86 also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return process from a small module to a parent module is possible with a call instruction when the process is branched according to the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in this embodiment as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 88 shows a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 280. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 280 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 282 by a load process (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When determining that the control state flag is not “00”, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start memorized number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 280 determines that the second start opening winning number is not “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S114. If the main CPU 280 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S119.

  In step S <b> 114, the main CPU 280 subtracts “1” from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 280 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 282, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being changed is stored as start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. The start storage information in each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random number value, a symbol random number value, a determined variation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the second start opening. .

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second start opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 280 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 33. Thereafter, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 33.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a jackpot determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 280 uses the jackpot determination random number value extracted at the time of starting opening winning and set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0) first. Based on the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 77), determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 280 determines (winning determination) which of “big hit” and “losing” is won based on the acquired determination value data.

  Next, the main CPU 280 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  In step S119, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start memorized number) of the first start opening prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 280 determines that the number of first start opening winnings is not “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S120. If the main CPU 280 determines that the reserved number of first start opening winnings is “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S122.

  In step S120, the main CPU 280 subtracts “1” from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the reserved number of first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 280 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 282, and It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being changed or on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the changing first special symbol is stored as start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. Are stored as start-up storage information. Note that the start storage information in each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random number value, a design random number value acquired at the time of winning the first start opening, a determined variation pattern, and the like. .

  Next, a special symbol memory transfer process is performed based on the first start opening prize (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 280 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 33. Thereafter, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S116.

  In step S122, the main CPU 280 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 280 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 33. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 89 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 280. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the waiting time after change confirmation (variation start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “hit”. If it is determined that the special symbol game is a “hit”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S136. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not “big hit”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S134.

  In step S134, the main CPU 280 performs a time reduction number subtraction process. The short time subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S135). When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S136, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S137.

  In step S137, the main CPU 280 performs processing for clearing the time-short state change frequency counter, the time-short flag and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S138.

  In step S138, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 282 (step S140). As a result, a big hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 33.

  Next, the main CPU 280 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 79A and 79B), and sets the round number upper limit value (large winning opening release upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol command) to the main RAM 282. And the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time reduction subtraction processing]
FIG. 90 shows the time-saver subtraction process by the main CPU 280. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (step S151). The time-short state change frequency counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time-short time count becomes zero. When the value of the time-short state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 280 ends the time-short time subtraction process. If the value of the short-time state variation number counter is not 0, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S152.

  In step S152, the main CPU 280 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the short-time state variation number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines again whether or not the value of the short-time state variation number counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the short time state change frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time-short state change number counter is not 0, the main CPU 280 ends the time-short number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting “0” as the time reduction flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 91 shows the big hit end interval process by the main CPU 280. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value indicating a big hit end interval process (“07”) (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”) (step S161: NO), the main CPU 280 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (“07”), the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 280 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 280 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of the big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

  Next, the main CPU 280 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 282, and the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening is periodically opened and closed by a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag for indicating whether or not to perform. In the case where the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes “1”. At this time, the main CPU 280 also transmits a special symbol end display command to the sub-control circuit 33.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs processing for clearing the big hit flag set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 282 (step S166).

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not it is a probable big hit (step S167). If it is a probable big hit, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S168. If it is not a probable big hit, the main CPU 280 moves to the process of step S169.

  In step S168, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting “1” as the probability variation flag.

  In step S169, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting “1” as the time reduction flag.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting a prescribed time reduction number in the time reduction state variation number counter (step S170).

  Next, the main CPU 280 executes variation pattern table setting processing (step S171). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 92 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 280. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If it is time to turn on the power, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table.

  Next, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation flag is “1” (step S183). When the value of the probability variation flag is “1”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S184. If the value of the probability variation flag is “0”, the main CPU 280 proceeds to the process of step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

  In step S185, the main CPU 280 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the gaming state transition table. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 93 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 280. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 93 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 282. Stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 280 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 280 performs processing for loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 280 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 282. Based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag, the main CPU 280 determines whether or not to execute various processes in steps S192 to S196 described later. The normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. The main CPU 280 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to a waiting time set for each process in steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 82) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 280 checks the number of holdings of variable symbol normal display, and the number of holdings is “0”. If not, a process such as a hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) to be described later (step S193) in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the variation time determined in this processing. Set to the wait timer. That is, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed by the process of step S192.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs normal symbol variation time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 280 indicates that the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process (“01”), and when the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time after determination (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed by the process of step S193.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 280 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has passed. It is determined whether or not the determination result is “winning”. When the result of the hit determination is “hit”, the main CPU 280 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a value indicating a normal electric accessory release process (step S195) described later (step S195). “03”) is set. That is, this process is set so that a later-described ordinary electric accessory release process is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not “win”, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 280 determines in step S194 that the result of the hit determination is “win”, the main CPU 280 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 280 determines that there is a predetermined number of winnings during the opening of the ordinary electric accessory when the ordinary symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory releasing process. In addition, it is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit opening time of the ordinary electric utility item has passed (the ordinary electric role opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When the above one condition is satisfied, the main CPU 280 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 282 in order to put the blade-shaped member, which is an ordinary electric accessory, in a closed state. Then, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described normal symbol game end process (step S196) in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 280 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol game end process (“04”), the main CPU 280 decreases the data indicating the number of hold of the variable symbol variable display by “1”. Update the memory. Further, the main CPU 280 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next normal symbol variation display. Further, the main CPU 280 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 280 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 33 executes the sub control circuit main process. The sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the sub CPU 330 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, and backup restoration initialization (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs processing for clearing the counter value of the watch dog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is activated, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (timeout), the power interruption process is executed.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes operation means input processing (step S203). The operation means input process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes each process related to the effect. As shown in FIG. 95, when an aspect relating to an effect such as a variable effect pattern, an effect pattern, a notice effect, an effect, etc. is determined as an effect mode by each process of the effect mode determination process, the effect indicating this is shown. Information is generated.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, in the command transmission process, the aforementioned message (effect designation information) is generated based on the effect information, and this message is transmitted to each control circuit.

  Next, the display control circuit 335 executes a drawing control process (step S207). In this processing, the display control circuit 335 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 4 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

  Next, the acoustic control circuit 336 executes voice control processing (step S208). In this process, the sound control circuit 336 performs sound control for causing the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c to output sound based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

  Next, the light emission control circuit 337 performs LED control processing (step S209). In this processing, the light emission control circuit 337 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the lamp / LED 260 based on a message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330.

  Next, the rendering device control circuit 338 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the rendering device control circuit 338 performs drive control for operating the movable rendering device 270 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 330. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process in step S201 is completed, each process from step S202 to step S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Button input interrupt processing]
FIG. 96 shows button input interrupt processing by the sub CPU 330. The button input interrupt process is executed in parallel with the sub-control circuit main process, for example, every 1 ms by updating the measurement timer. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not there is an input signal from the effect button switch (sensors provided in the first operation unit 9A and the second operation unit 9B shown in FIG. 22). (Step S221). If there is an input signal from the effect button switch, the sub CPU 330 proceeds to the process of step S222. If there is no input signal from the effect button switch, the sub CPU 330 ends the button input interrupt process.

  In step S222, the sub CPU 330 determines an operation state of the effect buttons (the operation button 2000 and the push button 3000) based on an input signal from the effect button switch, and generates information indicating the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the button input interrupt process.

[Operating means input processing]
FIG. 97 shows operation means input processing by the sub CPU 330. The operation means input process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 acquires the operation state based on the information indicating the operation state (step S231). The operation state includes the number of times of pressing for a production button, and includes the rotation direction and rotation angle, and further the rotation speed for a jog dial. The effect is determined according to the operation state. When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the operation means input process.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 98 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 330. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 28 (main CPU 280), the sub CPU 330 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 332 (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data is present when the command is received, and that the data is free from errors or missing.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 330 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all matters relating to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (whether there is a serif notice or the presence of the SU notice) as the production pattern. The content of the effect (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) that is selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another process that is made into a separate subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and then the effect content executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by an effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 99 shows command transmission processing by the sub CPU 330. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 335 to 338 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 330 performs processing for generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 332. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of setting a corresponding directory table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 332 based on the message and effect information stored in the directory buffer. The directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of reading a message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table and transmitting the message to a predetermined control circuit 335 to 338. When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 100 shows message setting processing by the sub CPU 330. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 sets a device (control circuits 335 to 338) to transmit based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs processing for setting the presence or absence of system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs setting of stage information and various pieces of effect information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 335 to 338) serving as a transmission destination, presence / absence of system operation, stage information, production information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the message setting process.

[Direction table registration processing]
FIG. 101 shows a directory table registration process by the sub CPU 330. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs processing for registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a process of registering a directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the directory table registration process.

[Message transmission processing]
FIG. 102 shows message transmission processing by the sub CPU 330. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the directory buffer corresponding to the directory table, the sub CPU 330 sends a message to each device (control circuits 335 to 338) according to the “destination device” set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after completing the message transmission, the sub CPU 330 performs processing for discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 330 ends the message transmission process.

<Direction mode transition flow>
FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of the effect mode according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 103 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the production mode according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, an effect mode (sub game state) as shown in FIG. 103A is managed by the sub control circuit 33. As the production mode, a normal mode, a big hit mode, a time reduction mode A, a time reduction mode B, a first special mode, and a second special mode are provided. Although not shown, as the big hit mode, a first big hit mode and a second big hit mode are provided.

  Specifically, referring to FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), when the big hit gaming state starts in the normal mode (see step S140 in FIG. 89), the sub control circuit 33 changes from the normal mode to the big hit mode. The production mode is shifted to (see transition condition (1)).

  Similarly, when the big hit gaming state is started in the short time mode A, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the short time mode A to the big hit mode (see transition condition (3)). When the big hit gaming state is started in the short time mode B, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the short time mode B to the big hit mode (see transition condition (6)).

  When the big hit gaming state starts in the first special mode or the second special mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the first special mode or the second special mode to the big hit mode (transition condition (10)). reference). Specifically, when the big hit gaming state starts in the first special mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the first special mode to the first big hit mode. When the big hit gaming state starts in the second special mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the second special mode to the second big hit mode.

  When the big hit gaming state ends (see FIG. 91), the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the big hit mode to the time-saving mode A, the first special mode or the second special mode (transition condition (2 ) And (9)).

  Specifically, when the condition for shifting to the first special mode is satisfied during the big hit mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode. When the condition for shifting to the second special mode is satisfied during the big hit mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the second special mode. If the conditions for shifting to the first special mode and the conditions for shifting to the second special mode are not satisfied during the big hit mode, the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode to the time-saving mode A. Although not shown in FIG. 103, as will be described later, the sub-control circuit 33 may shift the effect mode from the big hit mode to the short time mode B.

  The transition condition to the first special mode and the transition condition to the second special mode are each established by performing an effect that can be executed only when the probability variation is a big hit (probability confirmed effect). The probability variation effect will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, the first special mode (the first jackpot mode is selected at any timing, such as during the jackpot gaming state, before the start of the jackpot gaming state, after the termination of the jackpot gaming state, during the short-time gaming state, during the normal gaming state, etc. ) And the second special mode (second jackpot mode), it is possible to allow the player to select in which effect mode the game is played.

  When the time-saving gaming state ends in the time-saving mode A (see step S154 in FIG. 90), the sub control circuit 33 changes the effect mode from the time-saving mode A to the normal mode (see the transition condition (4)). On the other hand, if the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) after the big hit gaming state is ended without the time-saving gaming state being ended in the time-saving mode A, the sub control circuit 33 changes from the time-saving mode A to the time-saving mode B. The effect mode is shifted (see transition condition (5)). Although not shown, when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (five times) after the jackpot gaming state is finished without the time-shortening gaming state being finished in the probability variation gaming state and the time-saving mode A, the sub-control circuit 33 The production mode may be shifted from the time reduction mode A to the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode).

  When the time-short gaming state ends in the time-shortening mode B (see step S154 in FIG. 90), the sub control circuit 33 shifts the effect mode from the time-shortening mode B to the normal mode (see the transition condition (7)). On the other hand, if the special symbol variation is performed a specific number of times (35 times, 95 times, etc.) after the big hit gaming state is finished without the time saving gaming state being finished in the time saving mode B, the sub-control circuit 33 The production mode is shifted to the first special mode or the second special mode (see the transition condition (8)). That is, the short-time gaming state continues even in the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode). In addition, as a result of the lottery for selecting the variation effect pattern and the prefetch effect pattern, the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) is selected from the short-time mode B on condition that the lottery for shifting the effect mode is won. The production mode may be shifted to (mode).

  In the present embodiment, the special mode (the first special mode or the second special mode) can be shortened in addition to the case where the transition condition to the first special mode or the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied during the big hit mode. In some cases, the mode A or the short-time mode B may be shifted, and the special mode is an effect mode that can be selected in accordance with the probability big hit.

<Large hit plate acquisition process>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the big hit plate acquisition process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing normal round processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the interval processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the plate acquisition round processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing plate acquisition result display processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 109A shows a navigation lottery table. FIG. 109B is a diagram showing the relationship between the aura color and the probability variation reliability in the aura-attached Hatena mark. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the display timing of the plate acquisition result.

  104 is a big hit that shifts when the big hit gaming state starts in the first special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)) (when the first special mode is selected). This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 of FIG. 94) by the sub control circuit 33 during the mode (first big hit mode). The sub control circuit 33 can recognize that the big hit gaming state starts by receiving the big hit start command (see step S140 in FIG. 89).

  In the big hit medium plate acquisition process, first, the sub CPU 330 of the sub control circuit 33 determines whether or not a round game is in progress (step S1001). The sub CPU 330 recognizes that it is in the round game by receiving from the main control circuit 28 a command corresponding to the fact that it is in the round game (the big prize opening opening process shown in step S96 of FIG. 87). Can do.

  If it is determined that a round game is in progress, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current round game is a round game for plate acquisition (step S1002). In this process, when the plate acquisition round flag (see step S1045 in FIG. 106) is set to ON, the sub CPU 330 determines that the current round game is a plate acquisition round game. .

  When determining that the currently played round game is not a round game for plate acquisition, the sub CPU 330 executes processing during a normal round (step S1003). The processing during the normal round will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when determining that the currently played round game is a round game for obtaining a plate, the sub CPU 330 executes a process for obtaining a round of plates (step S1004). The plate acquisition round process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the game is not in a round game (that is, during an interval between rounds), the sub CPU 330 executes an in-interval process (step S1005). The processing during the interval will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1003, step S1004, or step S1005, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Normal round processing>
The normal round processing shown in FIG. 105 is processing performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1003 of FIG.

  In the process during the normal round, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is an attacker (first big prize opening or second big prize opening) winning (step S1021). In this processing, whether or not the sub CPU 330 has received a command (attacker winning command) transmitted from the main control circuit 28 when a game ball has entered the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening. Judging.

  If it is determined that it is not at the time of winning an attacker (first big prize opening or second big prize opening), the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that an attacker (first grand prize opening or second big prize opening) is won, the sub CPU 330 executes navigation lottery (step S1022). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the contents of the navigation by referring to the navigation lottery table (see FIG. 109A) and performing a lottery based on the random number value.

  In the navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 109 (a), the contents of the navigation ("yellow 7 navigation", "Hatena Navi", and "Rainbow Hatena Navi") correspond to each of the normal big hit and the probable big hit. A lottery value is defined. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), in the case of a probable big hit, it is easier to determine “Hatena Navi” or “Rainbow Hatena Navi” than in the case of a normal big hit.

  It should be noted that the normal big hit is a big hit in which the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes a non-probable change gaming state, and the probable big hit is a big hit in which the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes a positive change gaming state. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B, the big hits corresponding to the symbol commands “z4”, “z5”, “z6”, and “z11” (4R normal big hit and 16R normal big hit) ) And the jackpots corresponding to the symbol commands “z0”, “z1”, “z2”, “z3”, “z7”, “z9”, and “z10” (4R probability jackpot) And 16R probability variation big hit).

  After executing the process of step S1022, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the navigation lottery has been won (step S1023). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines that the navigation lottery has been won when the navigation content determined by the navigation lottery is “Hatena Navi” or “Rainbow Hatena Navi”.

  When determining that the navigation lottery has not been won (“Yellow 7 Navi” has been determined), the sub CPU 330 displays an image corresponding to “Yellow 7 Navi” (the number “7” in yellow). Is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so as to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1024). Thereafter, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the navigation lottery is won (“Hatena Navi” or “Rainbow Hatena Navi” is determined), the sub CPU 330 displays an image corresponding to “Hatena Navi” or “Rainbow Hatena Navi” (the Hatena mark “ “?” Is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays a predetermined color or rainbow-colored image (step S1025).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 adds 1 to the value of the navigation number counter (step S1026). The value of the navigation number counter indicates the number of times the navigation lottery has been won, and is stored in the work RAM 332. The value of the navigation number counter is cleared (set to “0”) when the big hit gaming state ends. After executing the process of step S1026, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<In-interval processing>
The interval processing shown in FIG. 106 is processing performed by the sub control circuit 33 in step S1005 of FIG.

  In the processing during the interval, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the “Hatena mark” (see step S1025 in FIG. 105) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the most recent round game (whether or not the navigation lottery is won). Judgment is made (step S1041).

  If it is determined that the “Hatena mark” has been displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the most recent round game, the sub CPU 330 changes the color of the aura in the “aura-attached Hatena mark” (step S1042). In this process, the sub CPU 330 causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display “a Hatena with aura” in a manner that emits an aura in the surroundings, and produces an effect on the display control circuit 335 so that the aura has a predetermined color. Send specified information.

  The “Hatena mark with aura” displayed in this process is different from the “Hatena mark” displayed in step S1025 of FIG. The “Hatena mark” is displayed for a short time (for example, less than 1 second) near the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (see “Hatena mark 6101” shown in FIG. 111 (b)). The “attached Hatena mark” is displayed in the vicinity of the periphery of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (refer to “Aura-attached Hatena mark 6102” shown in FIG. 111C). Once the “Hatena Mark with Aura” is displayed, the “Hatena Mark with Aura” is displayed continuously (until the round game for the plate acquisition starts), and the color of the aura changes in stages. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 4 is controlled.

  The color of the aura in the “Hatena Mark with Aura” is one of white, blue, green, purple, red, and iridescent, in the order of white, blue, green, purple, red, and iridescent The probability variation reliability is high (see FIG. 109 (b)). The probability variation reliability is a probability that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, and the color of the aura is an index indicating how much the current jackpot can be expected to be a probability variation jackpot.

  In the process of step S1042, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the color of the aura in the “a Hatena with aura” is increased by one step. As a result, when the aura of the “Hatena mark with aura” already displayed is white, the color of the aura is changed to blue, and the aura of the “Hatena mark with aura” already displayed is blue. In this case, the color of the aura is changed to green, and if the aura of the “Hatena Mark with Aura” that is already displayed is green, the color of the aura is changed to purple and the already displayed “Aura” If the aura of the “Attached Hatena Mark” is purple, the color of the aura is changed to red. If the aura of the “Attached Hatena Mark” already displayed is red, the aura is colored iridescent. Changed to

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of a probable big hit, “Hatena Navi” or “Rainbow Hatena Navi” is more easily determined than in the case of a normal big hit (see FIG. 109 (a)). As a result, in the case of a probable big hit, the color of the aura in the “Hatena mark with aura” is more likely to be changed to a color with a higher probability of change reliability than in the case of a normal big hit.

  In the big hit game state, when “Hatena mark” is displayed for the first time in one round game (for example, the third round) (for example, “Hatena mark” is not displayed in the first and second rounds). In this case, at that time, the “aura-ended Hatena mark” is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. In this case, the sub CPU 330 has a white aura in the process of step S1042 during an inter-round interval (for example, an interval occurring between the third round and the fourth round) that shifts after the end of the one round game. The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 so that the “a Hatena with aura” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

  If it is determined in step S1041 that the “Hatena mark” has not been displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the most recent round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether the value of the navigation number counter (see step S1026 in FIG. 105) is greater than zero. It is determined whether or not (step S1043). If it is determined that the value of the navigation number counter is 0, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  After executing the process of step S1042, or when determining that the value of the navigation number counter is larger than 0 in step S1043, the sub CPU 330 generates the current round interval between the eleventh round and the twelfth round. It is determined whether or not it is an interval to be performed (step S1044).

  If it is determined that the current inter-round interval is not an interval occurring between the eleventh round and the twelfth round, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current interval between rounds is an interval occurring between the eleventh and twelfth rounds, the sub CPU 330 sets the plate acquisition round flag to ON (step S1045). The plate acquisition round flag is a flag indicating that a plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111D to 111F) is being performed, and when the plate acquisition round ends (for example, FIG. After the process of step S1067 of 107 is executed, it is set to OFF at the end of the 15th round, at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc. After executing the processing of step S1045, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing during round for plate acquisition>
The plate acquisition round process shown in FIG. 107 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1004 of FIG.

  In the plate acquisition round process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current round game is the twelfth round game (step S1061).

  If the sub CPU 330 determines that the currently played round game is the twelfth round game, the sub CPU 330 displays effect designation information in the display control circuit 335 so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the plate acquisition effect start image. Transmit (step S1062). The plate acquisition effect start image is an image indicating that the plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111D to 111F) starts. After executing the processing of step S1062, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1061 that the current round game is not the twelfth round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current round game is the thirteenth round game (step S1061). S1063).

  When determining that the currently played round game is the thirteenth round game, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to display the plate acquisition mission on the liquid crystal display device 4 ( Step S1064). The plate acquisition mission is an image for guiding a player about acquisition of a plate. After executing the process of step S1064, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1063 that the currently played round game is not the 13th round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the currently played round game is the 14th round game (step S1063). S1065).

  If the sub CPU 330 determines that the currently played round game is the 14th round game, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S31). S1066). The button image is an image simulating an effect button (the operation button 2000 or the press button 3000). As the button image, a plurality of images having different colors and sizes are provided, and one button image of the plurality of button images is selected by lottery and displayed. Each button image has a different ease of selection depending on whether the current big hit is a normal big hit or a probable big hit. After executing the processing of step S1066, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1065 that the current round game is not the 14th round game, the sub CPU 330 executes a plate acquisition result display process (step S1067). The plate acquisition result display process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1067, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Plate acquisition result display process>
The plate acquisition result display process shown in FIG. 108 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 33 in step S1067 of FIG.

  In the plate acquisition result display process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current big hit is a probable big hit (step S1081). Since the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 (see step S140 in FIG. 89) includes information indicating the type of jackpot (the symbol command shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B), the jackpot start command is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 330 can recognize the type of jackpot.

  When determining that the current big hit is a probable big hit, the sub CPU 330 causes the display control circuit 335 to display the effect designation information so that the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an image (successful image) indicating that the plate has been successfully acquired. Is transmitted (step S1082).

  Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1083). The first special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the transition condition to the first special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the first special mode is entered when an effect that can be executed only when the probability variation is a big hit (probability confirmed effect) is performed. To do. The effect that the image (successful image) indicating that the acquisition of the plate has been successful is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (the effect performed in step S1082) is a probability change confirmation effect. If the first special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the first special mode.

  In addition, when the probability variation finalizing effect is performed, during the subsequent big hit mode, an image of the same system as the image (for example, the background image) displayed in the effect mode (special mode) that is shifted after the end of the big hit gaming state is displayed. It may be displayed. Of course, even in this case, an image different from the image displayed in the special mode may be displayed. After executing the process of step S1083, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1081 that the current big hit is not a probable big hit, the sub CPU 330 causes the display control circuit 335 to display an image (failure image) indicating that the plate acquisition has failed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The effect designation information is transmitted (step S1084).

  After executing the process of step S1084, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  107 and 108, button images are displayed in the fourteenth round (see step S1066 in FIG. 107), and plate acquisition results (success images or failure images) are displayed in the fifteenth and sixteenth rounds (FIG. 107). 108, step S1082 and step S1084). The display timing of the plate acquisition result is not limited to this example. For example, the success image or the failure image may be displayed before the 15th round starts.

  FIG. 110 shows the relationship between the end timing of the 14th round, the start timing of the 15th round, and the button effective time. The button effective time is a period during which the button image is displayed. When the effect button is operated during the button effective time, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed at the timing when the operation is performed. The If the effect button is not operated during the button effective time, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed at the timing when the button effective time ends.

  In the example shown in FIG. 110, the button effective time starts when a certain period of time has passed since the 14th round started (from the start of the 14th round until the button effective time starts. Time is constant). The length of the button effective time is also constant.

  Here, as described above, one round game includes a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls to be awarded to the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening, Alternatively, the process ends when a predetermined time elapses. In other words, the length of one round game is a predetermined time at the longest, and the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening by the predetermined time has reached a predetermined number. In that case, the round game ends at that time. That is, the length of the round game varies depending on the time required for the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening to reach a predetermined number.

  On the premise of this, FIG. 110A shows a case where the button valid time ends before the 14th round ends. FIG. 110 (b) shows a case where the button valid time ends during an interval that occurs between the 14th and 15th rounds. FIG. 110 (c) shows a case where the button effective time starts after the end of the 14th round (during the interval occurring between the 14th and 15th rounds), and the button effective time ends after the 15th round starts. Show.

  In the example of FIG. 110 (a), the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during the fourteenth round regardless of whether or not the effect button is operated and the operation timing. In the example of FIG. 110 (b), if the effect button is operated before the end of the 14th round, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during the 14th round. If the effect button is not operated before the end, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during an interval that occurs between the 14th and 15th rounds. In the example of FIG. 110 (c), if the effect button is operated before the 15th round starts, the plate acquisition result (successful image or failure) during the interval that occurs between the 14th and 15th rounds. Image) is displayed, and if the effect button is not operated before the fifteenth round starts, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) is displayed during the fifteenth round.

  In the example of FIG. 110 (c), if the effect button is not operated before the 15th round starts, the plate acquisition result (success image or failure image) may be displayed at the start of the 15th round. Good. Further, as will be described later, during the round game, a yellow 7 image 6100 and a Hatena mark 6101 displayed during the round game are displayed on the upper display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (FIGS. 111A and 111B). In the example of FIG. 110 (c), the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 even after the fifteenth round is started. Therefore, in this case, after the display of the button image ends (the button effective time ends), the history may be displayed from the middle of the fifteenth round.

<Direction during the first jackpot mode>
FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device during the first big hit mode.

  In the present embodiment, the player shifts to the first big hit mode when a big hit occurs in the first special mode, and the first special mode is selected by the player from the first special mode and the second special mode. Thus, even when a big hit occurs in an effect mode other than the first special mode (normal mode, short time mode A, short time mode B, or second special mode), the mode shifts to the first big hit mode. In FIG. 111, the characters “first big hit mode” are shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the character image may not actually be displayed.

  In the first big hit mode, every time a game ball wins an attacker (first big prize opening or second big prize opening) (see step S1021 in FIG. 105), FIG. 111 (a) and FIG. 111 (b) As shown, the yellow 7 image 6100 or the Hatena mark 6101 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The yellow 7 image 6100 is an image in which the numeral “7” is yellow (see step S1024 in FIG. 105), and the Hatena mark 6101 is a predetermined color or rainbow color added to the Hatena mark “?”. It is an image (see step S1025 in FIG. 105). 111 (a) and 111 (b) show a state where the yellow 7 image 6100 and the Hatena mark 6101 are displayed in a stationary manner, respectively, but in this embodiment, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the Hatena are displayed. Each of the marks 6101 is displayed in such a manner as to fall from above. That is, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the Hatena mark 6101 are displayed while moving.

  Which of the yellow 7 image 6100 and the Hatena mark 6101 is displayed is determined by navigation lottery (see step S1022 in FIG. 105). In FIG. 105, it has been described that a navigation lottery is performed every time a game ball wins an attacker (first grand prize opening or second grand prize opening). As described above, in this embodiment, one round game is completed on condition that ten game balls have won the attacker (the maximum number of game balls that can be won by the attacker in one round game). Therefore, according to this, the Hatena mark 6101 can be displayed up to 10 times (probably very low in probability) in one round game.

  However, an upper limit may be set for the number of times that the Hatena mark 6101 can be displayed in one round game. For example, in one round game, the number of times that the navigation lottery can be won is limited to one time, and once the navigation lottery is won in one round game, the navigation lottery is executed until the round game ends. You may comprise so that it may not. According to this, the number of times that the Hatena mark 6101 can be displayed in one round game is 0 or 1.

  When the big hit gaming state starts, “2400 plates” (or “4800 plates” described later) are already displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (steps S1105, S1109, S1112 and FIG. 112 in FIG. 112). S1116 and step S1120) may be configured not to execute the navigation lottery (so that the yellow 7 image 6100 is displayed every time).

  As described above, during the round game, the yellow 7 image 6100 or the Hatena mark 6101 is displayed near the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 as shown in FIGS. 111A and 111B. Only time (eg, less than 1 second). On the other hand, although not shown, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the history of the Hatena mark 6101 displayed during the round game are displayed in a reduced form compared to FIGS. 111 (a) and 111 (b). 6100 and the Hatena mark 6101 are displayed in a horizontal row in the upper part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4. When the round game is over and the interval is changed to the interval between rounds, the yellow 7 image 6100 and the Hatena mark 6101 displayed in the horizontal row disappear.

  During the round interval, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), an aura-attached Hatena mark 6102 (see step S1042 in FIG. 106) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Specifically, in an interval occurring between the Nth round and the (N + 1) th round (for example, an interval occurring between the third round and the fourth round), the first round to the Nth round (for example, the first round) On the condition that the Hatena mark 6101 is displayed at least once in the first round to the third round), the Hatena mark 6102 with an aura is displayed. The aura-attached Hatena mark 6102 has an aura 6103, and the aura 6103 has one of a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, or iridescent). . The color of the aura 6103 can be changed according to the number of times the Hatena mark 6101 is displayed (for example, the value of the navigation number counter (see step S1026 in FIG. 105)).

  In addition, during the interval between rounds, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), a winning ball number image 6104 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The prize ball number image 6104 is an image corresponding to the characters “150 GET”, and indicates that 150 game balls were paid out as prize balls in the most recent round game. In this embodiment, each time a game ball wins an attacker (first grand prize winning port or second grand prize winning port), 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in one round game, a maximum of 150 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  When the twelfth round is entered in a state in which the aura-attached Hatena mark 6102 is displayed, a plate acquisition effect (see FIGS. 111 (d) to (f)) is started. First, in the twelfth round, a plate acquisition effect start image (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1062 in FIG. 107). Subsequently, in the thirteenth round, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), a plate acquisition mission 6105 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1064 in FIG. 107). The plate acquisition mission 6105 is an image for informing the player that there is a possibility that “2400 plates” can be acquired by operating the effect button (the operation button 2000 or the press button 3000). Subsequently, in the fourteenth round, a button image (not shown) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1066 in FIG. 107).

  Thereafter, in the fifteenth and sixteenth rounds, a prize ball number image 6106 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as shown in FIG. The prize ball number image 6106 is an image corresponding to the number “2400”. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (f), a “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The “2400” plate 6110 has an appearance in which the number “2400” is drawn on the surface of the plate (plate member). Both the winning ball number image 6106 and the “2400” plate 6110 include the number “2400”.

  Here, the winning ball number image 6106 and the “2400” plate 6110 are images (success images) indicating that the plate has been successfully acquired (see step S1082 in FIG. 108). This is a kind of effect (probability confirmation effect) that can be executed only when As described above, in the case of a promising big hit, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends becomes a probable changing gaming state and a short-time gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the ordinary electric accessory (blade member) provided at the second starting port is likely to be in an open state, and as a result, the game ball is likely to win a prize at the second starting port. Then, the big hit that occurs when the game ball wins at the second starting opening is one of 16R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, and 16R normal big hit (FIG. 78 (b), and 79A and 79B).

  Therefore, assuming a situation in which a big hit occurs multiple times after entering the probability-changing gaming state and the short-time gaming state, there is no big hit that occurs when a game ball wins at the first starting port. As long as the big hits that are triggered by the winning of the game ball at the second starting port continue, the big hits that can be generated in the situation are either 16R positive variable big hits, 4R positive variable big hits, or 16R normal big hits It turns out that. In order to shift from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state, it is necessary to generate a normal big hit. However, since the normal big hit is only the 16R normal big hit, the normal variation state is shifted from the probability varying gaming state to the normal gaming state. At that time, it will always go through 16R jackpot. That is, if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can obtain a prize ball corresponding to the 16R jackpot based on the 16R probability variation jackpot, and even if the 16R probability variation jackpot does not occur, the player Based on the 16R normal jackpot, a prize ball corresponding to the 16R jackpot can be obtained. As described above, if 150 game balls are paid out as a prize ball in one round game, the number of game balls that a player can acquire in 16R jackpot is 15 × 10 × 16 = 2400. Become. The number “2400” included in the winning ball number image 6106 and the “2400” plate 6110 means this.

<Big hit processing>
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the big hit processing performed in the sub-control circuit.

  112 is a big hit process shown in FIG. 112 when the decoration pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is displayed in a specific display mode (a display mode corresponding to the big hit) by the sub control circuit 33. 94 (see step S205 of 94).

  In the big hit process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current presentation mode is the first special mode (see FIG. 103A) (step S1101). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 332, and the sub CPU 330 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can do. The big hit processing shown in FIG. 112 is processing that is performed when a decorative symbol is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the big hit. However, at the time when the processing of step S1101 is performed, the process is still in the big hit mode. However, the transition to the big hit mode is performed after the big hit processing is completed.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the current effect mode is the first special mode, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current big hit is a 4R probability variation big hit (step S1102).

  When determining that the current big hit is the 4R probability variation big hit, the sub CPU 330 changes “2400 plate” to “3000 plate” (step S1103). As described above, “2400 plate” (see FIG. 111 (f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the probability change confirmed effect (effect that can be executed only when the probability change big hit is achieved) during the big hit gaming state. In this case, the effect mode after the end of the big hit gaming state is the first special mode (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). The display of “2400 plates” continues even after the jackpot gaming state ends, and “2400 plates” continues to be displayed until the next jackpot occurs. As a result, “2400 plates” are displayed even when the process of step S1103 is performed. In the process of step S <b> 1103, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of “2400 plates” and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that “3000 plates” are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that an image corresponding to the number “600” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1104).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of “3000 plates” and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to display “2400 plates” on the liquid crystal display device 4 again (step S1105).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1106). As described above, the first special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the condition for transition to the first special mode is satisfied (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). If the first special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the first special mode.

  After executing the processing of step S1106, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1102 that the current big hit is not the 4R probability variation big hit, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not “4800 plate” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1107).

  If it is determined that “4800 plate” is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to end the display of “2400 plate” (step S1108). . As a result, the display of “2400 plate” disappears, and the player aims to acquire “2400 plate” again (expecting that this big hit is a promising big hit), Become. Specifically, “2400 plates” is again displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 on the condition that the plate acquisition is successful as a result of performing the big hit plate acquisition process (see FIGS. 104 to 108). Become.

  After executing the process of step S1108, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1107 that “4800 plate” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of “4800 plate” and causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display “2400 plate”. The production designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1109).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1110). As a result, as in the case of 4R probability variable big hit (see step S1106), at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

  After executing the process of step S1110, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the current effect mode is not the first special mode, the sub CPU 330 determines whether the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a predetermined symbol combination (for example, V-alignment). Is determined (step S1111).

  When the sub CPU 330 determines that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a predetermined symbol combination (for example, V-alignment), the sub CPU 330 displays the “4800 plate” on the liquid crystal display device 4 so as to display it. The production designation information is transmitted to the control circuit 335 (step S1112).

  Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1113). As a result, as in the case of 4R probability variable big hit (see step S1106), at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

  After executing the processing of step S1113, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If the sub CPU 330 determines in step S1111 that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is not a predetermined symbol combination (for example, V alignment), the sub CPU 330 combines the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Is a specific symbol combination (for example, G uniform) (step S1114).

  When the sub CPU 330 determines that the combination of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific symbol combination (for example, G-match), the sub CPU 330 displays the “7200 plate” on the liquid crystal display device 4 so as to display it. The production designation information is transmitted to the control circuit 335 (step S1115).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 ends the display of “7200 plates” and transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to display “4800 plates” on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1116).

  Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1117). As a result, as in the case of 4R probability variable big hit (see step S1106), at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

  After executing the processing of step S1117, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1114 that the combination of decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is not a specific symbol combination (for example, G uniform), the sub CPU 330 executes a plate acquisition lottery (step S1118). In this process, the sub CPU 330 decides whether or not to win by performing a lottery based on a random value. Specifically, when the current big hit is a normal big hit, the sub CPU 330 always decides not to win, while when the current big hit is a probable big hit, it has a predetermined probability (for example, 10%). The winner will be decided.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not a plate acquisition lottery has been won (step S1119). When determining that the plate acquisition lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine. As a result, similarly to the case where the 4R probability variable big hit is not made in the first special mode (see step S1108), the big hit gaming state starts without displaying “2400 plates”. Aiming to win a game (expecting that this big hit is a promising big hit), the game will be played.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the plate acquisition lottery has been won, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to display “2400 plate” on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1120).

  Then, the sub CPU 330 sets the first special mode transition flag to ON (step S1121). As a result, as in the case of 4R probability variable big hit (see step S1106), at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the first special mode.

  After executing the process of step S1121, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Direction at the time of a big hit (3000 plates)>
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a big hit occurs during the first special mode.

  As described above, when the “2400” plate 6110 (see FIG. 111 (f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot gaming state (first jackpot mode), the effect mode after the jackpot gaming state is ended. The first special mode is entered (see step S1083 in FIG. 108). The “2400” plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during the first special mode. FIG. 113A also shows a state where the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the first special mode. Although not shown in detail, during the first special mode, the “2400” plate 6110 continues to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in such a manner that the plate rotates about a straight line in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 113A shows a state where the red 7 image 6120 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the “2400” plate 6110. The red 7 image 6120 has the same significance as the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit as an image that can be displayed only when the result of the big hit determination is a 4R probability variation big hit. As a result, FIG. 113A shows a state in which the 4R probability variation big hit is achieved in the first special mode. In FIG. 113A, the character “first special mode” is shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the character image may not actually be displayed.

  As described above, when the 4R probability variation big hit occurs in the first special mode, the “3000” plate 6121 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 instead of the “2400” plate 6110 as shown in FIG. (See step S1103 in FIG. 112). The “3000” plate 6121 has an appearance in which the number “3000” is drawn on the surface of the plate (plate member), that is, the number “2400” in the “2400” plate 6110 is replaced with the number “3000”. Appearance.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), a prize ball number image 6122 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1104 in FIG. 112). The award ball number image 6122 is an image corresponding to the number “600” and corresponds to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the big hit game state started from now. As described above, in this embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls every time a game ball wins an attacker (first grand prize opening or second grand prize opening). The maximum 600 (= 15 × 10 × 4) game balls are paid out as prize balls. The number “3000” included in the “3000” plate 6121 shown in FIG. 113 (b) indicates the number of game balls (600) that can be paid out in the 4R probability variation big hit that is generated this time and the 16R big hit that is generated next time. And the total number of game balls that can be paid out (2400).

  Thereafter, when the big hit gaming state starts and the effect mode shifts from the first special mode to the first big hit mode, the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed again on the liquid crystal display device 4 as shown in FIG. (See step S1105 in FIG. 112). The display of the “2400” plate 6110 continues until the big hit gaming state ends.

  Here, the “3000” plate 6121 shown in FIG. 113 (b) and the winning ball number image 6122 shown in FIG. 113 (c) are images that can be displayed only when the 4R probability variation big hit occurs. Therefore, the display of the “3000” plate 6121 and the winning ball number image 6122 is a kind of effect (probability change effect) that can be executed only when the probability change is a big hit. Therefore, when the “3000” plate 6121 and the winning ball number image 6122 are displayed, the “2400” plate 6110, which is also a kind of the certainty change confirmation effect, is displayed (see FIG. 113 (d)). The player is notified of the big hit. As described above, when the “2400” plate 6110 is already displayed at the start of the big hit gaming state, the above-described big hit medium plate acquisition process (see FIGS. 104 to 108) may not be performed.

  Note that the number “600” (the number included in the prize ball number image 6122), which is the difference between “3000” in the “3000” plate 6121 and “2400” in the “2400” plate 6110, is a prize ball in the 4R big hit. According to the number of game balls that can be paid out, in the present embodiment, only 4R probable big hits are provided as 4R big hits that are triggered by the winning of game balls at the second starting port. 4R is not usually a big hit (see FIG. 78 (b) and FIGS. 79A and 79B). From this point of view as well, the player can detect that a promising big hit has been made through the “3000” plate 6121 and the winning ball number image 6122.

  FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which the total number of scheduled acquisitions 6123 and the current number of acquisitions 6124 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The total expected number of acquisitions 6123 corresponds to the number of game balls that the player will be able to acquire at least before entering the normal game state after entering the probability variation game state. Corresponds to the number of game balls already acquired by the player. Although not shown, when the previous big hit gaming state is completed, the total number of scheduled acquisitions 6123 and the current number of acquisitions 6124 are both 2400. In FIG. 113 (d), the current number of acquisitions 6124 remains 2400, while the total number of scheduled acquisitions 6123 is 3000 as the number of acquisitions possible (600) per 4R probability variation is added.

<Direction at the time of a big hit (4800 plates)>
114A to 114C are diagrams showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a V-match big hit occurs.

  FIG. 114A (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG. As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the last special symbol variation is lost. As the reserved image 6131, a first reserved sphere image 6131a, a second reserved sphere image 6131b, a third reserved sphere image 6131c, and a fourth reserved sphere image 6131d are displayed. The first reserved ball image 6131a corresponds to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 6131b corresponds to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 6131c corresponds to the third reserved ball. The fourth reserved ball image 6131d corresponds to the fourth reserved ball. The numbers (1 to 4) in the reserved image 6131 are shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the numbers are not actually displayed.

  114A (b) shows a state in which a special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed in the liquid crystal display device 4 after the state shown in FIG. 114A (a). In the figure, a decorative pattern 6130 that is changing is indicated by an arrow. Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. When the first reserved ball is digested, the second reserved ball is actually displayed as the first reserved ball image 6131a, and the third reserved ball is displayed as the second reserved ball image 6131b. The fourth reserved sphere is displayed as the third reserved sphere image 6131c. For convenience of explanation, the second reserved sphere is shown as the second reserved sphere image 6131b. Are shown as the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball is shown as the fourth reserved ball image 6131d. The same applies to the following description.

  In FIG. 114A (c), after the state shown in FIG. 114A (b), “VVV” (V alignment) is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130. (See step S1111 in FIG. 112). FIG. 114A (d) shows a state where the “4800” plate 6140 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 after the state shown in FIG. 114A (c) (see step S1112 in FIG. 112).

  The “4800” plate 6140 has an appearance in which the number “4800” is drawn on the surface of the plate (plate member), that is, the number “2400” in the “2400” plate 6110 is replaced with the number “4800”. Appearance. The V alignment shows that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114A (d), the jackpot gaming state starts, and the display of the “4800” plate 6140 continues until the jackpot gaming state ends.

  When the big hit gaming state ends, the effect mode becomes the first special mode (see step S1113 in FIG. 112). Even during the first special mode, the “4800” plate 6140 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Similar to the “2400” plate 6110 (see FIG. 113A), during the first special mode, the “4800” plate 6140 is a liquid crystal display device in such a manner that the plate rotates about a straight line in the vertical direction. 4 continues to be displayed.

  In FIGS. 114B (a) and 114 (b), when the big hit gaming state is finished and the first special mode is entered, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The state that the special symbol variation corresponding to the second reserved ball is started from the state is shown. FIG. 114B (c) shows a state where “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 114B (b). 114B (a) to (c), the “4800” plate 6140 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. In FIG. 114B (d), after the state shown in FIG. 114B (c), the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 instead of the “4800” plate 6140 (FIG. 112). Step S1109).

  The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114B (d), the jackpot gaming state starts, and the display of the “2400” plate 6110 continues until the jackpot gaming state ends. When the big hit gaming state ends, the effect mode becomes the first special mode (see step S1110 in FIG. 112). Even during the first special mode, the “2400” plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In FIG. 114C (a) and (b), after the big hit gaming state is finished and the first special mode is entered, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The state that the special symbol variation is started from the state is shown. In the state shown in FIGS. 114C (a) and (b), the reserved image 6131 is not shown and all the reserved balls are digested.

  114C (c) shows a state in which “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 114C (b). In the state shown in FIGS. 114C (a) to 114 (c), the “2400” plate 6110 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, but after the state shown in FIG. 114C (c), “2400” is displayed. The display of the plate 6110 ends (see step S1108 in FIG. 112). As described above, the combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 114C (c), the big hit gaming state starts.

  FIG. 114C (d) shows a state where the plate acquisition mission 6105 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit gaming state. As described with reference to FIG. 111 (d), the plate acquisition mission 6105 may be able to acquire “2400 plates” by operating an effect button (the operation button 2000 or the push button 3000). This is an image for guiding the player. When the mission is successful, the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 111 (f)).

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 114A to 114C, when “VVV” (V alignment) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130, the “4800” plate 6140 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. Is displayed. The V uniform can be stopped and displayed only when the result of the special symbol variation this time is a probable big hit and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one holding ball is a 16R probable big hit (holding run). This is a decorative symbol combination (predetermined symbol combination shown in step S1111 of FIG. 112). If the 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can obtain a prize ball (2400 game balls) corresponding to the 16R jackpot based on the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state based on the 16R probability changing big hit becomes the probability changing gaming state, and, as described above, during the transition from the probability changing gaming state to the normal gaming state, Furthermore, a prize ball (2400 game balls) corresponding to 16R big hit can be obtained. The total number of these is 4800, and the number “4800” included in the “4800” plate 6140 means this.

  In the present embodiment, when the V alignment is stopped and displayed, the result of the special symbol variation this time is a probable big hit, but the number of rounds related to the big win is not particularly limited and is a 16R probable big hit. It may be a 4R probability variation big hit. When the result of the special symbol variation this time is 16R probability variation big hit, the player can acquire a prize ball (2400 game balls) corresponding to 16R big hit based on the 16R probability variation big hit. From the player's point of view, the number “4800” included in the “4800” plate 6140 corresponds to the number of game balls (2400) that can be acquired based on the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the variation and the reserved ball. It can be seen that the total number of game balls (2400) that can be acquired based on the 16R probability variation jackpot is shown. The number “4800” included in the “4800” plate 6140 indicates the number of game balls that can be acquired based on the 16R probability variation big hit corresponding to the change (2400) and the 16R probability variation big hit corresponding to the holding ball. It can also be seen that it indicates the total number of game balls (2400) that can be acquired based on the 16R jackpot that will occur after the.

  In this embodiment, when the V alignment is stopped and displayed, the “4800” plate 6140 is displayed without passing through the plate acquisition mission, and after the display of the “2400” plate 6110 is completed, the plate acquisition mission is successful. Thus, the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed again. However, the plate acquisition mission may be performed before the “4800” plate 6140 is displayed, or when the “2400” plate 6110 is displayed instead of the “4800” plate 6140, the plate acquisition mission is performed. After that, it is also possible to perform an effect as if the “2400” plate 6110 was acquired by performing a plate acquisition mission again.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game is on hold (when the big hits are continuous), the display is switched from the “4800” plate 6140 to the “2400” plate 6110 before the big hit gaming state starts (FIG. 114B ( d)), and a notification that the gaming state after the big hit gaming state has ended is a probabilistic gaming state. On the other hand, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the big hits are not continuous, the combination of the decorative symbols and the display color may notify that the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends will be a probabilistic gaming state. In this case, the “2400” plate 6110 may be displayed before the start of the big hit gaming state. Here, in both cases where the jackpots are continuous and when the jackpots are not continuous, the same effects are performed at the start of the jackpot gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to use the same effect data regardless of whether the big hits are continuous or not, and the capacity for the effect can be reduced.

<Direction at the time of big hit (7200 plates)>
FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a G-match big hit occurs.

  115A shows a state in which the decorative design 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as in FIG. 114A (a). As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the last special symbol variation is lost. The reserved image 6131 includes a first reserved ball image 6131a corresponding to the first reserved ball, a second reserved ball image 6131b corresponding to the second reserved ball, and a third reserved ball corresponding to the third reserved ball. A sphere image 6131c and a fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

  FIG. 115 (b) shows a state in which a special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed after the state shown in FIG. 115 (a). In this example, a freeze effect is performed, the screen is turned off (the screen becomes dark as if it was turned off), and the decorative pattern 6130 that is changing is small (as if the effect is paused and the decorative pattern 6130 changes) Is displayed) as if it were interrupted. Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. Note that the characters “freeze” in the figure are shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the characters are not actually displayed.

  In FIG. 115C, after the state shown in FIG. 115B, “GGG” (G alignment) is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130, and “7200” is displayed. "The plate 6150 is displayed (see step S1114 and step S1115 in FIG. 112). In FIG. 115 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 115 (c), the display of “G-G-G” (G alignment) ends, while “4800” plate 6140 replaces “7200” plate 6150. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1116 in FIG. 112).

  The “7200” plate 6150 has an appearance in which the number “7200” is drawn on the surface of the plate (plate member), that is, the number “2400” in the “2400” plate 6110 is replaced with the number “7200”. Appearance. G uniform shows that the result of this special symbol variation is a big hit. After the state shown in FIG. 115 (d), the big hit gaming state starts, and thereafter, the same image as that when a V-match big hit occurs (see FIGS. 114B and 114C) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. It will be.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 115, when “GGG” (G alignment) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130, the “7200” plate 6150 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. . The G uniform is stopped only when the result of the special symbol variation this time is a 16R probability variation big hit and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one holding ball is a 16R probability variation big hit (holding ream). This is a decorative symbol combination to be obtained (a specific symbol combination shown in step S1114 in FIG. 112). The number “7200” included in the “7200” plate 6150 corresponds to the number of game balls (2400) that a player can acquire based on the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to this special symbol variation, and the reserved ball The player obtains based on the number of game balls (2400) that can be obtained by the player based on the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 16R jackpot that will occur after the 16R probability variation jackpot corresponding to the reserved ball. The total number of game balls that can be played (2400) is shown.

  In this embodiment, the freeze effect is that the result of the special symbol variation this time is 16R probability variation big hit, and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is 16R probability variation big hit (holding ream). This is an effect that can only be executed. That is, in the same way as when the G uniform is stopped and displayed, when the freeze effect is executed, “the result of the special symbol variation this time is 16R probability variation big hit and corresponds to at least one reserved ball. It is determined that the result of the big hit determination is a 16R probability variable big hit (holding ream). However, if the G alignment or the freeze effect is generated alone, the result of the special symbol variation this time is 16R probability variation big hit, and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is 16R probability variation big hit ( Only when both the G uniform and the freeze effect have occurred and the result of the special symbol variation is a 16R probability variation big hit and at least one reserved ball It may be determined that the corresponding big hit determination result is a 16R probability variable big hit (holding ream). The freeze effect may be generated when the G uniform is displayed, or may be generated when the G uniform is not displayed. In addition, when the freeze effect occurs, the G alignment may be displayed without fail, or even when the freeze effect occurs, the G alignment may not be displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the effect modes other than the first special mode (when the determination in step S1101 in FIG. 112 is “No”), when the V alignment or the G alignment is stopped and displayed, the “4800” plate 6140 or “7200” plate 6150 has been described as being displayed. However, in the first special mode, the “4800” plate 6140 or the “7200” plate 6150 may be displayed in the same manner. For example, when the determination in step S1102 of FIG. 112 is “No”, the same processing as the processing in steps S1111 to S1117 is executed, on condition that V alignment and G alignment are not stopped and displayed. The process of step S1107 may be executed. Note that the effect in which the V alignment is stopped and the effect in which the G alignment is stopped can be selected by lottery only in the case of the reservation series. The effect (display of various plates) performed by the process of FIG. 112 may be executed in any effect mode including the normal mode, the time reduction mode, and the big hit mode.

<Granting yellow 7>
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading effect middle yellow 7 giving process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating yellow 7 application process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 118 (a) is a diagram showing a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table. FIG. 118B is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of stocks of yellow 7 and the effect color of the logo cover.

<Pre-reading production medium yellow 7 grant processing>
The pre-reading effect middle yellow 7 giving process shown in FIG. 116 is an effect mode determination process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in response to the winning of a game ball at the second starting port in the second special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)). This is the processing performed in (see step S205 in FIG. 94). The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the game ball has won the second start opening by receiving the second start opening winning hold number increase command (see step S66 in FIG. 84).

  In the pre-reading effect middle yellow 7 giving process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect by performing a lottery based on a random value (step S1201).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it has been determined to perform the pre-reading effect (step S1202). When determining that the pre-reading effect is not determined, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that it is determined to perform the prefetch effect, the sub CPU 330 executes a prefetch effect pattern determination process (step S1203). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the pre-reading effect table and performs a lottery based on a random number value so that one pre-reading effect pattern is selected from the plurality of pre-reading effect patterns (see FIG. 126). It is determined as a look-ahead effect pattern related to the start opening prize.

  Although not illustrated, in the prefetch effect table, a random value range and a prefetch effect pattern are defined in association with each variation pattern type (see FIG. 80). Since the information indicating the variation pattern type is included in the second start opening prize holding number increase command, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the variation pattern type by receiving the second starting opening prize holding number increase command. be able to.

  After executing the process of step S1203, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the yellow 7 effect pattern has been determined as the prefetch effect pattern related to the current second start opening winning (step S1204). The yellow 7 effect pattern is an effect pattern in which an effect relating to the provision of yellow 7 is performed. When determining that the yellow 7 effect pattern has not been determined, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the yellow 7 effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 applied (step S1205). In this process, the sub CPU 330 can give the pre-reading effect related to the current second start opening prize and the special symbol variation performed thereafter by referring to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table (see FIG. 118 (a)). Determine the upper limit of yellow 7.

  In the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), for each of the big hit determination results (“out”, “normal big hit”, and “probability big hit”), the yellow 7 upper limit candidate (“ 1-10 "," 11-20 "," 21-30 "," 31-40 "," 41-50 "," 51-60 "," 61-70 "," 71-80 "," 81- 90 ”,“ 91-100 ”,“ 101-110 ”,“ 111-120 ”,“ 121-130 ”,“ 140 ”,“ 150 ”, and“ 160 ”). It is prescribed.

  In the processing of step S1205, the sub CPU 330 determines one yellow 7 upper limit number candidate by referring to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table and performing a lottery based on a random value. When a plurality of numerical values are included in the determined yellow 7 upper limit number candidate, the sub CPU 330 determines one of the plurality of numerical values as the yellow 7 upper limit number. For example, when the result of the big hit determination is “out of”, the sub CPU 330 determines “41-50” as the yellow 7 upper limit number candidate with a probability of 24/256. In this case, the sub CPU 330 performs a lottery to select one numerical value from “41 to 50”, and determines the selected numerical value as the yellow 7 upper limit number. On the other hand, when only one numerical value is included in the yellow 7 upper limit number candidate, the sub CPU 330 determines that one numerical value as the yellow 7 upper limit number. For example, if the result of the big hit determination is “probable big hit”, the sub CPU 330 determines “150” as the yellow 7 upper limit number candidate with a probability of 16/256. In this case, the sub CPU 330 determines “150” as the yellow 7 upper limit number.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the case of a probable big hit, a larger value is easily determined as the upper limit number of yellow 7 than in the case of a normal big hit or out of place. In particular, “140” and “150” can be determined only in the case of a probable jackpot. In FIG. 118 (a), only one yellow 7 upper limit number determination table is shown, but the yellow 7 upper limit number may be determined using a different yellow 7 upper limit number determination table for each prefetch effect pattern. . For example, in the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), all the numerical values of 130 or less can be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit number, while only “140” and “150” are set for the numerical values of 131 or more. Is shown as being able to be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit number. However, it is also possible to provide a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table that can determine all of the numerical values of 131 or more as the yellow 7 upper limit number, or only a part of the numerical values of 130 or less (for example, 30 to 130). It is also possible to provide a yellow 7 upper limit number determination table in which only a multiple of 10) can be determined as the yellow 7 upper limit number. In the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table shown in FIG. 118 (a), “0” and “160” are indicated as not being determined as the yellow 7 upper limit number, but “0” and “160” are the yellow 7 upper limit numbers. It is good also as providing the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table which can be determined as a number.

  After executing the process of step S1205, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7 imparted in the current prefetch effect (step S1206). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines a numerical value equal to or less than the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 as the number of yellow 7 applied in the current look-ahead effect. Specifically, when the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160), the sub CPU 330 selects 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160 from 1 to 1. One numerical value belonging to the range of N is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as yellow 7 giving number.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that an image corresponding to the number of yellows 7 determined in step S1206 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1207).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the yellow 7 giving number determined in step S1206 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1208). The value of the yellow 7 number counter indicates the number of yellow 7 assigned so far and is stored in the work RAM 332. In the process of step S1208, the sub CPU 330 sets a value obtained by adding the yellow 7 addition number determined in step S1206 to the yellow 7 number counter value stored in the work RAM 332 as a new yellow 7 number counter value. It is stored in the work RAM 332.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1209). Although not shown, a logo cover formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin) is provided around the liquid crystal display device 4, and a logo or the like corresponding to the model is provided on the logo cover. Decorated in the shape of the character shown. A plurality of LEDs are provided on the back side of the logo cover. These LEDs are full-color LEDs, can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green, and can change the effect color of the logo cover.

  The logo cover has an effect color of none, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or rainbow (see FIG. 118B). As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the effect color of the logo cover corresponds to the stock number of yellow 7 (the value of the yellow 7 number counter). In the processing of step S1209, the sub CPU 330 refers to the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 and controls the light emission so that the effect color of the logo cover becomes a color corresponding to the value of the yellow 7 number counter. The production designation information is transmitted to the circuit 337.

  After executing the processing of step S1209, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Fluctuating middle yellow 7 application process>
In the variation yellow 7 giving process shown in FIG. 117, in the second special mode (see FIG. 103 (a)), after the game ball has won the second start opening, the special symbol change related to the start winning starts. Sometimes, this is a process performed by the sub control circuit 33 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94). The sub control circuit 33 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. Although not shown, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub control circuit 33 after the process of step S117 of FIG. 88, for example.

  In the changing yellow 7 providing process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 counter (see step S1208 in FIG. 116) stored in the work RAM 332 is greater than 0 (step S1221). ).

  When it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 0 (that is, when yellow 7 is not given in the pre-reading effect), the sub CPU 330 performs a freeze effect (see FIG. 115) in this special symbol variation. It is determined whether or not (step S1222). Although the detailed description is omitted, the sub CPU 330 performs the special symbol variation this time based on the variation pattern type (see FIG. 80) before the variation yellow 7 adding process shown in FIG. 117 is started. A corresponding variation effect pattern (see FIG. 125) is determined. In the process of step S1222, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern is an effect pattern related to a freeze effect.

  When determining that the freeze effect is not performed in the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 imparted (step S1223). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit number of yellow 7 that can be given in the current special symbol variation by referring to the yellow 7 upper limit number determination table (see FIG. 118A). A specific determination method is the same as the method described in step S1205 of FIG. 116, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  When it is determined in step S1221 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is greater than 0 (that is, when yellow 7 is given in the prefetching effect), or after executing the process of step S1223, the sub CPU 330 The number of yellow 7 applied in the special symbol variation is determined (step S1224). In this process, the sub CPU 330 has a numerical value equal to or smaller than the difference between the yellow 7 upper limit number determined in step S1223 or step S1205 in FIG. 116 and the yellow 7 number counter value (the number of yellows given so far). Is determined as the number of yellow 7 applied in the special symbol variation this time. Specifically, the sub CPU 330 determines that the yellow 7 upper limit number determined in step S1223 or step S1205 in FIG. 116 is N (N is an integer from 1 to 160), and the value of the yellow 7 number counter is M. From 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160, one numerical value belonging to the range of 1 to (N−M) is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as the yellow 7 giving number. In step S1224, even when yellow 7 is given in the pre-reading effect, the number of yellow 7 given in the special symbol change is determined. However, when yellow 7 is given in the pre-reading effect, in the special symbol change May not give yellow 7.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to display an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 determined in step S1224 on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1225).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the yellow 7 giving number determined in step S1224 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1226). In this process, the sub CPU 330 sets the value obtained by adding the yellow 7 addition number determined in step S1224 to the value of the yellow 7 counter stored in the work RAM 332 as a new yellow 7 counter value. Remember me.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow seven number counter (step S1227). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the yellow 7-count counter value stored in the work RAM 332, and the logo cover effect color corresponds to the color corresponding to the yellow 7-count counter value (see FIG. 118B). Thus, the effect designation information is transmitted to the light emission control circuit 337.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S1228). Since the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the result of the jackpot determination by receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. Can do. When determining that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is not a big hit, the sub CPU 330 sets “0” to the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 (the value of the yellow 7 number counter). Is cleared) (step S1229). Then, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the light emission control circuit 337 so as to erase the effect color of the logo cover (turn off the LED) (step S1230). Thereafter, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1222 that the freeze effect is performed in the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7 imparted in the current special symbol variation by performing a lottery based on the random number value (step S1231). ). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines “160” as the number of yellow 7 applied in the current special symbol variation with a probability of 1/2. In addition, when “160” is not determined as the yellow 7 giving number in the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 selects one numerical value from “101 to 159” by further lottery, The selected numerical value is determined as the number of yellow 7 applied in the special symbol variation this time.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 transmits effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that an image corresponding to the number of yellows 7 determined in step S1231 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (step S1232).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the yellow 7 giving number determined in step S1231 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1233). In this process, the sub CPU 330 sets the value obtained by adding the yellow 7 number determined in step S1231 to the value of the yellow 7 counter stored in the work RAM 332 as a new yellow 7 counter value. Remember me.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 changes the effect color around the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1234). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the yellow 7-count counter value stored in the work RAM 332, and the logo cover effect color corresponds to the color corresponding to the yellow 7-count counter value (see FIG. 118B). Thus, the effect designation information is transmitted to the light emission control circuit 337.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160 (step S1235). When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not 160, the sub CPU 330 determines that the upper limit of the yellow 7 added number is “160” (step S1236). When it is determined in step S1235 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160, or after executing the process of step S1236, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118, yellow 7 is given after the game ball has won the second start opening and before the special symbol variation related to the start winning is stopped. In some cases, when yellow 7 is applied, the effect color of the logo cover changes according to the number of yellow 7 applied. The effect color thus changed is inherited even in the big hit gaming state, and in this embodiment, the effect color is not changed during the big hit gaming state.

  Here, as the number of yellows 7 that can be given before the special symbol variation is stopped, a numerical value of 131 or more can be determined only in the case of the probability variation big hit (see FIG. 118 (a)). When the number of yellow 7 is 131 to 159, the effect color of the logo cover is controlled to be gold (see FIG. 118 (b)). Means.

  When the number of yellow 7 is 160, the effect color of the logo cover is controlled to be a rainbow color (see FIG. 118 (b)), and when the freeze effect is performed as described above, With a probability of 1/2, “160” is determined as the number of yellow 7 applied. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 115, in the freeze effect, the result of the special symbol variation this time is the 16R probability variation big hit, and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation big hit ( This is an effect that can be executed only in the case of “holding ream”. In this embodiment, only when the result of the special symbol variation this time is 16R probability variation big hit and the result of big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is 16R probability variation big hit (holding ream), yellow 7 “160” may be determined as the number of grants. Therefore, the effect color of the logo cover becomes iridescent. “The result of this special symbol variation is 16R probability variation big hit, and the result of big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is 16R probability variation big hit ( It means that it is confirmed that it is a “holding ream”.

  In the above description, it has been described that one or more yellows 7 are always given regardless of the result of the big hit determination. However, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, at least one yellow 7 is always given. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, yellow 7 may not be provided. In this case, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the effect color of the logo cover is always one of the colors (blue, green, purple, red, gold, or rainbow). Therefore, the effect color of the logo cover being colorless means that the result of the big hit determination is lost. However, not only when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, but also when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the yellow 7 may not be given. That is, even when the logo cover effect color is colorless (when the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 0), there is a possibility that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit.

<Special character appearance round>
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing round start processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an attacker winning process performed in the sub-control circuit.

<Processing at the start of the round>
The round start time process shown in FIG. 119 is a presentation mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub control circuit 33 when each round game (the first round to the 16th round) starts in the second jackpot mode. It is the process performed in. The sub-control circuit 33 recognizes that the round game starts by receiving a command from the main control circuit 28 corresponding to the start of the round game (the process of opening the big prize opening shown in step S96 in FIG. 87). can do.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the second jackpot mode is a jackpot mode which is shifted when the jackpot gaming state is started in the second special mode. Further, as will be described later, when the big hit gaming state is started in the short time mode B, the mode may be shifted to the second big hit mode.

  In the round start process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the round game started this time is the first round game (step S1241).

  When determining that the round game to be started this time is the first round game, the sub CPU 330 determines whether the value of the yellow 7 counter stored in the work RAM 332 is 160 (step S1242).

  When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 sets special character appearance effect data (step S1243). The special character appearance effect data is effect data corresponding to the special character appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The special character appearance effect is an effect in which a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4. When the number of yellows 7 given to the start of the big hit gaming state is 160 by executing the process of step S1243, a special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit gaming state. Will be displayed.

  After executing the process of step S1243, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1244). The second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the condition for transition to the second special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the second special mode is entered when an effect that can be executed only when the probability variation is a big hit (probability confirmed effect) is performed. To do. The effect of displaying the special character on the liquid crystal display device 4 (the effect for appearance of the special character) is a probability change confirmation effect. If the second special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the second special mode.

  After executing the processing of step S1244, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  When determining in step S1242 that the yellow 7 number counter value is not 160, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the yellow 7 number counter value is greater than 130 (step S1245).

  When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is larger than 130, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data for one notification (step S1246). The one-shot notification effect data is effect data corresponding to the one-shot notification effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The one-shot notification effect includes a special character appearance effect. If the number of yellow 7 given up to the start of the big hit gaming state is 131 or more by executing the process of step S1246, a special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in the first round game. Will be displayed.

  After executing the process of step S1246, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1247). As described above, the second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the condition for transition to the second special mode is satisfied (see step S1244). If the second special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the second special mode.

  After executing the process of step S1247, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  When determining in step S1245 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 130 or less, the sub CPU 330 determines the upper limit of the number of yellow 7 added (step S1248). Here, it is assumed that the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1205 of FIG. 116 or step S1223 of FIG. 117 is N (N is an integer of 1 to 160). In this case, if the current big hit is the normal big hit, the sub CPU 330 selects one numerical value belonging to the range of N to 150 from the numbers 1 to 130, 140, and 150 by lottery. The number is determined as the number of yellow 7 applied. On the other hand, if the current big hit is a probable big hit, the sub CPU 330 selects one numerical value belonging to the range of N to 160 from among 1 to 130, 140, 150, and 160 by lottery, and the selection is made. The number is determined as the number of yellow 7 applied. That is, in the case of a normal big hit, “160” is not determined as the upper limit of the yellow 7 grant number, and “160” can be determined as the upper limit of the yellow 7 grant number in the case of a probable big hit It has become only. If the upper limit of the yellow 7 giving number is 160 before the process of step S1248 is performed (see step S1236 in FIG. 117), the sub CPU 330 sets “160” as the upper limit of the yellow 7 giving number. To maintain.

  When it is determined in step S1241 that the round game started this time is not the first round game, or after executing the process of step S1248, the sub CPU 330 determines that the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 is It is determined whether it is greater than 0 (step S1249).

  When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is greater than 0, the sub CPU 330 sets special round effect data (step S1250). The special round effect data is effect data corresponding to the special round effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. By executing step S1250, special round effects are performed in the round game started this time. As the special round effect, there are provided an aspect in which a special character appears (see step S1267 in FIG. 120) and an aspect in which no special character appears (see step S1269 in FIG. 120). That is, in a special round (a round game in which a special round effect is performed), there is a possibility that both a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 and a special character does not appear.

  After executing the process of step S1250, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1249 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 0, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect data for normal round (step S1251). The normal round effect data is effect data corresponding to the normal round effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. By executing the processing of step S1251, a normal round effect is performed in the round game started this time. As a normal round effect, only a mode in which a special character does not appear is provided, and a mode in which a special character appears is not provided. That is, there is no possibility that a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 in a normal round (a round game in which an effect for a normal round is performed).

  After executing the processing of step S1251, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing when winning an attacker>
The attacker winning process shown in FIG. 120 is performed in the sub-control circuit 33 in response to the game ball having entered the attacker (first big prize opening or second big prize opening) in the round game in the second big hit mode. This is the process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94). The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that the game ball has entered the attacker (the first grand prize winning port or the second big prize winning port) by receiving the attacker winning command. The attacker winning command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub-control circuit 33 in the special winning opening passing detection process (see step S43 in FIG. 83).

  In the attacker winning process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current round game is a special round (step S1261). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not special round effect data (see step S1250 in FIG. 119) is set at the start of the current round game.

  If it is determined that the current round game is a special round, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter stored in the work RAM 332 is greater than 0 (step S1262).

  When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is larger than 0, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so that the image corresponding to “yellow 7” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. (Step S1263). The image corresponding to “yellow 7” is an image in which the numeral “7” is yellowed, and is the same image as the image corresponding to “yellow 7 navigation” (see step S1024 in FIG. 105).

  After executing the processing of step S1263, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current big hit is a probable big hit (step S1264). Since the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 (see step S140 in FIG. 89) includes information indicating the type of jackpot (the symbol command shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B), the jackpot start command is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 330 can recognize the type of jackpot.

  When determining that the current big hit is a probable big hit, the sub CPU 330 executes a special character appearance lottery (step S1265). In this process, the sub CPU 330 decides whether or not to win by performing a lottery based on a random value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a special character appearance lottery has been won (step S1266).

  When determining that the special character appearance lottery is won, the sub CPU 330 sets special character appearance effect data (step S1267). The special character appearance effect data is effect data corresponding to the special character appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The special character appearance effect is an effect in which a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4. By executing the processing of step S1267, the special character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during the special round effect.

  After executing the processing of step S1267, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1268). As described above, the second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the condition for transition to the second special mode is satisfied (see step S1244 in FIG. 119). If the second special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the second special mode.

  If it is determined in step S1264 that the current big hit is not a promising big hit, or if it is determined that the special character appearance lottery is not won in step S1266, the sub CPU 330 sets special character non-appearance effect data. (Step S1269). The special character non-appearance effect data is effect data corresponding to the special character non-appearance effect, and is stored in the program ROM 331. The special character non-appearance effect is an effect in which no special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4. By executing the processing of step S1269, the special character is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 during the special round effect (an image corresponding to the failure of the appearance of the special character is displayed).

  After executing the processing of step S1268 or step S1269, the sub CPU 330 subtracts 1 from the yellow 7 number counter value (step S1270). In this processing, the sub CPU 330 causes the work RAM 332 to store a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the yellow 7-count counter value stored in the work RAM 332 as a new yellow 7-count counter value.

  If it is determined in step S1261 that the current round game is not a special round, if it is determined in step S1262 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 0, or after executing the process of step S1270, The CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter is the same as the upper limit number of yellow 7 (see step S1248 in FIG. 119) (step S1271).

  If it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is the same as the yellow 7 upper limit number, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not the same as the upper limit number of yellow 7, the sub CPU 330 executes a lottery with yellow 7 added (step S1272). In this process, the sub CPU 330 decides whether or not to win by performing a lottery based on a random value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the lottery with yellow 7 is won (step S1273). If it is determined that the lottery is not won by adding yellow 7, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery for yellow 7 is won, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of yellow 7 added (step S1274). In this process, the sub CPU 330 sets a numerical value equal to or smaller than the difference between the upper limit number of yellow 7 determined in step S1248 of FIG. 119 and the value of the yellow 7 number counter (the number of yellow 7 assigned so far) to yellow. 7 is determined as an extra number. Specifically, when the yellow 7 upper limit number determined in step S1248 of FIG. 119 is N (N is an integer from 1 to 160) and the value of the yellow 7 number counter is M, the sub CPU 330 sets 1 to ( One numerical value belonging to the range of (N−M) is selected by lottery, and the selected numerical value is determined as a yellow 7 addition number.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 adds the additional number of yellow 7 determined in step S1274 to the value of the yellow 7 number counter (step S1275). In this processing, the sub CPU 330 sets a value obtained by adding the number of yellow 7 addition determined in step S1274 to the value of the yellow 7 counter stored in the work RAM 332 as a new yellow 7 counter value. Remember me.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 added determined in step S1274 and an image corresponding to the value of the yellow 7 number counter after the processing in step S1275. The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1276).

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160 (step S1277). When determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not 160, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 sets the second special mode transition flag to ON (step S1278). The second special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that the condition for transition to the second special mode is satisfied. As described with reference to FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the second special mode is entered when an effect that can be executed only when the probability variation is a big hit (probability confirmed effect) is performed. To do. When the value of the yellow 7 number counter reaches 160, an image corresponding to the number “160” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 (see step S1276), and the number image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The effect to be performed is a probability change confirmation effect. If the second special mode transition flag is set to ON at the end of the big hit gaming state, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the second special mode.

  When the value of the yellow 7 number counter reaches 160, the special character appearance effect may or may not be performed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S1277 that the value of the yellow 7 number counter is 160, the sub CPU 330 may or may not set the special character appearance effect data. Further, the sub CPU 330 may or may not perform the process of step S1243 in FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1278, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  In FIG. 120, on the condition that Yellow 7 is added to the winning lottery after subtracting the value of the yellow 7 number counter in accordance with the winning to the attacker (the first grand prize opening or the second big prize opening). Although the addition is performed, the value of the yellow 7 number counter may be subtracted after the addition of yellow 7.

<Yellow 7 grant effect>
FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 giving effect performed when the result of the special symbol variation is a big hit. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the yellow 7 imparting effect performed when the result of the special symbol variation is loss.

  121A and 122A show a state in which the yellow 7 number 6200 is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131. FIG. The current yellow 7 number 6200 is an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7s assigned so far (the value of the yellow 7 number counter). 121 (a) and 122 (a), “0” is currently displayed as the yellow number 7200. Similarly to FIG. 114A, as the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the last special symbol variation is lost. As the reserved image 6131, a first reserved sphere image 6131a, a second reserved sphere image 6131b, a third reserved sphere image 6131c, and a fourth reserved sphere image 6131d are displayed.

  121 (b) and 122 (b), when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed after the state shown in FIGS. 121 (a) and 122 (a), The state where the yellow 7 number 6200 and the yellow 7 applied number 6201 are currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is shown. The yellow 7 applied number 6201 is an image corresponding to the number of yellow 7 applied in the current special symbol variation (see step S1224 in FIG. 117). 121 (b) and 122 (b), “50” is displayed as the yellow 7 application number 6201, indicating that 50 yellow 7s have been applied in this special symbol variation. Due to the fact that 50 yellows 7 are given, “50” is currently displayed as the number of yellows 7200. As in FIG. 115 (b), the decorative pattern 6130 being changed is displayed small, and the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears with the digestion of the first reserved ball, and the second reserved ball image 6131b. A third reserved ball image 6131c and a fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed.

  In FIG. 121 (c) and FIG. 122 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 121 (b) and FIG. 122 (b), the display of the yellow 7 applied number 6201 is finished, but instead of the yellow 7 applied number 6201. This shows how the decorative pattern 6130 being changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

  121D shows a state in which “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 121C. The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. On the other hand, FIG. 122D shows a state in which “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 122C. . The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“2-3-2”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a loss.

  In FIG. 121 (d), “50” is currently displayed as yellow 7 number 6200. That is, the current yellow 7 number 6200 is the same number (50) as the yellow 7 applied number 6201 shown in FIG. 121B, and the current yellow 7 number 6200 shown in FIG. 121B is maintained. On the other hand, in FIG. 122 (d), “0” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200, indicating that the 50 yellow 7s assigned in FIG. 122 (b) have disappeared. . That is, 50 yellow 7 grants have been canceled because the result of the special symbol variation this time is lost (see step S1229 in FIG. 117).

<Direction during the second jackpot mode>
FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device during the second jackpot mode.

  In the second big hit mode, as long as there is unconsumed yellow 7, an image of yellow 7 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time a game ball wins an attacker (first big prize opening or second big prize opening). (Refer to step S1263 of FIG. 120). Although not shown in the drawing, the yellow 7 image is an image in which the number “7” is yellowed, similarly to the yellow 7 image 6100 (see FIG. 111A), and falls from above in the liquid crystal display device 4. It is displayed in such a manner.

  Each time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed (see step S1270 in FIG. 120). As described above, in this embodiment, one round game is completed on condition that ten game balls have won the attacker (the maximum number of game balls that can be won by the attacker in one round game). According to this, a maximum of 10 yellows 7 are consumed in one round game.

  FIG. 123A shows a state in which the big hit gaming state starts after the state shown in FIG. 121D and “50” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow number 7200. In this example, the current big hit is 16R big hit, and the remaining number of round games is 16R. In FIG. 123, the characters corresponding to the number of remaining rounds are shown for ease of explanation, and the character image may not be actually displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (b), “20” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow number 7200 at the time when the fourth round game starts after the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). Show. After the state shown in FIG. 123A, the round game is played three times, so that the remaining number of round games is 13R. In addition, the yellow 7 number 6200 is reduced by 30 from the number (50) shown in FIG. 123A due to the consumption of 30 yellows 7 during the round game.

  123 (c) shows that “0” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow number 7200 at the time when the sixth round game starts after the state shown in FIG. 123 (b). Show. After the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), the round game is played twice, so that the remaining number of round games is 11R. In addition, since 20 yellows 7 are consumed while the round game is played twice, the current yellow 7 number 6200 is reduced by 20 from the number (20) shown in FIG. 123 (b).

  As described above, in the first to fifth round games, the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time a game ball wins an attacker (first grand prize opening or second grand prize opening). Each time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed, and if it is a probable big hit, a special character appearance lottery is performed (see step S1265 in FIG. 120). . If the special character appearance lottery is won, a special character appears. The appearance of a special character is a kind of effect (probability change effect) that can be executed only when the probability change is a big hit. That is, in the first to fifth round games, there is a possibility that the player can be informed that a probable big hit has occurred through the appearance of a special character.

  On the other hand, all of the 50 yellows 7 granted until the big hit gaming state is started are consumed in the first to fifth round games, and the unconsumed yellow 7 is created when the sixth round game starts. The number (the value of the yellow 7 number counter) is 0. In this example, yellow 7 is not added in the first to fifth round games, and thereafter yellow 7 is not added in the sixth to tenth round games. In the sixth to tenth round games, the state where the number of yellow 7 that has not been consumed (the value of the yellow 7 number counter) is 0 continues, and during that time, the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. No special characters will appear.

  Thereafter, in the eleventh round game, 10 yellow 7s are added (see step S1275 in FIG. 120). FIG. 123 (d) shows a state where “10” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow number 7200 at the time when the twelfth round game starts. After the state shown in FIG. 123C, the remaining number of round games is 5R because the round game is played six times. Further, by adding 10 yellows 7, the current yellow 7 number 6200 is increased by 10 from the number (0) shown in FIG. 123 (c).

  Thus, in the twelfth round game, a yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 every time a game ball wins an attacker (a first grand prize opening or a second big prize opening). Each time the yellow 7 image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, one yellow 7 is consumed, and if it is a probable big hit, a special character appearance lottery is performed (see step S1265 in FIG. 120). . As a result, in the twelfth round game, similar to the first to fifth round games, there is a possibility that the player can be informed that a probable big hit has been achieved through the appearance of a special character. .

  After the state shown in FIG. 123 (d), it is assumed that the big hit gaming state is completed without adding yellow 7. FIG. 123 (e) shows a state where “0” is currently displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the yellow number 7200 at the time when the big hit gaming state ends. The 10 yellows 7 added in the 11th round game are all consumed in the 12th round game, and when the jackpot gaming state ends, the number of yellows 7 not consumed (the value of the yellow 7 number counter) is , 0. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit number of yellow 7 that can be granted is 160 (see step S1248 in FIG. 119), the number of yellow 7 consumed in one round game is 10 Then, when the 16R big hit ends, the unconsumed yellow 7 number (the value of the yellow 7 number counter) is always 0. If a situation occurs in which an unconsumed yellow 7 number (yellow 7 counter value) remains, the yellow 7 counter value may be cleared when the big hit gaming state ends. However, the value of the yellow 7 counter may be carried over after the end of the big hit gaming state.

<Direction at the time of big hit (freeze production)>
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a freeze effect occurs in the second special mode.

  FIG. 124A shows a state in which the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131 are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as in FIG. 115A. As the decorative symbol 6130, the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the result of the last special symbol variation is lost. The reserved image 6131 includes a first reserved ball image 6131a corresponding to the first reserved ball, a second reserved ball image 6131b corresponding to the second reserved ball, and a third reserved ball corresponding to the third reserved ball. A sphere image 6131c and a fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

  FIG. 124 (b) shows a state in which a special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed after the state shown in FIG. 124 (a). In this example, a freeze effect is performed, the screen is turned off, and the changing decorative pattern 6130 is displayed in a small size. Further, with the digestion of the first reserved ball, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. Note that the characters “freeze” in the figure are shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the characters are not actually displayed.

  124 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 124 (b), the first accessory device 4000 (see FIG. 1) at a position corresponding to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (near the approximate center of the opening 1h). ) Shows a state where the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are slid until they approach each other (see FIG. 70). As described in the first embodiment, in this state, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are directed forward. In the present embodiment, the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 is decorated with the letters “GAME”, and the second surface 4412 of the upper rotating decorative body 4410 has “BONUS”. The decoration corresponding to the character "is given. In FIG. 124 (c), when the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are close to each other, the decoration applied to the second surface 4212 of the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410. The external appearance which united with the decoration given to the 2nd surface 4412 of this is formed. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the English word “BONUS GAME” and can grasp that the big hit gaming state starts.

  In FIG. 124D, after the state shown in FIG. 124C, the first accessory device 4000 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 1), and the current yellow 7 number 6200 and yellow 7 applied number 6201 are displayed on the liquid crystal display. The state displayed on the device 4 is shown. “160” is displayed as the yellow 7 giving number 6201, which indicates that 160 yellow 7s were given in the current special symbol variation (see step S1231 in FIG. 117). Due to the fact that 160 yellow 7s have been assigned, “160” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200. The fact that “160” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200 and that “160” is displayed as the yellow 7 added number 6201 is an effect that can be executed only when it is a probable big hit (probable change confirmed effect). It is a kind of. As a result, the player is notified that the probable big hit has been won.

  In FIG. 124 (e), after the state shown in FIG. 124 (d), the display of the yellow 7 applied number 6201 ends, while the decorative pattern 6130 that is changing is replaced with the liquid crystal display device 4 instead of the yellow 7 applied number 6201. It shows how it is displayed. FIG. 124 (f) shows a state where “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 124 (e). The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit.

  As a result, the big hit gaming state starts, and a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit gaming state (see step S1243 in FIG. 119). In the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the game state is shifted to the big hit game state via the freeze effect as shown in FIG. 124, the case where the one-notification effect (see step S1246 in FIG. 119) is performed or the special character appears. When a special character has already appeared, such as when a lottery (see step S1265 in FIG. 120) is won, the attacker winning process (see FIG. 120) may not be performed.

<Variation production pattern (for second special mode)>
FIG. 125 is a diagram for describing a specific aspect of the variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern shown in FIG. 125 is a pattern of various effects that can occur when special symbol variation is performed in the second special mode.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “1” to “7”, an effect is given to release the character hold (a character corresponding to the hold ball appears). The character hold may occur in the special symbol variation this time or may occur before the special symbol variation.

  Specifically, in the production pattern corresponding to the production number “1”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and the production that fails to release the character hold is performed in the first step. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “2”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is given as the second step. In the step, an effect that fails to cancel the character hold is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “3”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is given as the second step. After the step is successful, the character hold release is further encouraged as a third step, and an effect that the character hold release is failed in the third step is performed.

  In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “4”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is given as the second step. After the step is successfully completed, the release of the character hold is further encouraged as the third step. After the third step is succeeded, the character that has appeared is scolded to complete the character, and the character is completed (FIG. 124 (c)). ) See)), and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “5”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is given as the second step. After the step is successfully completed, the release of the character hold is further encouraged as the third step. After the third step is succeeded, the character that has appeared is scolded to complete the character, and the character is completed (FIG. 124 (c)). (See)) will be performed.

  In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “6”, the character hold release is given as the first step, and after the first step is successful, the character hold release is given as the second step. After the step is successfully completed, the release of the character hold is further encouraged as the third step. After the third step is succeeded, the character that has appeared is scolded to complete the character, and the character is completed (FIG. 124 (c)). )) Once, but after that, the completion of the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)) is successful, and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “7”, the release of the character hold is given as the first step, and after the success of the first step, the release of the character hold is given as the second step. After the step is successfully completed, the release of the character hold is further encouraged as the third step. After the third step is succeeded, the character that has appeared is scolded to complete the character, and the character is completed (FIG. 124 (c)). ))), But the appearance of the specific character is scolded, and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed.

  The effects corresponding to the effect numbers “4” and “6” are effects that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number “7” is an effect that may occur when the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is performed in the second special mode. When the button production during the production is successful, the game shifts to a jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character. The jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character is a jackpot mode different from the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “8” to “12”, an effect is given inviting the appearance of a predetermined character (first predetermined character, second predetermined character, or third predetermined character). Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “8”, the appearance of the predetermined character is beaten, and the effect of failing to appear the predetermined character is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “9”, the appearance of the predetermined character is scolded, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the accessory is scolded and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107). Displayed and successful in completing the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)), an effect is given in which yellow 7 is given. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “10”, the appearance of the predetermined character is scolded, and after the successful appearance of the predetermined character, the completion of the accessory is scolded and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107). An effect that is displayed and fails to complete the accessory (see FIG. 124C) is performed.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “11”, the appearance of the predetermined character is scolded, and after the successful appearance of the predetermined character, the completion of the accessory is scolded and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107). Displayed, and once the completion of the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)) has failed, but after that, the completion of the accessory (see FIG. 124 (c)) is successful and yellow 7 is given. Is called. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “12”, the appearance of the predetermined character is scolded, and after the appearance of the predetermined character is successful, the completion of the accessory is scolded and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107). Although it is displayed and the completion of the combination (see FIG. 124C) fails, the appearance of the specific character is scolded, and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed again.

  The effects corresponding to the effect numbers “9” and “11” are effects that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number “12” is an effect that may occur when the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is performed in the second special mode. When the button production during the production is successful, the game shifts to a jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character. The jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character is a jackpot mode different from the first jackpot mode and the second jackpot mode.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “13” to “17”, an effect of entering the predetermined zone is performed. Specifically, in the production pattern corresponding to the production number “13”, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the first step, and the production that fails to enter the predetermined zone in the first step is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “14”, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is carried out in the second step. An effect that fails is performed.

  In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “15”, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is carried out in the second step. After being successful (reached by two character designs), the three character designs were beaten, and the three character designs were successfully completed, and the character was completed (FIG. 124 (c)). See), and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “16”, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is carried out in the second step. After successful completion (reach two character designs and reach), the three character designs are beaten, and an effect of failing to match the three character designs is performed.

  In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “17”, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the first step, the entry into the predetermined zone is given as the second step, and the entry into the predetermined zone is carried out in the second step. After successfully succeeding (reach two character designs and reach), the three character designs are beaten, and the three character designs fail once, but then the three character designs succeed. At the same time, the accessory is completed (see FIG. 124 (c)), and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed.

  The effects corresponding to the effect numbers “15” and “17” are effects that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode. If the symbol corresponding to the special character is a temper, the big hit is determined. When symbols corresponding to other characters are tempered, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the character type.

  In the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “18” to “19”, the production of the appearance of the button is performed. If a button appears, yellow 7 is always given. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “18”, the appearance of the button is beaten, and the effect of failing to appear the button is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “19”, the appearance of the button is beaten, and after the button is successfully displayed and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, Regardless of), an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number “19” is an effect that may occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “20”, after the freeze effect (see FIG. 124B and FIG. 128C) is performed, the accessory is completed (FIG. 124C and FIG. 128). d) See), and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number “20” is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “20” can also be selected in the time reduction mode B.

<Prefetch effect pattern (for second special mode)>
FIG. 126 is a diagram for describing a specific mode of the prefetch effect pattern. The prefetch effect patterns shown in FIG. 126 are patterns of various prefetch effects performed in the second special mode.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “101” to “106”, an effect is generated in which a crack that is torn on the liquid crystal display device 4 is generated. If the screen breaks from the crack and yellow 7 pops out, it will be a success. The productions corresponding to the production numbers “101” to “106” are productions that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening winning is performed in the second special mode.

  Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “101”, an effect that fails to pop out yellow 7 in the first special symbol variation is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “102”, the yellow 7 is successfully popped out in the first special symbol variation, and the effect of giving the yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “103”, the result of the yellow 7 popping out is not obtained in the first special symbol variation, and the effect of failing to pop out the yellow 7 in the second special symbol variation is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “104”, the result of yellow 7 jumping out is not obtained in the first special symbol variation, and yellow 7 is successfully ejected in the second special symbol variation, and yellow 7 is given. Production is performed.

  In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “105”, no result is obtained for the jumping out of yellow 7 in the first special symbol variation, and no result is produced in the second special symbol variation for the jumping out of yellow 7. In the special symbol variation of, production that fails to jump out of yellow 7 is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “106”, no result is obtained for the jumping out of yellow 7 in the first special symbol variation, and no result is produced in the second special symbol variation for the jumping out of yellow 7. In the special symbol variation, yellow 7 jumps out successfully, and an effect is given in which yellow 7 is given.

  As described above, in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126, an example of the effect pattern has been described. In the present embodiment, other production patterns such as a specific hold production pattern, a specific item production pattern, a flashback production pattern, and a cut-in production pattern are provided.

  The specific hold effect pattern is an effect pattern that occurs when a special symbol change is performed for a specific hold (holding ball on which a specific image is displayed). In the specific hold effect pattern, an effect is given in which yellow 7 is given when the special symbol variation corresponding to the specific hold starts. In the specific item effect pattern, an effect is given in which yellow 7 is given when a specific item appears. The lottery for deciding whether or not a specific item appears is performed separately from the lottery for selecting a variation effect pattern or a lookahead effect pattern, and the appearance of a specific item occurs when special symbol variation is performed However, this may occur at various timings during the second special mode.

  In the flashback effect pattern, an effect that the character's flashback occurs at the start of the special symbol variation is performed. Thereby, the expectation generation | occurrence | production expectation degree of the character which appeared by the flashback increases. Note that the character may change across prefetch effects. In the cut-in effect pattern, an effect in which the specific character cuts in is performed. The more the effect is generated, the higher the expected occurrence of the effect that the specific character appears after the reach loss. Note that the effect may occur as a prefetch effect.

<Processing in short time mode B>
FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the processing in the time reduction mode B performed in the sub control circuit.

  127. During the time-saving mode B shown in FIG. 127, in the time-saving mode B (see FIG. 103 (a)), after the game ball has won the first starting port or the second starting port, the special symbol variation related to the starting winning is changed. This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 33 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) when the process ends (when the effect based on the variable effect pattern (see FIG. 125) ends).

  As described with reference to FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the time-saving mode B may be transferred via the time-saving mode A or may be directly transferred from the big hit mode to the time-saving mode B. is there. In the present embodiment, when neither the transition condition to the first special mode nor the transition condition to the second special mode is satisfied during the big hit mode (when the certain change finalizing effect is not performed), the time reduction mode A and the time reduction It is determined by lottery which mode of mode B is to be shifted to. For example, in the second big hit mode, a special character appearance effect (step S1267 in FIG. 120), which is a kind of a certainty change confirmation effect, and other certainty change confirmation effects (for example, “160” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the current yellow number 7). If the display effect) is not performed, there is a possibility of shifting to the time-saving mode B after the end of the second jackpot mode.

  In the processing in the time-saving mode B, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is a jackpot (step S1281). Since the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 28 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 330 recognizes the result of the jackpot determination by receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. Can do.

  If it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, it is determined whether or not a freeze effect has been performed in the current special symbol variation (step S1282). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the effect pattern related to the freeze effect (refer to the effect number “20” shown in FIG. 125) is determined as the change effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change.

  When determining that the freeze effect has been performed in the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 shifts the effect mode to the second jackpot mode (step S1283). On the other hand, when determining that the freeze effect is not performed in the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 sets the effect mode to a big hit mode other than the second big hit mode (for example, the first big hit mode or the big hit mode corresponding to the specific character). (Step S1284). In the processing of step S1283 or step S1284, the sub CPU 330 updates the information stored in the effect mode flag storage area from the information corresponding to the short-time mode B to the information corresponding to the destination jackpot mode. After executing the processing of step S1283 or step S1284, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1281 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is not a big bonus, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not a point acquisition effect has been performed in the current special symbol variation (step S1285). . In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not an effect pattern related to the point acquisition effect is determined as the change effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change. The effect pattern related to the point acquisition effect is a variable effect pattern that can be selected in the short-time mode B (see FIG. 129), and when the point acquisition effect is performed, the second special mode transition point is given. There is a possibility. The number of second special mode transition points to be given is determined by lottery from 1 to 1000.

  When it is determined that the point acquisition effect is not performed in the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the point acquisition effect has been performed in the current special symbol variation, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of second special mode transition points (the number of points granted) to be provided in the current point acquisition effect. The value is added to the value of the second special mode transition point counter (step S1286). The value of the second special mode transition point number counter indicates the number of second special mode transition points given so far, is stored in the work RAM 332, and is cleared when the time reduction mode B ends. In the processing of step S1286, the sub CPU 330 sets a value obtained by adding the number of points awarded in the current point acquisition effect to the value of the second special mode transition point number counter stored in the work RAM 332 as a new second value. The value is stored in the work RAM 332 as the value of the special mode transition point counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the value of the second special mode transition point number counter is 1000 (step S1287). When determining that the value of the second special mode transition point number counter is not 1000, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the second special mode transition point number counter is 1000, the sub CPU 330 transitions the effect mode to the second special mode (step S1288). In this process, the sub CPU 330 updates the information stored in the effect mode flag storage area from the information corresponding to the time reduction mode B to the information corresponding to the second special mode. After executing the processing of step S1288, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Direction at the time of big hit (freeze production)>
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a freeze effect occurs in the time reduction mode B. FIG.

  FIG. 128A shows a state in which the point display meter 6210 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 together with the decorative symbol 6130 and the reserved image 6131. The point display meter 6210 is an image corresponding to a meter indicating the number of second special mode transition points given so far (the value of the second special mode transition point counter). In the point display meter 6210, the blacked out portion corresponds to the number of points for shifting to the second special mode that has been given so far. The decorative symbol 6130 is displayed in a small size, and the symbol combination “2-3-2” is stopped and displayed, indicating that the previous special symbol variation has been lost. The reserved image 6131 includes a first reserved ball image 6131a corresponding to the first reserved ball, a second reserved ball image 6131b corresponding to the second reserved ball, and a third reserved ball corresponding to the third reserved ball. A sphere image 6131c and a fourth reserved sphere image 6131d corresponding to the fourth reserved sphere are displayed.

  In FIG. 128 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is performed, the point grant number 6211 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. It shows how it is. The number of points given 6211 is an image corresponding to the number of points for transition to the second special mode given in the special symbol variation this time. In FIG. 128 (b), “23” is displayed as the number of points awarded 6211, indicating that 23 points for the second special mode transition were given in the current special symbol variation. Due to the provision of the second special mode transition point, the number of second special mode transition points (black portion) indicated by the point display meter 6210 is larger than that in FIG. 128 (a). As the first reserved ball is digested, the first reserved ball image 6131a disappears, and the second reserved ball image 6131b, the third reserved ball image 6131c, and the fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed.

  FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which a freeze effect is performed after the state shown in FIG. 128 (b). Similarly to FIG. 124 (b), in this state, the screen is turned off and the decorative pattern 6130 that is changing is displayed small. The characters “Freeze” in the figure are shown for easy understanding of the explanation, and the characters are not actually displayed. In FIG. 128 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (c), the first accessory device 4000 (see FIG. 1) at a position corresponding to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 4 (near the approximate center of the opening 1h). ) Shows a state where the lower rotating decorative body 4210 and the upper rotating decorative body 4410 are slid until they approach each other (see FIG. 70). Similarly to FIG. 124 (c), in this state, the player can visually recognize the English word “BONUS GAME” and can grasp that the big hit gaming state starts.

  In FIG. 128 (e), after the state shown in FIG. 128 (d), the first accessory device 4000 returns to the initial state (see FIG. 1), and the current yellow 7 number 6200 and yellow 7 applied number 6201 are displayed on the liquid crystal display. The state displayed on the device 4 is shown. “160” is displayed as the number of yellow 7 applied 6201, which indicates that 160 yellow 7 were applied in the special symbol variation this time. Due to the fact that 160 yellow 7s have been assigned, “160” is currently displayed as the yellow 7 number 6200. Thus, in the present embodiment, even when the freeze effect occurs in the time reduction mode B, yellow 7 is given in the same manner as when the freeze effect occurs in the second special mode (see FIG. 124) ( Although not shown, the same processing as the processing in steps S1231 to S1236 in FIG. 117 is performed).

  In the present embodiment, the yellow 7 is given in the time reduction mode B only when the freeze effect is generated, and is not limited to the case where the freeze effect is generated. It is good also as giving yellow 7 when is materialized. In the example shown in FIG. 128, when yellow 7 is displayed, the point display meter 6210 disappears. However, when yellow 7 is applied, the point display meter 6210 becomes MAX (full tank). The point display meter 6210 may be displayed as it is.

  FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which “1-1-1” is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as a combination of the decorative symbols 6130 after the state shown in FIG. 128 (e). The combination of the decorative symbols 6130 (“1-1-1”) indicates that the result of the special symbol variation this time is a big hit. As a result, the big hit gaming state starts and the effect mode becomes the second big hit mode (see step S1283 in FIG. 127), and a special character appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 from the beginning of the big hit gaming state. (See step S1243 in FIG. 119). As described above, in the freeze effect, the result of the special symbol variation this time is the 16R probability variation big hit, and the result of the big hit determination corresponding to at least one reserved ball is the 16R probability variation big hit (holding ream). This is an effect that can only be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 128, the case where 160 yellows 7 are given is described, but when the number of yellows 7 given is less than 160, a freeze effect occurs in the second special mode. In the same manner as described above, the player is informed that the probable big hit has been made through a one-shot announcement effect (see step S1246 in FIG. 119), a special character appearance lottery (see step S1265 in FIG. 120), and the like. Will be.

<Production pattern (for short-time mode B)>
FIG. 129 is a diagram for describing a specific aspect of the effect pattern. The effect patterns shown in FIG. 129 are patterns of various effects that can occur in the time reduction mode B.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “201” to “204”, the hold is opened, and an effect of acquiring an item coming out of the hold is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “201”, an effect that succeeds in acquiring the item is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “202”, after the item acquisition is beaten for a short time, an effect that succeeds in the item acquisition is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “203”, the acquisition of the item is beaten for a short time, and after the acquisition of the item is beaten for a long time, the effect of successful item acquisition is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “204”, the acquisition of the item is beaten for a short time, and after the acquisition of the item is beaten for a long time, a predetermined symbol is displayed and the production numbers “206” to “209” are displayed. An effect that develops into an effect pattern corresponding to "is performed.

  There are multiple types of items. Among the multiple types of items, there are items for acquiring points for the second special mode transition (items for acquiring points) and production numbers “210” to “211”. Items for generating the corresponding effects, items for increasing the occurrence probability of the effects, and the like are included. Which item of a plurality of types of items to acquire is determined in advance by lottery. When the item for acquiring points is acquired, the number from 1 to 1000 is determined by lottery as the number of second special mode transition points to be given.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “205” to “209”, an effect is given that encourages the character to operate in a predetermined manner (open the shutter). Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “205”, the appearance of the name (title) of the effect is beaten, and the effect of failing to appear the title is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “206”, the appearance of the title is beaten, and after the title appears, the opening of the shutter is beaten, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. The opening is successful, the accessory is completed (see FIG. 128 (d)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is performed.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “207”, the appearance of the title is beaten, and after the title appears, the opening of the shutter is beaten, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. An effect that fails to open the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “208”, the appearance of the title is beaten, and after the title appears, the opening of the shutter is beaten, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. Although the prying once fails, after that, the accessory is completed (see FIG. 128 (d)), and an effect of giving yellow 7 is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “209”, the appearance of the title is beaten, and after the title appears, the opening of the shutter is beaten, a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and the shutter is displayed. Although the opening is unsuccessful, the appearance of the specific character is scolded and the button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed.

  The effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “205” to “209” are effect patterns corresponding to special symbol fluctuations. Among the effects related to these effect patterns, the effects corresponding to the effect numbers “206” and “208” are effects that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the second start opening prize is performed in the time-saving mode B. It is. The said effect pattern is an effect pattern which can be selected when the result of jackpot determination is a big hit, and when the said effect pattern is selected, it transfers to the 2nd big hit mode. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to the effect number “209” is an effect that can occur when the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning is performed in the time reduction mode B. When the button production during the production is successful, the game shifts to a jackpot mode corresponding to the specific character.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “210” to “211”, an effect in which the specific item appears is performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “210”, after the specific item appears, the effect that the logo corresponding to the second special mode appears is performed. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “210” is selected, the process proceeds to the second special mode. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “211”, after the specific item appears, the accessory is completed during the next special symbol change (see FIG. 128 (d)), and the effect of giving yellow 7 is provided. Done. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “211” is selected, the mode shifts to the second jackpot mode. As described above, when yellow 7 is given (displayed), the mode may shift to the second big hit mode, or may shift to the second special mode. Note that the lottery for determining whether or not a specific item appears is performed separately from the lottery for selecting a variation effect pattern or a prefetch effect pattern. It may occur at various timings in the time reduction mode B, not limited to

  In the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “212” to “213”, when the number of special symbol changes performed after the big hit gaming state has ended reaches a specific number (95 times) (the final in the time reduction mode B) In the special symbol variation), an effect of encouraging the transition to the second special mode is performed. Specifically, the countdown starts when the 92nd special symbol variation ends after the big hit gaming state ends, and the remaining number of times may be 3 when the 92nd special symbol variation ends. When the 93rd special symbol variation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 that the remaining number of times is 2, and when the 94th special symbol variation is completed, the remaining number is displayed. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 that the number of times is 1, and when the 95th special symbol variation is completed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 that the remaining number is 0.

  Then, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “212”, after the 95th special symbol variation is completed, the door is closed and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. 2 The special mode transition point reaches 1000 points (the point display meter 6210 shown in FIG. 128 is full), and an effect is produced in which the special character appears by opening the door. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “212” is selected, the process proceeds to the second special mode. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “213”, after the 95th special symbol variation is finished, the door is closed and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed. Fails to open the door, and the second special mode transition point does not reach 1000 points (for example, the point display meter 6210 reaches 999 points and 1000 points have been reached, but 1000 points have failed) The production is performed. When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “213” is selected, the process shifts to the normal mode.

<Kroon winning process>
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a Kroon winning process performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing processing in the time reduction mode B (1) performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing processing in the time reduction mode B (2) performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing normal mode processing performed in the sub-control circuit. FIG. 134 (a) is a diagram showing a probability variation suggesting sound effect determination table. FIG. 134 (b) is a diagram showing a probability variation suggesting lamp effect determination table. FIG. 134 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit reliability suggestion effect determination table.

  The Kroon winning time process shown in FIG. 130 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub-control circuit 33 when a game ball has entered the general winning opening 1013. The sub-control circuit 33 can recognize that a game ball has entered the cron (general winning opening 1013) by receiving the cron prize command. The Kroon winning command is transmitted from the main control circuit 28 to the sub-control circuit 33 in the general winning opening passing detection process (see step S42 in FIG. 83).

  Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the game board 1 is provided with a croon that is a dish-like member. The croon is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view, and is configured such that a game ball can roll on the upper side surface thereof. The upper side surface of the croon is formed into a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the center. A hole is formed in the center of the upper side surface, and the hole constitutes a general winning opening 1013. Unlike FIG. 1, the general winning opening 1013 may be provided below the position where the starting winning opening 1009 is disposed.

  In the Kroon winning process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current production mode is the time reduction mode B (see FIG. 103A) (step S1301). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 332, and the sub CPU 330 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can do.

  When determining that the current effect mode is the time reduction mode B, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the time reduction mode B (1) (step S1302). In the present embodiment, as the time reduction mode B, the time reduction mode B (1) and the time reduction mode B (2) are provided.

  Specifically, the short time mode B (1) is the short time mode B for shifting from the second big hit mode, and the short time mode B (2) is the short time mode B for changing from the big hit mode other than the second big hit mode. That is, when the production mode is shifted from the second big hit mode to the short time mode B, the short time mode B is the short time mode B (1), and a big hit mode other than the second big hit mode (for example, the first big hit mode). When the production mode is shifted from the short time mode B to the short time mode B, the short time mode B is the short time mode B (2). On the contrary, when the production mode is shifted from the first big hit mode to the short time mode B, the short time mode B is the short time mode B (1), and a big hit mode other than the first big hit mode (for example, In the case where the production mode is shifted from the second big hit mode) to the short time mode B, the short time mode B may be the short time mode B (2).

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the current effect mode is the time reduction mode B (1), the sub CPU 330 executes processing in the time reduction mode B (1) (step S1303). The processing in the time reduction mode B (1) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current effect mode is not the time-saving mode B (1), the sub CPU 330 executes processing in the time-saving mode B (2) (step S1304). The processing in the time reduction mode B (2) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined in step S1301 that the current effect mode is not the time reduction mode B, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 103A) (step S1305).

  When determining that the current effect mode is the normal mode, the sub CPU 330 executes a process during the normal mode (step S1306). The normal mode processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S1303, step S1304, or step S1306, or when determining in step S1305 that the current effect mode is not the normal mode, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Short-time mode B (1) Medium processing>
131 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 33 in step S1303 of FIG. 130.

  In the processing in the time reduction mode B (1), first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (the special symbol is currently changing) (step S1321). In this process, after the special symbol variation starts, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired. The sub CPU 330 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. Further, since the fluctuation pattern designation command includes information indicating the fluctuation pattern type (see FIG. 80), the sub CPU 330 recognizes the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern by receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. be able to.

  When determining that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol is changing, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the reach effect pattern is determined as the changing effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S1322). Reach effect patterns are displayed in the form of a reach (two of the decorative symbols on the left, the decorative symbol on the right, and the decorative symbol on the center are displayed with the same symbol stopped. The remaining one decorative symbol is variably displayed). Although not shown, when the variation pattern designation command is received, the sub CPU 330 determines one variation effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol variation by performing a lottery based on the random value with reference to the variation effect table. . In the variation effect table, a random value range is defined for each of the plurality of variation effect patterns. The plurality of variation effect patterns include a plurality of types of reach effect patterns. In the process of step S1322, the sub CPU 330 determines whether any one of the plurality of types of reach effect patterns has been determined as a change effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change.

  When determining that the reach effect pattern has not been determined, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reach effect pattern has been determined, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is a predetermined effect timing (step S1323). The predetermined performance timing is a timing at which the decorative symbol is displayed in a reach manner. That is, in the process of step S1323, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the decorative symbol is already displayed in the reach mode. Here, after the special symbol variation (decorative symbol variation display) is started, the time (reach timing) until the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode varies depending on the type of the reach effect pattern. The program ROM 331 stores reach timing for each reach effect pattern. In the process of step S 1323, the sub CPU 330 refers to the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern among the reach timings stored in the program ROM 331, so that the special symbol variation starts and then reaches the reach timing. It is judged whether it has reached.

  When determining that the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern has not been reached, the sub CPU 330 executes a probability change suggestion effect determination process (step S1324). In this process, the sub CPU 330 refers to the probability variation suggestion sound effect determination table (see FIG. 134 (a)) to determine the content of the probability variation suggestion sound effect by performing a lottery based on a random number value, and also confirms the probability variation suggestion. With reference to the lamp effect determination table (see FIG. 134 (b)), the content of the probability change suggesting lamp effect is determined by performing a lottery based on a random value.

  In the probability variation suggestion sound effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (a), the contents of probability variation suggestion sound effects (“no effect” and “probability confirmed sound” for each of “probability game state” and “non-probability variable game state”. A lottery value corresponding to “production”) is defined. “Probability change sound effect” is, for example, a sound output from a speaker when a medal is paid out in a predetermined pachislot machine. As shown in FIG. 134 (a), when the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state, “no effect” is determined with a probability of 240/256, and “probability confirmed sound effect” with a probability of 16/256. Is determined. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state, “no effect” is always determined.

  In the probability change suggestion lamp effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (b), the contents of the probability change suggestion lamp effect (“no effect”, “first lamp” for each of “probability change game state” and “non-probability change game state”. The lottery values corresponding to “effect” and “second lamp effect”) are defined. The “first lamp effect” is an effect in which the lamp is turned on in the first mode (for example, blinking a predetermined number of times). The “second lamp effect” is an effect in which the lamp is turned on in the second mode (for example, blinking more times than a predetermined number). As shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, “no effect” is determined with a probability of 224/256, and “first lamp effect” with a probability of 16/256. Is determined, and the “second lamp effect” is determined with a probability of 16/256. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a non-probability variable gaming state, “no effect” is determined with a probability of 224/256, and “first ramp effect” is determined with a probability of 32/256. The “second lamp effect” is not determined.

  After executing the process of step S1324, the sub CPU 330 sets effect data corresponding to the effect content determined in step S1324 (step S1325). That is, when the “probability change sound effect” is determined as the probability change suggestion sound effect, the sub CPU 330 sets effect data corresponding to the probability change confirmation sound effect, and the “first lamp effect” or “first” as the probability change suggestion lamp effect. When “2 lamp effect” is determined, the sub CPU 330 sets effect data corresponding to the determined lamp effect. When “no effect” is determined for both the probability change suggestion sound effect and the probability change suggestion lamp effect, the sub CPU 330 does not set the effect data. Production data corresponding to each production content is stored in the program ROM 331.

  When the process of step S1325 is executed, if both the probability variation confirmed sound effect and the lamp effect (first lamp effect or second lamp effect) occur, the probability variation confirmed sound effect and the lamp effect (first lamp effect or first lamp effect). When only one of the two lamp effects is generated, a variation is produced in which neither the sound effect nor the lamp effect occurs. The probability variation confirmed sound effect and the second lamp effect are effects that can occur only when the current game state is the probability variation game state. When at least one of these effects is performed, the probability variation game state It is confirmed that there is.

  After executing the processing of step S1325, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1323 that the reach timing corresponding to the current reach effect pattern has been reached, the sub CPU 330 executes a jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination process (step S1326). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the content of the jackpot reliability suggestion effect by performing a lottery based on a random value with reference to the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table (see FIG. 134C).

  In the jackpot reliability suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 134 (c), the contents of the jackpot reliability suggestion effects (“first sound effect”, “second sound effect” for each of “hit” and “out”. ”,“ 3rd sound effect ”,“ 4th sound effect ”,“ 5th sound effect ”,“ 6th sound effect ”,“ 7th sound effect ”, and“ 8th sound effect ”) Value is specified. The “first sound effect” to “eighth sound effect” are effects in which sound is output from the speaker in different modes.

  After executing the process of step S1326, the sub CPU 330 sets effect data corresponding to the effect content determined in step S1326 (step S1327). Production data corresponding to each production content is stored in the program ROM 331. By performing the process of step S1327, any one of “first sound effect” to “eighth sound effect” is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 134 (c), when the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is a jackpot, the “first sound effect” to the “eighth sound effect” have the same probability ( 8192/65536). On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is out of place, “first sound effect”, “second sound effect”, “third sound effect”, “fourth sound effect”, “ The probability of selection in the order of “fifth sound effect”, “sixth sound effect”, “seventh sound effect”, and “eighth sound effect” decreases. As a result, “first sound effect”, “second sound effect”, “third sound effect”, “fourth sound effect”, “fifth sound effect”, “sixth sound effect”, “seventh sound effect” ”And“ eighth sound effect ”, the jackpot reliability when the effect is performed is high.

  The jackpot reliability is a probability that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot when one performance is performed. According to FIG. 134 (c), it can be expected that the case where the second sound effect is performed is larger than the case where the first sound effect is performed, and the case where the second sound effect is performed is expected. The third sound effect can be expected to be a big hit, and the fourth sound effect is expected to be a big hit rather than the third sound effect. Can be expected to be a big hit when the fifth sound effect is performed than when the fourth sound effect is performed, and the sixth sound effect is performed than when the fifth sound effect is performed. It can be expected that the winner will be a big hit, and the seventh sound production can be expected to be a big hit when the sixth sound production is performed. It can be expected that the case where the eighth sound effect is performed is a big hit than the case where it is performed. In particular, the eighth sound effect is an effect that can be generated only when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and when the eighth sound effect is performed, the big sound effect is determined. The eighth sound effect may be the same effect as the certainty fixed sound effect (see FIG. 134 (a)), or may be a different effect.

  After executing the processing of step S1327, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Short time mode B (2) Medium processing>
132 is a process performed by the sub control circuit 33 in step S1304 in FIG. 130.

  In the processing in the time reduction mode B (2), first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1341). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started, as in step S1321 of FIG.

  When determining that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol variation is in progress, the sub CPU 330 determines that the number of special symbol variations (including the current special symbol variation) performed after the big hit gaming state has ended is equal to or less than a predetermined number (50 times). It is determined whether or not (step S1342). Since the variation pattern designation command includes information indicating the value of the short-time state variation number counter (see FIG. 90), the sub CPU 330 receives the variation pattern designation command, so that the sub CPU 330 finishes the big hit gaming state. It is possible to recognize the number of special symbol changes made from

  If the sub CPU 330 determines that the number of special symbol changes performed after the big hit gaming state has ended is equal to or less than a predetermined number (50 times), the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of steps S1343 and S1344. The processes in steps S1343 and S1344 are the same as the processes in steps S1324 and S1325 in FIG. 131, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 330 determines that the number of special symbol changes performed after the big hit gaming state has ended is greater than the predetermined number (50 times), the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of steps S1345 and S1346. Since the processes in steps S1345 and S1346 are the same as the processes in steps S1326 and S1327 in FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the process of step S1344 or step S1346, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing during normal mode>
The normal mode processing shown in FIG. 133 is processing performed by the sub control circuit 33 in step S1306 of FIG. 131.

  In the normal mode processing, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S 1361). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern related to the special symbol variation has expired after the special symbol variation has started, as in step S1321 of FIG.

  When determining that the special symbol is not changing, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol is changing, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the current effect mode is the normal mode (1) (step S1362). In the present embodiment, the normal mode (1) and the normal mode (2) are provided as the normal mode. The normal mode (1) and the normal mode (2) differ in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, the normal mode (1) is a normal mode that shifts from the short-time mode B when the short-time game state is ended by the special symbol variation being performed 50 times or 95 times after the big hit game state is ended. In other words, when the production mode transitions from the short-time mode B to the normal mode triggered by the fact that the short-time gaming state has ended by the special symbol variation being performed 50 times after the big hit gaming state has ended, the normal mode is Normal mode (1). In addition, when the production mode transitions from the short-time mode B to the normal mode triggered by the fact that the short-time gaming state has ended by the special symbol variation being performed 95 times after the big hit gaming state has ended, the normal mode is Normal mode (1). The big hit with 50 or 95 time reductions is usually only a big hit (see FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B), and in these cases, it is determined that the game state is not probable. The normal mode (1) is a normal mode in which it is determined that the game state is a non-probability game state.

  On the other hand, the normal mode (2) is a normal mode that shifts from the short-time mode A when the short-time gaming state is ended by the special symbol variation being performed five times after the big-hit gaming state is ended, or the big-hitting gaming state This is a normal mode that shifts from the time-saving mode B when the time-saving gaming state is ended by performing the special symbol variation 35 times after the time is finished. That is, when the production mode transitions from the short-time mode A to the normal mode triggered by the fact that the short-time gaming state is ended by the special symbol variation being performed five times after the big hit gaming state is ended, the normal mode is Normal mode (2). In addition, when the production mode transitions from the short-time mode B to the normal mode triggered by the completion of the short-time gaming state by performing the special symbol variation 35 times after the big hit gaming state is ended, the normal mode is Normal mode (2). As the big hits with 5 or 35 time reductions, both normal big hits and probability variable big hits are provided (see FIG. 79A and FIG. 79B). Becomes difficult to distinguish. The normal mode (2) is a normal mode in which it is not determined which game state is the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S1362 that the current effect mode is the normal mode (1), the sub CPU 330 executes the processes in steps S1363 and S1364. The processes in steps S1363 and S1364 are the same as the processes in steps S1326 and S1327 in FIG. 131, and thus description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S1364, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current effect mode is not the normal mode (1) (the normal mode (2)), the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the effect selection flag is set to ON (step S1365). ). In the present embodiment, as a normal mode (2), when a game ball wins a crone during a special symbol variation, a mode in which only a probability variation suggestion effect among a probability variation suggestion effect and a jackpot reliability suggestion effect can be performed; Similar to the time reduction mode B (1) (see FIG. 131), the content of the production (which effect is to be performed between the probable change suggestion effect and the jackpot reliability suggestion effect) differs according to the timing when the game ball wins the crone. Mode (effect selection mode) is provided. The player can select to play the game in the effect selection mode, and the effect selection flag is turned on when a button operation for performing the game in the effect selection mode is performed by the player. Set to

  When determining that the effect selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 330 executes the processes of steps S1366 and S1367. Since the processes in steps S1366 and S1367 are the same as the processes in steps S1324 and S1325 in FIG. 131, the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1367, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 330 executes a normal mode process during effect selection (step S1368). The sub CPU 330 executes processing similar to the processing in steps S1322 to S1327 in FIG. That is, if the sub CPU 330 determines that the reach effect pattern is determined as the variation effect pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 330 determines the probability change suggestion effect (FIG. 134 (a ) And FIG. 134 (b)) or a jackpot reliability suggesting effect (see FIG. 134 (c)) is determined, and effect data corresponding to the determined effect content is set. As a result, if the game ball wins the croon before reaching the reach timing corresponding to the current reach production pattern, a probable suggestion effect is performed, while the game ball wins the croon after reaching the reach timing. In this case, a jackpot reliability suggestion effect is performed. After executing these processes, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  Although it has been described that it is determined that the game state is the probability variation game state when at least one of the probability variation confirmed sound effect and the second lamp effect is performed (see FIGS. 134 (a) and 134 (b)). ), The probability variation suggestion may be an effect suggesting probability variation reliability (latency probability expectation). That is, a plurality of types of effects are provided as probability variation suggestion effects, and the plurality of types of effects can be executed both in the case of the probability variation gaming state and in the case of the non-probability variation gaming state and are the probability variation gaming state. Depending on whether or not, the probability that each effect is selected may be different from each other.

<Production pattern (for short-time mode A)>
FIG. 135 is a diagram for describing a specific aspect of the effect pattern. The effect patterns shown in FIG. 135 are various fluctuating effect patterns that can occur in the time reduction mode A.

  In the effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “301” to “306”, an effect in which the character operates in a predetermined manner (opens the door) is performed. The countdown is performed from the start of the time reduction mode A, and the number (timer) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 gradually decreases from 60. If the character can open the shutter by the time the number reaches 0, the game is successful (continuation of the short-time gaming state or big hit).

  The production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “301” to “303” are generated when the first, second, third, or fourth special symbol variation is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished. It is a production to get. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “301”, the timer related to the countdown is displayed small, and the effect of successfully opening the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “302”, the timer related to the countdown is displayed small, and the effect of failing to open the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “303”, the countdown timer is displayed in a small size, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed.

  The effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers “304” to “306” are effects that can occur when the special symbol variation is performed for the fifth time after the big hit gaming state is finished. Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “304”, the timer related to the countdown is displayed large, and the effect of successfully opening the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “305”, the timer related to the countdown is displayed large, and an effect that fails to open the door is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “306”, a timer related to the countdown is displayed large, and a button image (see step S1066 in FIG. 107) is displayed, and an effect of successfully opening the door is performed.

  The production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “301”, “303”, “304”, and “306” are the number of special symbol fluctuations in which the short-time gaming state can be continued after the last jackpot gaming state is completed, that is, This is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous jackpot (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is more than five, or when the result of the jackpot determination related to the current special symbol variation is a jackpot. . When the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a big hit, when these effect patterns are selected, after the effect is finished, the game shifts to the big hit mode. When the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous jackpot (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is more than five times, and the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is lost, these effect patterns When is selected, the time transition mode B is entered after the production is finished.

  The effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “302” is a case where the number of time reductions (see step S170 in FIG. 91) corresponding to the previous jackpot is more than 5 times or more than 5 times, and is related to the current special symbol variation. This is an effect pattern that can be selected when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. When the production number “302” is selected, the time reduction mode A is maintained after the production is finished. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “305”, the number of time reductions corresponding to the previous jackpot (see step S170 in FIG. 91) is five, and the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is lost. It is an effect pattern that can be selected in some cases. When the production number “305” is selected, after the production is finished, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

<Direction during short-time mode A>
136 is a diagram showing a series of images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the time reduction mode A. FIG.

  FIG. 136A shows a state in which the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The remaining time limit 6300 is an image corresponding to a number (timer) indicating the remaining time (remaining time limit) of the time limit (60 seconds) given for the character to open the shutter. When the time reduction mode A is started, “60.00” is displayed large as the remaining time limit 6300 in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), after the time reduction mode A is started, the special symbol variation has not been performed yet. In this state, the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed to the second decimal place. In FIG. 136 (a), “58.68” is shown as the remaining time limit 6300, but in actuality, the numbers after the decimal point change at a high speed and are therefore visually recognized by the player. Have difficulty.

  FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which about 5 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (a). In this state, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the first special symbol variation is performed, and an effect is performed in which the character tries to open the door. Specifically, the door 6301 (the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L) is displayed, and a gap 6302 is displayed between the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L. In the figure, the door 6301 is indicated by diagonal lines for easy understanding. In addition, actually, a part of the character's body trying to open the door 6301 by hooking a finger on the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L is also displayed, but this is not shown. The remaining time limit 6300 is displayed as small as “53. ↓” in the lower right portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. Since the first digit after the decimal point changes at high speed, it is indicated by an arrow in the figure. Although not shown, the decorative pattern 6130 (see FIG. 128) that is changing is also displayed small.

  FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which about 7 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (b). In this state, the first special symbol variation is completed, and the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed largely in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4 as in FIG. 136 (a). FIG. 136 (d) shows a state in which about 9 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (c). In this state, the second special symbol change is performed, and the character is trying to pry open the door. Similarly to FIG. 136 (b), the right door 6301 </ b> R and the left door 6301 </ b> L are displayed, and the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed small in the lower right portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  After that, “2nd special symbol change end” → “3rd special symbol change start” → “3rd special symbol change end” → “4th special symbol change start” → “4th special symbol change start” ”. Meanwhile, as in FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (d), enlarged display and reduced display of the remaining time limit 6300 are repeated. FIG. 136 (e) shows a state before the fifth special symbol variation starts after the fourth special symbol variation ends. In this state, the remaining time limit 6300 is displayed largely in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG. 136 (f) shows a state in which about 3 seconds have elapsed after the state shown in FIG. 136 (e). In this state, the fifth special symbol change is performed, and an effect is provided in which the character tries to open the door. As the remaining time limit 6300, “8” is displayed in a gap 6302 formed between the right door 6301R and the left door 6301L. In this embodiment, when the remaining time limit becomes less than “10”, the remaining time limit 6300 is “9” → “8” → “7” → “6” → “5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” are sequentially displayed, and the countdown is performed.

  In the above, it has been described that the time limit given for the character to open the shutter is 60 seconds. The time limit generally corresponds to the time required for the special symbol variation to be performed five times. However, in practice, the time required for the special symbol variation to be performed five times may be longer than 60 seconds, depending on the timing at which the start opening prize is generated and the variation time of the special symbol (the length of the variation effect). It ’s short. Therefore, by appropriately adjusting the speed of subtracting the integer part number in the remaining time limit 6300, the timing at which the fifth special symbol variation ends coincides with the timing at which the remaining time limit 6300 becomes “0”. May be. As described above, since the number after the decimal point in the remaining time limit 6300 is changing at high speed, even if such adjustment is performed, it can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity. Thus, for example, when the first special symbol variation ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to “48”, and when the second special symbol variation ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to “36”. When the special symbol variation ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to “24”, and when the fourth special symbol variation ends, the remaining time limit 6300 is set to “12”, and when the fifth special symbol variation ends. It is possible to set the remaining time limit 6300 to “0”.

<Hold change effect (1) execution process>
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a hold change effect (1) execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

  The hold change effect (1) execution process shown in FIG. 137 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 94) by the sub control circuit 33 in a predetermined effect mode.

  In the holding change effect (1) execution process, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the candle flame is newly lit (step S1401). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, images corresponding to a predetermined number (5) of candles are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 in a predetermined effect mode. These candles are not initially lit, but each time a predetermined lighting condition is met, a new one is lit. As the predetermined lighting condition, a condition that a predetermined variation effect pattern is selected, a condition that a predetermined prefetch effect pattern is selected, and a lottery for selecting the variation effect pattern and the prefetch effect pattern are performed separately. The conditions for winning a lottery are set. In the process of step S1401, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not such a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied (whether or not the number of candles that have been lit is increased).

  When it is determined that the candle flame is not newly lit, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the candle flame is newly lit, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not the number of candles lit by the flame is a predetermined number (step S1402). If the sub CPU 330 determines that the number of candles lit is not a predetermined number, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of candles lit by the flame is a predetermined number, the sub CPU 330 causes the liquid crystal display device 4 to display an image such that a predetermined item falls and collides with one holding ball. The effect designation information is transmitted to the display control circuit 335 (step S1403). As an image corresponding to the holding ball, in addition to the first holding ball image 6131a, the second holding ball image 6131b, the third holding ball image 6131c, and the fourth holding ball image 6131d (see FIG. 114A), this special time The reserved ball image 6132 (see FIG. 139) corresponding to the symbol variation is displayed. By executing the process of step S1403, an image in which a predetermined item is inserted into one of the five reserved ball images flows. The sub CPU 330 determines the one reserved ball image that is a target to be stabbed by a predetermined item before executing the process of step S1403 (before the flame is lit on all five candles). Until all the candles of the book are lit, it is impossible to know which reserved ball image is the one held ball image (which held ball image is pierced).

  Then, the sub CPU 330 transmits the effect designation information to the display control circuit 335 so as to change the display mode of the one holding ball image in which the predetermined item collides (step S1404). Thereby, for example, the color of one reservation ball image changes, or a character or a character appears on the reservation ball image. The display mode of these reserved ball images suggests the jackpot reliability (see FIG. 134 (c)). That is, when the display mode of one reserved ball image is changed, the probability that the result of the big hit determination corresponding to the reserved ball is a big hit is relatively increased. In other words, the effect pattern related to the hold change is more easily selected when the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold ball is a big win than when the result of the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold ball is lost. It is a production pattern. Moreover, as a display mode of the retained ball image after the change, a plurality of display modes are provided, and the big hit reliability can be suggested depending on which display mode is changed. For example, when the process of step S1404 is executed, the color of one reserved ball image may be changed to a color (red, gold, or rainbow color) having a reliability greater than or equal to red (see FIG. 118 (b)). After executing the processing of step S1404, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

<Hold change effect (2) execution process>
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a hold change effect (2) execution process performed in the sub-control circuit.

  The hold change effect (2) execution process shown in FIG. 138 is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 of FIG. 94) by the sub control circuit 33 in the predetermined effect mode. The hold change effect (2) includes a change in display mode (hold change) in the hold ball image and a display of the prophecy (a position where the prophecy (paper-like image) falls from above in the liquid crystal display device 4) This is an effect that suggests a big hit reliability by the number of sheets). In the holding change effect (2) execution process, a scenario relating to the presence or absence of the holding change and the pre-reading notice is determined, and when a holding change occurs thereafter, the specific change depends on the color of the holding ball. It is determined what kind of notice effect will be performed.

  Specifically, first, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is time to perform a lottery at the time of winning (step S1421). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is the timing when the game ball has won the first start port or the second start port. The sub CPU 330 receives the first start opening prize hold number increase command (see step S58 in FIG. 84) or the second start opening prize hold number increase command (see step S66 in FIG. 84), thereby performing the first start. It can be recognized that the game ball has won the mouth or the second starting port.

  If it is determined that it is time to perform a lottery at the time of winning, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not a pre-reading effect has been won (step S1422). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is determined to perform the pre-reading effect as a result of the lottery based on the random value. When determining that the pre-reading effect is not won, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the pre-reading effect is won, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding the pre-reading notice corresponding to the holding ball related to the winning at the current first start port or the second start port (step S1423). Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding whether or not to generate a change in hold, whether or not to operate (vibrate) the hold ball in a manner that suggests the change in hold, and the number of prophets and the like (step S1424). ). And according to the result of the scenario lottery performed in step S1423 and step S1424, sub CPU330 determines the effect pattern corresponding to one scenario by lottery as a prefetch effect pattern corresponding to the said holding | maintenance ball (step S1425). . Thereafter, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1421 that it is not the time to perform the lottery at the time of winning, the sub CPU 330 determines whether it is the time to perform the lottery at the time of change (step S1426). In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not it is time to start the special symbol variation. The sub CPU 330 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 330 determines that it is not time to perform the lottery at the time of change, the sub CPU 330 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the time to perform the lottery at the time of change, the flow (strength) of the production in the current special symbol change is lottery according to the result of the lottery (holding change) performed in steps S1423 to S1425. (Step S1427). The strength of the production is a concept that depends on the high degree of reliability of the production and the flashiness. If the strength of the production is “strong”, there is a possibility that a pending change will occur in this special symbol variation. Becomes relatively high. Next, the sub CPU 330 determines whether or not there is a pending change in the special symbol variation this time by lottery. If there is a pending change, the sub CPU 330 determines whether there is a pre-reading effect and the result of the lottery (flow lottery) performed in step S1427. Based on this, the color of the reserved ball that is finally displayed as a result of the hold change is determined by lottery for each timing at which the hold change can occur (step S1428). Further, in this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the number of prophecies to be displayed as the gasse effect when the result of the big hit determination corresponding to the current special symbol variation is lost.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 determines, based on the result of the flow lottery, by lottery for each type of pseudo-continuous at which timing in the pseudo-continuous is generated (step S1429). Next, the sub CPU 330 determines, by lottery, which production causes the hold change to occur with respect to the timing at which the hold change occurs (step S1430). When the hold change occurs twice, the process performed in step S1430 is performed for the second hold change. In this process, the sub CPU 330 determines the position where the prophecy book falls (falls) from above.

  Next, the sub CPU 330 performs a scenario lottery regarding the timing and the number of times the lottery of the advancing direction of the prophecy is performed (step S1431). Next, the sub CPU 330 determines by lottery the number of prophecy books to be dropped based on the maximum number of prophecy books to be dropped from above and the number of prophecy books that have already fallen (stored) (step S1432). ). Thereafter, the sub CPU 330 ends this subroutine. By configuring as described above, it is possible to create a sense of randomness related to the pending change and the display of the prophecy, while reducing the amount of effect data to be managed as compared with the case of storing the effect data for each scenario.

<Countdown production>
FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating an example of a countdown effect.

  In FIG. 139, an hourglass effect is shown as an example of the countdown effect. The hourglass effect is an effect for counting down the appearance of the countdown target effect. The countdown target effect is an effect that suggests a big hit reliability or a probability variation reliability, and is an effect that is continuously performed over a certain period of time.

  Specifically, FIG. 139 (a) shows a state where the hourglass image 6311 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 when the special symbol variation is performed. The hourglass image 6311 is an image simulating an hourglass, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 on the condition that it is determined that the countdown target effect is performed. FIG. 139 (a) shows a state about one minute before the countdown target effect starts. In FIG. 139 (a), the reserved ball image 6132 corresponding to the current special symbol variation is displayed, and a prophecy image 6310 corresponding to the prophecy (see FIG. 138) is also displayed. Although not shown, the decorative pattern 6130 that is changing is also displayed small (see FIG. 128).

  FIG. 139 (b) shows a state 8.5 seconds before the countdown target effect starts. In this state, the remaining time 6312 is displayed above the hourglass image 6311 in the liquid crystal display device 4. The remaining time 6312 is an image corresponding to a number indicating the remaining time until the countdown target effect starts. When the remaining time until the countdown target effect starts is less than 10 seconds, the remaining time 6312 is displayed, and the number indicated by the remaining time 6312 gradually decreases. The remaining time 6312 is displayed to the second decimal place, but as with the remaining time limit 6300 (see FIG. 136), the number after the decimal point changes at a high speed and is therefore visible to the player. Have difficulty. In FIG. 139 (b), the reserved ball image 6132 is displayed, and as the number of held balls increases from the state shown in FIG. 139 (a), the first reserved ball image 6131a and the second reserved ball are displayed. An image 6131b, a third reserved ball image 6131c, and a fourth reserved ball image 6131d are displayed. After the state shown in FIG. 139 (b), when the number indicated by the remaining time 6312 becomes “0”, the countdown target effect is started.

<Production pattern (Production reliability suggestion)>
FIG. 140 is a diagram for describing a specific aspect of the effect pattern.

  In the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “401” to “405”, the reliability (production reliability) that a bird appears on the liquid crystal display device 4 and shifts to a predetermined production depending on the flight mode of the bird is suggested. Possible performance is performed.

  Specifically, in the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “401”, a bird flies within the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 (appears so as to cross the screen), and then the bird flies off the screen as it is. Production is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “402”, after a bird appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 and appears to fly to the front, the bird flies off the screen as it is. Production is performed.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “403”, after a bird appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 and appears to fly forward, the bird moves in the screen for a short time. An effect of flying is performed. In the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “404”, after a bird appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 and appears to fly to the front, the bird is displayed on the screen for an intermediate period of time. An effect of flying inside is performed. In the production pattern corresponding to the production number “405”, after a bird appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 4 and flies forward, the bird moves in the screen for a long time. An effect of flying is performed.

  In the productions corresponding to the production numbers “403” to “405”, after the bird repeatedly flies through the screen (the flight is looped), it shows a state of thrusting into the back, and whether or not to shift to a predetermined production Results are displayed. When the time for which the bird flies within the screen is long, it is possible to shift to a predetermined effect with a higher probability than when the time for the bird to fly within the screen is short. That is, when the time for which the bird flies within the screen is long, the production reliability is basically higher than when the time for the bird to fly within the screen is short. When a bird flies within the screen, it rises stepwise (moves to a higher position within the screen) one or more times. Here, although not shown, while the bird is flying in the screen, the production reliability is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4. The production reliability increases gradually as the bird rises.

  Specifically, when any one of the production patterns corresponding to the production numbers “403” to “405” is selected, the liquid crystal display device according to the selected production pattern (flight time of the bird) The initial value of the production reliability displayed in 4, the production reliability that can finally be reached, and the number of times the bird rises are determined by lottery (scenario lottery). When the effect pattern corresponding to the effect number “405” is selected, the location where the bird rises (position in the screen) is also determined by scenario lottery.

Here, the initial value of the production reliability displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is P%, the production reliability that can finally be reached is Q%, and the number of times the bird rises is N times. At this time, the production reliability displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 is updated (added) every time the bird rises, and therefore, N additions are performed. Of the N added values, the (N-1) added values are determined by lottery, and the remaining one added value is calculated using the values of P and Q. For example, if the value of the production reliability added in the rise of the Kth time (K is 1 to N) is R _K , P + (R ₁ + R ₂ +... + R _N−1 + R _N ) = Q. . R ₁ ~R _N-1 is determined by the lottery, _{R N may} be configured to be calculated by _{Q-P- (R 1 + R} 2 + ··· + R N-1). When P = 0, the value of P may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as the production reliability.

  The pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to perform an effect of informing the number of gaming values that can be acquired by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51809). reference).

  The present inventor thinks that, in the process of conducting earnest examinations regarding the notification effects regarding the number of game values as described above, it is possible to create new entertainment properties by devising the notification method. It came to.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit) When,
A granting means for granting game value;
An informing means for informing (displaying a plate) about the number of game values that can be given by the giving means,
In the specific game state, a first specific game state capable of giving a first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) and a second predetermined number of game values (600 game balls) are given. A second specific gaming state that can be performed,
The notification means includes
First notification means (sub CPU 330 that executes the processing of step S1082 in FIG. 108) capable of performing notification (display of “2400” plate) regarding the first predetermined number when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. When,
After the notification regarding the first predetermined number is performed by the first notification means, the second predetermined condition is satisfied before the first predetermined number of game values are given by the first specific gaming state. In this case, second notification means (the process of step S1103 in FIG. 112) is performed which can perform notification (display of “3000” plate) regarding the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. Sub CPU 330),
The third notification means (not shown in FIG. 112) capable of performing notification regarding the first predetermined number after the second notification means performs notification regarding the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number. Sub CPU330) that executes the process of step S1105,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, there is provided a first specific gaming state (16R big hit) that can be given a first predetermined number of gaming values (2400 gaming balls), When the first predetermined condition is satisfied, a notification regarding the first predetermined number (display of “2400” plate) can be performed. On the other hand, a second specific gaming state (4R big hit) that can be given a second predetermined number of game values (600 game balls) is provided, and a notification regarding the first predetermined number ("2400" plate If the second predetermined condition is established before the first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) are given after the display of the first display number), the first predetermined number (2400) Notification regarding the total number with the second predetermined number (600) (display of “3000” plate) is performed, and then notification regarding the first predetermined number (display of “2400” plate) can be performed again. It is configured. Thus, by notifying the number of game values that can be given, it is possible to cause undulations in the player's psychological state and improve the interest of the game.

  In the second embodiment, once a probability variation jackpot has occurred and a transition is made to the probability variation gaming state, the player acquires a prize ball (2400 gaming balls) corresponding to 16R jackpot until the transition to the normal gaming state. Explained as being able to. The probability variation big hit corresponds to the first predetermined condition in the present invention. In addition, when the 4R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can obtain a prize ball (600 game balls) corresponding to the 4R jackpot. The 4R probability variation big hit corresponds to the second predetermined condition in the present invention. The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition in the present invention are not limited to these examples, and arbitrary conditions can be appropriately adopted. Each of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition may be a probable big hit, a normal big hit, or a small hit, and the number of rounds is not particularly limited. The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition include a condition that a predetermined decorative symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a condition that a game ball wins a predetermined winning opening, a pre-reading effect, etc. A condition that a predetermined effect (for example, an effect corresponding to a big hit) is performed may be employed.

  In the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine. For example, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination that triggers a game state transition or a symbol combination related to a small role) is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined symbol (for example, a bonus symbol or an AT lottery) Condition) is determined as an internal winning combination, a condition that a predetermined number of unit games are performed, a condition for transitioning to a bonus gaming state such as BB or MB, a condition for transitioning to an RT gaming state, an AT gaming state The transition condition to (ART game state), the transition condition to the ART addition game state (game state in which the number of ARTs is added), etc. can be adopted as the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. .

  In the second embodiment, the first predetermined number is 2400 and the second predetermined number is 600. As the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, any number can be appropriately adopted, and the first predetermined number may be larger than the second predetermined number, or the second predetermined number is the first predetermined number. The first predetermined number and the second predetermined number may be the same number.

(A-2) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit) When,
A granting means for granting game value;
An informing means for informing (displaying a plate) about the number of game values that can be given by the giving means,
When the specific gaming state occurs a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the first predetermined number of game values (2400) in the Mth (M is an integer of 1 or more) specific gaming state among the plurality of specific gaming states. A plurality of gaming balls), while a second predetermined number of gaming values (2400 gaming balls) are given in the Nth (N is an integer greater than M) specific gaming state. May be possible,
The notification means includes
First notifying means capable of performing notification (display of “4800” plate) regarding the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number (sub-steps for executing the processes of steps S1112 and S1116 in FIG. 112) CPU330),
After the first notification means notifies the total number of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, the notification regarding the second predetermined number (display of “2400” plate) can be performed. Second notification means (sub CPU 330 that executes the process of step S1109 of FIG. 112),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) occurs a plurality of times, the Mth (M is 1) of the plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming state). The first predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) can be given in the specific game state (big hit game state) of the above integer), while the Nth time (N is an integer larger than M) It is possible to give a second predetermined number of game values (2400 game balls) in the specific game state (big hit game state). Then, a notification regarding the total number of the first predetermined number (2400) and the second predetermined number (2400) (display of “4800” plate) is performed, and then a notification regarding the second predetermined number (2400) (“2400” plate) Display). Thus, by notifying the number of game values that can be given, it is possible to cause undulations in the player's psychological state and improve the interest of the game.

(A-2 ′) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit) When,
Grant means for granting benefits;
An informing means for informing (displaying a plate) about the amount of privilege that can be given by the giving means,
When the specific game state occurs a plurality of times in a predetermined period, the first privilege (2400 games) in the M-th (M is an integer of 1 or more) specific game state among the plurality of specific game states. Sphere), while the second privilege (2400 game balls) can be granted in the Nth specific game state (N is an integer greater than M). Yes,
The notification means includes
First notification means capable of performing notification regarding the total amount of the first privilege amount and the second privilege amount (display of the “4800” plate) (processing in steps S1112 and S1116 in FIG. 112) Sub CPU 330) that executes
After notification about the total amount of the amount of the first privilege and the amount of the second privilege is performed by the first notification means, notification regarding the amount of the second privilege (display of “2400” plate) Second notification means (sub CPU 330 that executes the process of step S1109 in FIG. 112).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) occurs a plurality of times, the Mth (M is 1) of the plurality of specific gaming states (big hit gaming state). While it is possible to give the first privilege (2400 game balls) in a specific game state (big hit game state) of the above integer), the Nth (N is an integer greater than M) specific game It is possible to give the second privilege (2400 game balls) in the state (big hit game state). Then, a notification regarding the total amount of the first privilege amount (2400) and the second privilege amount (2400) (display of the “4800” plate) is performed, and then the second privilege amount (2400). Notification (display of “2400” plate) can be performed. Thus, by notifying the amount of privilege that can be granted, it is possible to make the player's psychological undulations, and improve the interest of the game.

  In the present invention, the Mth specific gaming state and the Nth specific gaming state may be continuous (that is, N = M + 1), or the Mth specific gaming state and the Nth specific gaming state. One or a plurality of specific game states may occur between the specific game state. The M-th specific game state and the N-th specific game state may each be a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and the number of rounds is not particularly limited. The M-th specific gaming state and the N-th specific gaming state are included in a plurality of specific gaming states that have occurred in a predetermined period. It is possible to adopt a period of For example, when a special symbol change that triggers the occurrence of one specific gaming state stops (starts), there is one or more holding balls, and one of the one or more holding balls When the corresponding predetermined lottery result is a predetermined result (big hit) (holding ream), the specific gaming state corresponding to the one holding ball ends after the one specific gaming state starts. The period up to may be adopted as the predetermined period. When there are a plurality of holding balls whose predetermined lottery results are a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state that occurs with the holding ball corresponding to the final starting opening winning among the plurality of holding balls as an opportunity You may employ | adopt the time of ending as the end of a predetermined period. Also, when the special symbol change that triggered the occurrence of one specific gaming state is stopped (started), there is one or more holding balls, and one of the one or more holding balls Even if the corresponding predetermined lottery result is a predetermined result (big win) (holding ream), the timing after the end of the specific gaming state corresponding to the one holding ball (for example, the one May be adopted as the end of the predetermined period of time (when the specific game state generated after the next specific game state corresponding to the reserved ball) ends.

  In the second embodiment, the first predetermined number is 2400, and the second predetermined number is 2400. As the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number, any number can be appropriately adopted, and the first predetermined number may be larger than the second predetermined number, or the second predetermined number is the first predetermined number. The first predetermined number and the second predetermined number may be the same number.

  Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, it demonstrated that the alerting | reporting regarding the number of game balls was performed as alerting | reporting regarding the number of game values. In the present invention, it is not limited to game media (including game balls in pachinko gaming machines, medals in pachislot gaming machines, etc.), and it is possible to make notifications regarding various benefits. As such a privilege, it is possible to appropriately adopt a quantifiable target. For example, the number of games that can be executed in a state in which a player can easily acquire a game medium (for example, time reduction in a pachinko game machine). Points related to the number of times, the number of ARTs in a pachislot machine, etc., and the degree of expectation as to whether or not to notify the player's advantage (for example, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is finished) are adopted as benefits. May be. For example, the notification regarding the number of such points (for example, the value of the yellow 7 number counter or the value of the navigation number counter) may be performed by displaying the plate described in the second embodiment. In addition, the alerting | reporting aspect regarding a number is not limited to the display of a plate, It is possible to employ | adopt suitably the aspect which a player can recognize the said number directly or indirectly visually or auditorily. Further, as a notification regarding the predetermined number, in addition to a case where all of the number of benefits that can be granted from now on (a privilege that has been confirmed to be granted) are notified, a part of the number is also notified. In some cases, the numerical value itself may be notified, or the number determined to be additionally given to the number already determined to be given may be reported, or these may be summed up. You may alert | report the numerical value which carried out.

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured to perform an effect of informing the number of gaming values that can be acquired by a player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-51809). reference).

  The present inventor has come up with the idea that new entertainment properties can be created by elaborating on the production aspect in the process of earnestly examining various productions performed in gaming machines.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (special round effect) that can suggest an advantage for the player in a specific game state (big hit game state);
A target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7);
Object counting means capable of counting the number of the predetermined granting objects given by the object granting means until the specific gaming state starts,
The lottery means
The predetermined lottery can be performed in accordance with any lottery game state (probability change game state or non-probability change game state) among a plurality of lottery game states having different advantages for the player. ,
The specific effect executing means is
In the specific gaming state, the specific effect can be executed at least within a period according to the number of the predetermined grant targets at the time when the specific gaming state starts, and the specific effect It is possible to suggest the lottery gaming state through,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, the lottery gaming state (probability changing gaming state or non-probability changing gaming state) is selected from among a plurality of lottery gaming states having different advantages for the player. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a predetermined lottery, and in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), a specific effect that can suggest the advantage (a lottery gaming state (probability gaming state or non-probability gaming state))) It is possible to execute (special round effect). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined grant object (yellow 7) may be given, and it was given before a specific game state (big hit game state) is started. It is possible to count the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7). And, within a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), at least within a period according to the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) at the time when the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) starts, a specific effect ( The special round effect) can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to associate the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) with the period during which the specific effect (special round effect) is executed, and to the player, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7). It is possible to be interested in the number of games, and through this, the interest of the game can be improved.

(B-2) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit) When,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (effect for special round) in the specific game state;
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value each time a predetermined condition is established in the specific game state;
A target granting means capable of granting one or more predetermined grant targets (yellow 7);
A target consuming unit capable of consuming one of the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant unit each time the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state,
The specific effect executing means is
When the predetermined grant target that is not consumed by the target consumption means remains among the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant means, it is possible to execute the specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect) in a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous for the player. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, one or more predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) may be given, while in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Each time a predetermined condition (attacker prize) (game value grant condition) is established, it is possible to consume one predetermined grant target (yellow 7). And when the predetermined grant object (yellow 7) which has not yet been consumed among the predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) remains, the specific effect (effect for special round) can be executed. Has been. As a result, a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) and a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) that are consumed one by one each time a game value grant condition (attacker winning) is established, and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) remain. It is possible to make the player interested in the specific effects that can be performed (special round effects), and this can improve the interest of the game.

(B-3) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (special round effect) that may suggest an advantage for the player;
A target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7);
A target consumption means capable of consuming the predetermined grant target given by the target grant means,
The specific effect executing means is
When the predetermined grant target is given again by the target grant unit after all the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant unit are consumed by the target consumption unit and the predetermined grant target is lost In the first period until the predetermined grant target disappears (first to fifth round games shown in FIG. 123), the specific grant can be controlled to be executed, and the predetermined grant target In the second period (sixth to tenth round games shown in FIG. 123) until the predetermined grant target is given again by the target granting unit after the disappearance of the target granting means, the specific effect cannot be executed. A third period after the predetermined grant target is granted again by the target grant unit (the 12th round game shown in FIG. 123). In can be controlled so that the specific effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect) that can suggest an advantage for the player. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) can be given, while the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) can be consumed. Is possible. Then, after all the given grant targets (yellow 7) granted have been consumed and the given grant target (yellow 7) is gone, the given grant is given when the given grant target (yellow 7) is given again In the first period (the first to fifth round games shown in FIG. 123) until the target (yellow 7) disappears, control is possible so that a specific effect (special round effect) can be executed. In the second period (sixth to tenth round games shown in FIG. 123) until the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is given again after the grant target (yellow 7) disappears, the specific effect ( In the third period (the 12th round game shown in FIG. 123) after the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is granted again, the special round effect) can be controlled. Specific production (for special rounds Out) is configured to be controllable as may be performed. Thereby, after the period when the specific effect (effect for special round) is executed according to the presence or absence of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7), after the period when the specific effect (effect for special round) is not executed again, It is possible to generate a period during which the specific effect (special round effect) is executed. Then, through such a transition as to whether or not such a specific effect (special round effect) is executed, it is possible to cause undulations in the player's psychological state and improve the interest of the game.

  When the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is “lost”, the value of the counter (yellow seven number counter) stored in the storage means (RAM) or the predetermined grant displayed on the liquid crystal display device is displayed. In addition to the case where some value such as the number of objects (yellow 7) becomes 0, for example, when an image corresponding to a predetermined application object (yellow 7) displayed on the liquid crystal display device disappears (visually, physically Or the case where the remaining number disappears numerically and the case where the existing number ceases to exist).

(B-4) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
When a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means after the predetermined lottery result performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player Specific gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to (gaming state),
Production execution means capable of performing production,
A target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7),
The predetermined results include a first predetermined result (probability big hit) and a second predetermined result (usually big hit),
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the second predetermined result. Can be advantageously controlled for the player,
The production execution means
An object giving suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the predetermined grant target is given after the predetermined lottery is performed by the lottery means and before the derivation display of the identification information is performed by the symbol variation means. (Yellow 7 giving effect) can be executed,
The object giving means is
Only when the predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means after the target execution suggesting effect is executed by the effect executing means, the predetermined grant target corresponding to the target giving suggestion effect is deterministically determined. And if the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first lottery. 2 It is controllable so that the amount of the predetermined grant object to be given can be larger than the case where the predetermined result is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined result (big hit). It is possible to shift to (big hit gaming state), and when the predetermined lottery result becomes the first predetermined result (probable big hit), the predetermined lottery result becomes the second predetermined result (normally Control is more advantageous for the player than in the case of a big hit. In addition, when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the first predetermined result (probability big hit), the predetermined given is given more than the case where the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the second predetermined result (normal big hit). It is possible to control so that the amount of the application target (yellow 7) can be increased. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is given after the predetermined lottery is performed and before the identification information is derived and displayed. While it is possible to execute an object giving suggestion effect (yellow 7 giving effect) that suggests the possibility, only when a predetermined derivation display is performed after the object giving suggestion effect (yellow 7 giving effect) is executed The predetermined grant target (yellow 7) corresponding to the target grant suggestion effect (yellow 7 grant effect) can be definitely given. Through such an object giving suggestion effect (yellow 7 giving effect), the player expects that the result of the predetermined lottery will be a predetermined result (big hit) (especially the first predetermined result (probability big hit)). It is possible to cause undulations in the player's psychological state and improve the interest of the game.

(B-5) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit) When,
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (effect for special round) in the specific game state;
Effect mode control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode (second special mode) and a second effect mode (time reduction mode B);
A target granting means capable of granting a predetermined grant target (yellow 7);
A target consumption means capable of consuming the predetermined grant target given by the target grant means as the game progresses in the specific game state;
The predetermined results include a first predetermined result (probability big hit) and a second predetermined result (usually big hit),
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the second predetermined result. Can be advantageously controlled for the player,
The specific effect is an effect that may suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the first predetermined result,
The object giving means is
In the second performance mode, the predetermined grant is performed only when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is the predetermined result and a predetermined condition is satisfied (a freeze effect is generated). While it is possible to grant a target, in the first production mode, it is possible to grant the predetermined grant target even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied,
The specific effect executing means is
When the predetermined grant target that has not been consumed by the target consumption means remains among the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant means, the specific effect can be executed, In the specific gaming state in which the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means in the first effect mode is triggered when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In addition, while the specific effect can be executed, the specific transition that is triggered when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means in the second effect mode becomes the predetermined result. Even in the gaming state, the specific effect can be executed only when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, when a predetermined lottery result is a predetermined result (big hit), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. In addition, in the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect). Specifically, while it is possible to grant a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed as the game progresses in a specific game state (big hit game state). It is possible to execute a specific effect (special round effect) when a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) that has not yet been consumed remains. Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, in the second performance mode (time reduction mode B), the predetermined lottery result is the predetermined result (big hit), and the predetermined condition is A predetermined grant object (yellow 7) can be given only when it is established (freeze production occurs), while a predetermined condition is established in the first production mode (second special mode) ( Even if the freeze effect is not generated), the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) can be given. In connection with this, a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that transitions when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) in the first presentation mode (second special mode) In, a specific effect (special round effect) can be executed even if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (freeze effect is generated), while in the second effect mode (time reduction mode B) Even in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that transitions when the result of the lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit), only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (freeze production occurs) The special round effect) can be executed. The specific effect (special round effect) is an effect that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result (probability big hit) (a result advantageous to the player). Second Embodiment According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the above, as described above, the first predetermined result is obtained by providing different presentation modes in relation to the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) and the specific presentation (special round presentation). It is possible to create diversity in the player's expectation for (probable big hit) and improve the interest of the game.

  In the second effect mode (short-time mode B), the specific effect (for special rounds) in the specific game state (hit game state) that transitions when the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result (hit) The condition for executing (effect) is not limited to the occurrence of the freeze effect, and any condition can be appropriately adopted. As such conditions, in addition to a condition that a predetermined effect is performed and a condition that a predetermined effect pattern is selected, for example, a predetermined decorative symbol combination (for example, V alignment or G alignment) is stopped. The condition of being displayed may be adopted.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that the effect of displaying the special character on the liquid crystal display device 4 (the effect for appearance of the special character) is an effect that can be executed only when the probability variation is a big hit (probability change confirmation effect). As the specific effect (special round effect) in the present invention, it is possible to appropriately adopt an effect that can suggest an advantage for the player. For example, the special round effect (special character appearance effect) is performed only in the case of a hit that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a promising big hit, a big hit with a large number of time reductions, a big hit with a large number of rounds, etc.). You may comprise. In addition, special round effects (special character appearance effects) can be performed even in the case of a hit that is relatively unfavorable to the player (for example, a normal big hit, a big hit with a small number of time reductions, a big hit with a small number of rounds, etc.). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a promising big hit, a big hit with a large number of short times, a big hit with a large number of rounds, etc.) A special round effect (special character appearance effect) may be performed with a higher probability than in the case of a big hit, a big hit with a small number of short times, a big hit with a small number of rounds, etc.).

  In the second embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to a pachislot gaming machine. For example, an effect that may suggest an advantage related to a bonus game state such as BB or MB, an RT game state, an AT game state (ART game state), etc. may be adopted as the specific effect in the present invention. For example, while providing a bonus gaming state that is relatively advantageous for the player and a bonus gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous for the player, it is suggested through a specific effect which internal bonus combination corresponding to which bonus gaming state is won. You may comprise.

  Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that one predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed each time a predetermined condition (attacker prize) is established. In the present invention, the consumption mode of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is not limited to this example. For example, as a trigger for consumption of a predetermined grant target (yellow 7), it is possible to adopt an arbitrary condition, and a game is given to a predetermined winning opening (for example, a start opening, an attacker, a general winning opening, etc.) A predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed when the ball wins, or a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed when one round is completed, or a predetermined time The predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed when it elapses, or the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed when the variation time of the special symbol variation has elapsed. It is good also as consuming a predetermined grant object (yellow 7) when special symbol change of the number of times is performed. The gaming state in which the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed is not limited to the specific game state (big hit game state), and the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) in a game state other than the specific game state (big hit game state) May be consumed. In addition, when the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination that triggers a transition of a gaming state or a symbol combination related to a small role) is stopped or displayed. When a bonus combination or an AT lottery trigger is determined as an internal winning combination, or when a predetermined number of unit games are played, a predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is consumed. Also good. When a condition that triggers consumption of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) is satisfied, the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed without fail, or the predetermined grant target (yellow 7) may be consumed. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to consume. Further, the number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) consumed when the condition is satisfied is not particularly limited, and a predetermined number of predetermined grant targets (yellow 7) may be consumed. And it is good also as consuming the predetermined | prescribed grant object (yellow 7) determined by lottery. As processing related to the consumption of the predetermined grant target (yellow 7), processing for subtracting the value of the counter (yellow 7 number counter) stored in the storage means (RAM), and display on the liquid crystal display device The present invention is not limited to the process of subtracting (updating) some value, such as the process of subtracting the number of predetermined given objects (yellow 7), for example, the predetermined given object (yellow 7) displayed on the liquid crystal display device. For example, processing for deleting the corresponding image may be performed.

  As the predetermined grant target in the present invention, a quantifiable target can be used as appropriate, and a target represented by an amount can be used in addition to a target whose number can be counted. The display mode of the predetermined grant target is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately expressed by numbers, characters, figures, symbols, shapes, colors, or combinations thereof. Further, the predetermined amount to be given may be expressed not by a numerical value but by a meter or the like (see FIG. 128).

  Also, in the second embodiment, when the result of the special symbol variation is a loss, yellow 7 is temporarily added (temporarily) (the value of the yellow 7 number counter is added) (step S1208 in FIG. 116). And step S1226 in FIG. 117), and later, the yellow 7 application is canceled (see step S1229 in FIG. 117). In the present invention, when the result of the special symbol variation is a loss, yellow 7 may not be given from the beginning (the value of the yellow 7 number counter is not added). In this case, it is good also as performing the effect (refer FIG.122 (b)) as if yellow 7 is provided in the state where yellow 7 is not provided.

  Further, in the second embodiment, it has been described that the extra number of yellow 7 is determined by lottery (see step S1274 in FIG. 120). According to this, the value of the yellow 7 number counter may not reach the yellow 7 upper limit number. However, in the present invention, the yellow 7 number counter value is always configured to reach the yellow 7 upper limit number. Also good. For example, when a freeze effect is performed and 160 yellows 7 are not given before the big hit gaming state is started (see step S1236 in FIG. 117), the yellow 7 counter is displayed during the big hit gaming state. It is also possible to add yellow 7 so that the value always reaches 160. Thus, in order to make the value of the yellow 7 number counter reach the yellow 7 upper limit number, for example, a number corresponding to the shortage with respect to the yellow 7 upper limit number (the difference between the yellow 7 upper limit number and the current yellow 7 number). The scenario regarding the addition of yellow 7 may be determined at the start of the big hit gaming state so that all of the yellow 7s are given during the big hit gaming state.

  In the present invention, the contents of effects performed in each round game may be determined in advance. The timing for determining the content of the performance is not particularly limited, and may be at the start of the big hit gaming state, or before the start of the big hit gaming state (for example, the special symbol fluctuation that triggered the occurrence of the big hit gaming state) For example, when the jackpot determination is triggered when the jackpot gaming state occurs). In this case, the contents of effects performed in all round games may be determined in advance, or the contents of effects performed in each round game other than the first round may be determined in advance.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a passing area provided in a gaming area where the launched game ball can roll, Control is executed to variably display the symbols as identification information on the display area of the display device, and control to derive and display the variably displayed symbols is executed. ), A game that allows the player to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine configured such that if a predetermined number of gaming balls can be inserted into a winning opening, the mission will be successful and a special effect will be performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017 2017). -221523).

  The present inventor may be able to create new entertainment properties by devising the conditions for generating effects in the process of earnestly examining various effects performed in the gaming machine. I came up with an idea.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of creating new entertainment properties.

  In this regard, the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) Symbol changing means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 etc.) capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery when winning,
When a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means after the predetermined lottery result performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player Specific gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to (gaming state),
Information suggestion means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined winning (game ball winning) is established in a period in which the identification information is changed by the symbol changing means,
The information suggestion means is:
If the predetermined winning is established within a first period (a period until reaching reach) during which the identification information is fluctuated by the symbol variation means, first predetermined information (probability change game) Information on the state) can be suggested, while if the predetermined winning is achieved within a second period (a period after reaching reach) different from the first period, It is possible to suggest second predetermined information (information about jackpot) different from the predetermined information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to suggest predetermined information when a predetermined winning (game ball winning) is established in a period in which the identification information is fluctuated. It is. Specifically, if a predetermined winning (game ball winning) is established within a first period (a period until reaching reach) during a period in which the identification information is changing, the first predetermined While it is possible to suggest information (information regarding the probable game state), if a predetermined winning (game ball winning) is established within the second period (the period after reaching reach), 2 It is configured to be able to suggest predetermined information (information on jackpot). In this way, by varying the content of the suggested information according to the timing at which a predetermined winning (game ball winning) is established, it is possible to create diversity in the production for suggesting the information It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
When a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means after the predetermined lottery result performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player Specific gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to (gaming state),
When a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established, any one of a plurality of effects including a first effect (big hit reliability suggesting effect) and a second effect (probable change suggesting effect) is performed. Production execution means capable of,
As the predetermined result, there are provided a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (probability big hit) and a second predetermined result (usually big hit),
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the first predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes the second predetermined result. Can be advantageously controlled for the player,
The first effect is an effect that may indicate the possibility that the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means has become the predetermined result, and the second effect is a type of the predetermined result It is a production that can suggest
The production execution means
It is possible to produce an effect according to the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined result (big hit). It is possible to shift to (big hit gaming state). In addition, as the predetermined result (big hit), a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (probability big hit) and a second predetermined result (normal big hit) are provided, and the predetermined lottery result is the first result. When the predetermined result (probability big hit) is achieved, the player can control more advantageously than when the predetermined lottery result becomes the second predetermined result (usually big win). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, any one of a plurality of effects including a first effect (hit reliability suggesting effect) and a second effect (probability suggesting effect). Can be done. Specifically, the first effect (big hit reliability suggesting effect) is an effect that may suggest the possibility that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result (big hit), and the second effect (probable change suggestive effect). ) Is an effect that may indicate the type of a predetermined result (big hit), so that it is possible to perform an effect according to the timing at which a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established among a plurality of effects. It is configured. In this way, it is possible to create diversity in the production by changing the content of the production to be executed according to the timing at which a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established. Can be improved.

(C-3) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
When a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol changing means after the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state (for example, advantageous for the player) , A specific gaming state transition means capable of shifting to the jackpot gaming state),
Effect mode control means capable of controlling to any one of a plurality of effect modes including a first effect mode (normal mode (1)) and a second effect mode (normal mode (2));
An information suggestion means capable of suggesting predetermined information when a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established,
The information suggestion means is:
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first effect mode, it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information (information related to the big hit), while the predetermined condition is in the second effect mode. If established, it is possible to suggest second predetermined information (information relating to a probability variation gaming state) different from the first predetermined information.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to suggest predetermined information when a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established. Specifically, in a case where a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established in the first production mode (normal mode (1)), it is possible to suggest the first predetermined information (information on the big hit). On the other hand, when a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established in the second production mode (normal mode (2)), it is possible to suggest the second predetermined information (information on the probability variation gaming state). It is configured as follows. In this way, by varying the content of the suggested information according to the production mode when a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established, diversity is produced in the production for suggesting the information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-4) Symbol variation means (first special symbol display unit 5C, second special symbol display unit 5D, liquid crystal display device 4 and the like) capable of varying the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
When a predetermined derivation display is performed by the symbol variation means after the predetermined lottery result performed by the lottery means becomes a predetermined result (big hit), a specific gaming state (big hit) advantageous to the player Specific gaming state transition means capable of transitioning to (gaming state),
Specific game state ending means for ending the specific game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
Any one of a plurality of gaming states including a first predetermined gaming state (non-probability changing gaming state) and a second predetermined gaming state (probability changing gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. Predetermined game state control means that can be controlled to a state;
A suggestion means capable of providing a predetermined suggestion when a specific condition (game ball winning) is established,
The lottery means
When the predetermined gaming state control means is controlled to the second predetermined gaming state, the predetermined gaming state control means has a higher probability than the case where the predetermined gaming state control means is controlled to the first predetermined gaming state. The lottery result can be controlled to be the predetermined result,
The suggestion means is
After the specific gaming state is ended by the specific gaming state ending unit, the predetermined gaming state control unit performs the first game state control unit until the number of times that the symbol information is derived and displayed by the symbol changing unit reaches a predetermined number. 2 It is possible to suggest the possibility that the game state is controlled to a predetermined game state. On the other hand, after the number of times that the identification information is derived and displayed by the symbol changing means reaches the predetermined number of times, the possibility is displayed. Other suggestions can be made without suggestion,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player when a predetermined derivation display is performed after a predetermined lottery result has reached a predetermined result (big hit). It is possible to shift to (big hit gaming state). In addition, when the game is controlled to the second predetermined game state (probability variable game state), the result of the predetermined lottery is higher with a higher probability than when the game is controlled to the first predetermined game state (non-probability variable game state). It can be controlled to achieve a predetermined result (big hit). Here, according to the pachinko gaming machine 6001 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to make a predetermined suggestion when a specific condition (game ball winning) is established. Specifically, after the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) ends, the second predetermined gaming state (probability changing gaming state) until the number of times that the derivation display of the identification information is performed (the number of derivation display times) reaches a predetermined number. ) Is possible to suggest the possibility of being controlled, but after the number of derivation display reaches the predetermined number of times, other suggestions can be made without suggesting the possibility Has been. As described above, whether or not to suggest the possibility of being controlled to the second predetermined gaming state (probability gaming state) depends on the number of derived display times when the specific condition (game ball winning) is established. By doing so, it is possible to create diversity in the production for performing the suggestion, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the second embodiment, it has been described that the predetermined information suggestion (probability change suggestion or jackpot reliability suggestion) is performed when a predetermined condition (Kroon winning) is established during the special symbol variation. In the present invention, the condition for suggesting the predetermined information is not limited to the Kroon prize, and any condition can be adopted as appropriate, and the special symbol does not change in the condition. Sometimes it may hold true. For example, a condition that a game ball wins in a predetermined area and a predetermined symbol combination (including a decorative symbol combination in a pachinko gaming machine and a symbol combination corresponding to an internal winning combination in a pachislot machine) are stopped and displayed. The condition that the result of the predetermined lottery (including the jackpot determination in the pachinko gaming machine and the internal lottery in the pachislot machine) becomes the predetermined result, the predetermined operation (in addition to various operations in the pachinko gaming machine, pachislot A condition that a stop operation (including operation of a stop button with a predetermined pressing order and timing) in the machine is performed may be adopted as a condition for indicating predetermined information. When the condition that a game ball wins (enters) a predetermined area (predetermined prize) is adopted, the predetermined area includes a start gate, a general winning opening, a pass gate that triggers a normal symbol lottery, and an out It is possible to include a mouth (an area provided at the bottom of the game area and accepting a game ball that has not won a prize in another winning area). The predetermined winning may be a special symbol variation or a normal symbol variation as a result of the game ball passing through the predetermined region, a payout may be performed, or the payout may be It may not be performed.

  Further, in the present invention, the suggested information is not limited to the probability change suggestion and the jackpot reliability suggestion, and any information can be suggested. For example, information on success or failure of conditions for operating a gaming state advantageous to the player (specific gaming state), and the degree of advantage related to the specific gaming state (for example, whether it is a probable big hit, number of times, number of rounds, etc.) It may be suggested. In the present invention, the gaming state (specific gaming state) advantageous to the player includes a big hit gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine, a probability variation gaming state, a short-time gaming state, and a bonus gaming state (BB gaming state and MB in a pachislot gaming machine). Gaming state, etc.), RT gaming state, AT gaming state (ART gaming state), etc. can be adopted as appropriate.

  In the second embodiment, when a predetermined condition (game winning of a game ball) is established within a first period (a period until reaching reach), the first predetermined information (information regarding the probability variation gaming state) is suggested. On the other hand, if a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established within the second period (the period after reaching reach), the second predetermined information (information on the big hit) is suggested. did. In the present invention, of course, on the contrary, if a predetermined condition (game ball winning) is established within the first period (the period until reaching reach), the second predetermined information (information on the jackpot) On the other hand, if a predetermined condition (game winning) is established within the second period (the period after reaching reach), the first predetermined information (information regarding the probable game state) is suggested. It is good to do.

The first period and the second period are not limited to a period until reaching reach and a period after reaching reach, respectively, and may be a period defined by a time unrelated to reach. For example, a period from when the variation display of the identification information is started until a predetermined time elapses is set as the first period, and a period after the predetermined time elapses after the variation display of the identification information is started is the second period. It is good. Also, after the gaming state advantageous to the player (specific gaming state) ends, the period until the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed reaches a predetermined number of times is defined as the first period, and the gaming state advantageous to the player The period after the number of times that the derivation display of the identification information has been performed after the (specific game state) has ended may be a second period. As the number of times the identification information is derived and displayed, the number of unit games in the pachislot gaming machine can be adopted in addition to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the pachinko gaming machine. The first period and the second period may be continuous periods or periods separated from each other by a certain time. For example, the timing of the special symbol variable begins _{T 0,} an arbitrary timing in the special symbol variation during the _{T 5, T} 0 ~T 5 when to terminate, in turn _{T 1,} T 2, _{T 3} and, In the case of T ₄ , periods in which any two timings of T _{0 to} T ₅ are set to the start and end respectively (for example, T _{0 to} T ₁ , T _{0 to} T ₂ , T _{0 to} T ₃ , T ₁ to T T ₂ , T _{1 to} T ₃ , T _{3 to} T ₄ , T _{3 to} T ₅ , T _{4 to} T _5, etc.) may be used as the first period and the second period. As T _{1 to} T ₄ , it is possible to employ, for example, a timing at which a decorative symbol is displayed in a reach manner, a timing at which a decorative pattern is developed into a normal reach, a super reach, or the like.

  In the above description, the first special symbol display unit 5C, the second special symbol display unit 5D, the liquid crystal display device 4 and the like have been described as examples of the symbol variation means in the present invention. The symbol variation means is not particularly limited as long as the identification information can be varied. The identification information includes, in addition to special symbols and decorative symbols in pachinko gaming machines, ordinary symbols, etc., in pachislot machines. It is also possible to adopt a design drawn on a reel.

<Appendix (Others)>
Conventionally, identification information is displayed on the display area of the variable display device when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as when the game ball has passed through a start area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Variable display control means is provided for performing variable display control and performing control for deriving and displaying identification information for which variable display is being performed, which is advantageous to the player when the identification information that is derived and displayed has a predetermined combination. 2. Description of the Related Art Pachinko gaming machines are known that are designed to shift to a big hit game state (so-called “hit”).

  Conventionally, it is detected that a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal, etc.”) and a start lever is operated by the player, A signal for requesting the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel by detecting that the start switch for requesting the start of rotation of the reel and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels has been pressed by the player Of the stepping motor, which is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, transmits the respective driving force to each reel, and the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit that controls the operation and rotates and stops each reel, and the start lever is operated Is detected, a lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. A gaming machine called pachislot is known.

  However, since conventional pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines do not have the configuration and functions as gaming machines as in the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can improve the interest of a game.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to this embodiment]
When the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, a player's medal insertion operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal slot, or a credited medal is a maximum BET button or 1-BET When the game is started by operating the button and the medal is paid out when the game ends, the hopper mechanism is driven and the medal is paid out or credited from the medal payout exit. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a game medium required for a game is inserted by a player, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is granted (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the game result. be able to. In other words, not only the form in which the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical player's operation and the game medium is paid out, but the main control circuit itself electromagnetically manages the game medium held by the player, It may be a medalless game. In other words, the game value in the present invention is not limited to a physically existing game medium, and any tangible or intangible object that can be used for playing a game can be adopted as appropriate. Such an intangible object may be game medium data (for example, medal data) equivalent to a tangible object such as a medal (game medium physically present). In addition, the manner in which the game value is given to the player is not limited to a mode in which a physically existing game medium actually moves under the player's occupation, even if it is a simple data movement that does not involve the movement of tangible objects Alternatively, a tangible object (such as a card) in which game medium data is stored may be given to the player. In addition, the game media that the player holds may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the game media.

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. The game medium lending operation (that is, the operation for providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role relating to the payout of the game medium ( A game medium payout operation (that is, an operation for acquiring a game medium necessary for paying out a game medium to the player) or a game medium to be used for a game when the combination is established) It may be possible to perform an electromagnetic recording operation. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays, for example, the number of game media held on the front surface of the game machine based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the held game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external device. It is desirable that the player has a performance that cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless it is via the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., a game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is ended, the game media management device transmits the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any of the return operation means. The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game media handling device, but the game machine or the game media handling device transmits only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged or stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be able to insert a member recording medium in the game hall and store it in the member recording medium so that it can be replayed at a later date.

  In addition, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication with respect to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Also good. In this case, information that can only be known by the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  As described above, this game medium management device may be one that allows games only without medals, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action, and the game medium May be a form that allows the game to be paid out, a form that allows a game without medals, or a form that allows a game to be played in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the selector and the hopper mechanism, or these are controlled by the main control circuit, and the control result is transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method that enables control that allows the player to record and display the total number of game media that can be used for gaming by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-described game balls, a game medium management device is provided in the same manner, It is also possible to manage the player's game media.

  In this way, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors, hopper mechanisms, and the like inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost of the game machine In addition to reducing manufacturing costs, it is also possible to prevent players from coming into direct contact with the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices used for gaming machines. It will also reduce power. Also, it is possible to prevent illegal acts through game media and game media slot and payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  Further, the set value may be only one stage. At this time, the setting change process may be left or eliminated. In the case of leaving the setting change process, it is only possible to re-set to the same setting, so that the process is substantially a process for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is only one level, a mode related to the lottery (first hit and / or extra) etc. of the advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times that a predetermined combination winning with a predetermined probability is counted However, when the number of times reaches a specified value, the mode can be changed by switching the mode.

  In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator with a predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of the ball. If it is defined that the value is switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one stage, it can be made inferior to a plurality of gaming machines provided. For example, when the business hours of the day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 sec. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9659 times. Since it is not realistic that no breaks (meals or toilets) are sandwiched, the number of games per day is considered to be approximately 8000 times. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in approximately one day.

  In addition, if the number of times a given combination wins reaches the specified value, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is unfavorable are switched alternately, the profit will be stabilized in the two-day cycle, so that the game It can contribute to the sales of the store. In addition, although the case where a set value was made into one step was demonstrated, it is not restricted to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if it is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the waves of the balls more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Further, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the monotonous state where the set values are reduced.

  If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the six-stage setting value can be changed to one-stage setting value, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired payout ratio at each stage is also 1/6. Furthermore, only gaming machines that are suitable for testing are permitted to be used for business, and the time required for testing can be shortened.

  The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. In the embodiment described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachislot gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

  The first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present invention have been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the present invention is not particularly limited. Specific configurations of each unit and the like are appropriately changed in design. Is possible. The effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

  Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description above, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application is various. The terms and terminology used in the present specification are used to accurately describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Moreover, it would be easy for those skilled in the art to infer other configurations, systems, methods, and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Accordingly, the description of the claims should be regarded as including an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. The purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents and essence of this application by patent offices and general public institutions, and engineers belonging to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. It is intended to be able to make a quick determination through a simple survey. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the claims. Moreover, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desired that the interpretation should be made with sufficient consideration of the literatures already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes processing executed by a computer. The above explanations and expressions are given for the purpose of enabling those skilled in the art to understand the most efficiently. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process without self-contradiction. In each process, transmission / reception, recording, and the like of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but these are used only for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processes in each process may be described in expressions common to human actions, but the processes described in this specification are executed by various devices in principle. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing are obvious from the above description.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game board 4000 1st actor apparatus 4200 Lower movable stage actor 4210 Lower rotation decoration body 4220 Lower rotary drive mechanism 4300 Lower actor lift mechanism 4330 Left side drive mechanism 4340 Right side drive mechanism 4400 Upper movable stage actor 4410 Upper round Moving decoration body 4420 Upper rotation driving mechanism 4500 Upper accessory lifting mechanism 4530 Left driving mechanism 4540 Right driving mechanism 5000 Second accessory device 5100 Left movable effect accessory 5120 Left movable ornament object 5200 Right movable effect accessory 5220 Movable decorative body on the right side 6001 Pachinko machine

Claims (1)

A pattern changing means capable of changing the identification information when the start condition is satisfied;
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery;
Specific game state transition means capable of shifting to a specific game state advantageous to a player when the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in the specific game state;
Game value giving means capable of giving a game value each time a predetermined condition is established in the specific game state;
A target granting means capable of granting one or more predetermined grant targets;
A target consuming unit capable of consuming one of the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant unit each time the predetermined condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state,
The specific effect executing means is
When the predetermined grant target that is not consumed by the target consumption means remains among the predetermined grant targets given by the target grant means, it is possible to execute the specific effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images